Cisco Systems 15454M6Dc Users Manual

15454M6DC to the manual d989d31d-6e7c-4964-8cf6-012218c52571

2015-01-05

: Cisco-Systems Cisco-Systems-15454M6Dc-Users-Manual-201937 cisco-systems-15454m6dc-users-manual-201937 cisco-systems pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 458 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Contents
About This Manual
Hardware Installation
Software Installation
Node Setup
IP Networking
SONET Topologies
Circuits and Tunnels
Card Provisioning
Performance Monitoring
Ethernet Operation
Alarm Monitoring and Management
SNMP
Circuit Routing
Regulatory and Compliance Requirements
Acronyms
Glossary
index

Corporate Headquarters

Cisco Systems, Inc.

170 West Tasman Drive

San Jose, CA 95134-1706

USA

http://www.cisco.com

Tel: 408 526-4000

800 553-NETS (6387)

Fax: 408 526-4100

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and

Operations Guide

Product and Documentation Release 3.1

November 2001

Customer Order Number: DOC-7813453=

Text Part Number: 78-13453-01

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE.

ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED

WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY

PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET

THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE

SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class A devices: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital

device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated

in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful

interference, in which case users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.

The following information is for FCC compliance of Class B devices: The equipment described in this manual generates and may radiate radio-frequency energy.

If it is not installed in accordance with Cisco’s installation instructions, it may cause interference with radio and television reception. This equipment has been

tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the specifications in part 15 of the FCC rules. These specifications are

designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in

a particular installation.

Modifying the equipment without Cisco’s written authorization may result in the equipment no longer complying with FCC requirements for Class A or Class B

digital devices. In that event, your right to use the equipment may be limited by FCC regulations, and you may be required to correct any interference to radio or

television communications at your own expense.

You can determine whether your equipment is causing interference by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or

one of its peripheral devices. If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception, try to correct the interference by using one or more of the

following measures:

• Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.

• Move the equipment to one side or the other of the television or radio.

• Move the equipment farther away from the television or radio.

• Plug the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the equipment and the television or radio are on

circuits controlled by different circuit breakers or fuses.)

Modifications to this product not authorized by Cisco Systems, Inc. could void the FCC approval and negate your authority to operate the product.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS

IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING

FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS

MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

AccessPath, AtmDirector, Browse with Me, CCIP, CCSI, CD-PAC, CiscoLink, the Cisco Powered Network logo, Cisco Systems Networking Academy,

the Cisco Systems Networking Academy logo, Cisco Unity, Fast Step, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, FrameShare, IGX, Internet Quotient, IP/VC, iQ

Breakthrough, iQ Expertise, iQ FastTrack, the iQ Logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, MGX, the Networkers logo, ScriptBuilder, ScriptShare, SMARTnet,

TransPath, Voice LAN, Wavelength Router, and WebViewer are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn,

and Discover All That’s Possible are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCNA, CCNP,

Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems

logo, Empowering the Internet Generation, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherSwitch, FastHub, FastSwitch, GigaStack, IOS, IP/TV, LightStream,

MICA, Network Registrar, Packet, PIX, Post-Routing, Pre-Routing, RateMUX, Registrar, SlideCast, StrataView Plus, Stratm, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter,

and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and certain other countries.

All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Web site are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a

partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0110R)

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide, Release 3.1

iii

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

CONTENTS

About This Manual xxxiii

Audience xxxiii

Organization xxxiii

Related products:

Chapter 6, “Circuits and

Tunnels”Describes how to create standard STS and VT1.5 circuits as well

as VT tunnels, multiple drop circuits, and monitor circuits. The

chapter also explains how to edit UPSR circuits and create path

traces to monitor traffic.

Chapter 7, “Card Provisioning”Provides procedures for changing the default transmission

parameters for ONS 15454 electrical and optical cards. The

chapter also includes provisioning the Alarm Interface

Controller card, enabling optical cards for SDH, and converting

DS-1 and DS-3 cards from 1:1 to 1:N card protection.

Chapter 8, “Performance

Monitoring”Provides performance monitoring thresholds for ONS 15454

electrical and optical cards.

Chapter 9, “Ethernet Operation”Explains how to use the Ethernet features of the ONS 15454,

including transporting Ethernet traffic over SONET, creating

and provisioning VLANs, protecting Ethernet traffic,

provisioning Multicard and Single-card EtherSwitch,

provisioning several types of Ethernet circuits, viewing Ethernet

performance data, and creating Ethernet remote monitoring

(RMON) alarm thresholds.

Chapter 10, “Alarm Monitoring

and Management”Explains how to view and manage alarms with CTC, which

includes viewing current and historical alarm data, creating

alarm profiles, and suppressing alarms. To find procedures for

clearing CTC alarms, see the “Alarm Troubleshooting” chapter

of the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Reference Guide.

Chapter 11, “SNMP”Explains how Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is

used with the ONS 15454.

Appendix A, “Circuit Routing”Explains automated and manual circuit routing in detail.

Appendix B, “Regulatory and

Compliance Requirements”Provides customer, industry, and government requirements met

by the ONS 15454. Installation warnings are also included.

Appendix C, “Acronyms”Defines commonly-used acronyms.

Appendix D, “Glossary”Defines commonly-used terms.

Chapter Number and Title Description

xxxv

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

About This Manual

Conventions

Cisco ONS 15216 EDFA1 Operations Guide

Installing the Cisco ONS 15216 DWDM Filters

Installing Cisco ONS 15216 OADMS

Installing Cisco ONS 15216 Optical Performance Manager Operations Guide

Conventions

The following conventions are used throughout this publication:

Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or useful background information.

Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment

damage or loss of data.

Warning

Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in harm to

yourself or others.

Tip Means the information might help you solve a problem.

Obtaining Documentation

The following sections provide sources for obtaining documentation from Cisco Systems.

Convention Definition

Telcordia Replaces all instances of Bellcore, the former name of

Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Cisco Transport Controller

(CTC) Replaces all instances of Cerent Management System

(CMS)

Bold Denotes icons, buttons, or tabs that the user must

select

> Used to separate consecutive actions; for example,

“click the Maintenance>Protection>Ring tabs”

Procedure: Precedes all procedures; a horizontal line indicates the

end of each procedure

xxxvi

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

About This Manual

Obtaining Documentation

World Wide Web

You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at the following sites:

•http://www.cisco.com

•http://www-china.cisco.com

•http://www-europe.cisco.com

Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM

Optical networking-related documentation, including Release 3.1 of the Cisco ONS 15454 Installation

and Operations Guide, Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Reference Guide, and the Cisco ONS

15454 TL1 Command Guide, is available in a CD-ROM package that ships with your product. The

Optical Networking Product Documentation CD-ROM, a member of the Cisco Connection Family, is

updated as required. Therefore, it might be more current than printed documentation. The CD-ROM

package is available as a single package or as an annual subscription. You can also access Cisco

documentation on the World Wide Web at http://www.cisco.com, http://www-china.cisco.com, or

http://www.europe.cisco.com.

Ordering Documentation

Cisco documentation is available in the following ways:

•Registered Cisco Direct Customers can order Cisco Product documentation, including the Optical

Networking Product CD-ROM, from the Networking Products MarketPlace:

http://www.cisco.com/cgi-bin/order/order_root.pl

•Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by

calling Cisco corporate headquarters (California, USA) at 408 526-7208 or, in North America, by

calling 800 553-NETS(6387).

Documentation Feedback

If you are reading Cisco product documentation on the World Wide Web, you can submit technical

comments electronically. Click Feedback in the toolbar and select Documentation. After you complete

the form, click Submit to send it to Cisco.

You can e-mail your comments to bug-doc@cisco.com.

To submit your comments by mail, for your convenience many documents contain a response card

behind the front cover. Otherwise, you can mail your comments to the following address:

Cisco Systems, Inc.

Document Resource Connection

170 West Tasman Drive

San Jose, CA 95134-9883

We appreciate your comments.

xxxvii

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

About This Manual

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Cisco provides Cisco.com as a starting point for all technical assistance. Customers and partners can

obtain documentation, troubleshooting tips, and sample configurations from online tools. For Cisco.com

registered users, additional troubleshooting tools are available from the TAC website.

Cisco.com

Cisco.com is the foundation of a suite of interactive, networked services that provides immediate, open

access to Cisco information and resources at anytime, from anywhere in the world. This highly

integrated Internet application is a powerful, easy-to-use tool for doing business with Cisco.

Cisco.com provides a broad range of features and services to help customers and partners streamline

business processes and improve productivity. Through Cisco.com, you can find information about Cisco

and our networking solutions, services, and programs. In addition, you can resolve technical issues with

online technical support, download and test software packages, and order Cisco learning materials and

merchandise. Valuable online skill assessment, training, and certification programs are also available.

Customers and partners can self-register on Cisco.com to obtain additional personalized information and

services. Registered users can order products, check on the status of an order, access technical support,

and view benefits specific to their relationships with Cisco.

To access Cisco.com, go to the following website:

http://www.cisco.com

Technical Assistance Center

The Cisco TAC website is available to all customers who need technical assistance with a Cisco product

or technology that is under warranty or covered by a maintenance contract.

Contacting TAC by Using the Cisco TAC Website

If you have a priority level 3 (P3) or priority level 4 (P4) problem, contact TAC by going to the TAC

website:

http://www.cisco.com/tac

P3 and P4 level problems are defined as follows:

•P3—Your network performance is degraded. Network functionality is noticeably impaired, but most

business operations continue.

•P4—You need information or assistance on Cisco product capabilities, product installation, or basic

product configuration.

In each of the above cases, use the Cisco TAC website to quickly find answers to your questions.

To register for Cisco.com, go to the following website:

http://www.cisco.com/register/

If you cannot resolve your technical issue by using the TAC online resources, Cisco.com registered users

can open a case online by using the TAC Case Open tool at the following website:

http://www.cisco.com/tac/caseopen

xxxviii

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

About This Manual

Obtaining Technical Assistance

Contacting TAC by Telephone

If you have a priority level 1(P1) or priority level 2 (P2) problem, contact TAC by telephone and

immediately open a case. The toll-free Optical Networking Assistance number is 1-877-323-7368.

P1 and P2 level problems are defined as follows:

•P1—Your production network is down, causing a critical impact to business operations if service is

not restored quickly. No workaround is available.

•P2—Your production network is severely degraded, affecting significant aspects of your business

operations. No workaround is available.

CHAPTER

1-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Hardware Installation

This chapter provides procedures for installing the Cisco ONS 15454. Chapter topics include:

•Installation equipment

•Rack installation

•Front door access

•Backplane covers

•Fan-tray assembly

•Power and ground installation

•Backplane pin connections (alarms, timing, LAN, and craft interface)

•Coaxial and DS-1 cable installation

•Card installation

•Fiber-optic cable installation

•Cable routing and management

•Ferrite installation

•Hardware specifications

•Hardware and software compatibility

Note The Cisco ONS 15454 assembly is intended for use with telecommunications equipment only.

Warning

Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install, replace, or service this

equipment.

Warning

This equipment must be installed and maintained by service personnel as defined by AS/NZS 3260.

Incorrectly connecting this equipment to a general purpose outlet could be hazardous. The

telecommunications lines must be disconnected 1) before unplugging the main power connector

and/or 2) while the housing is open.

1-2

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Installation Overview

Warning

The ONS 15454 is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted access area is

where access can only be gained by service personnel through the use of a special tool, lock, key,

or other means of security. A restricted access area is controlled by the authority responsible for

the location.

Warning

The ONS 15454 is suitable for mounting on concrete or other non-combustible surfaces only.

Caution Unused card slots should be filled with a blank faceplate (Cisco P/N 15454-BLANK). The blank

faceplate ensures proper airflow when operating the ONS 15454 without the front door attached,

although Cisco recommends that the front door remain attached.

Note The ONS 15454 is designed to comply with GR-1089-CORE Type 2 and Type 4. Install and operate

the ONS 15454 only in environments that do not expose wiring or cabling to the outside plant.

Acceptable applications include Central Office Environments (COEs), Electronic Equipment

Enclosures (EEEs), Controlled Environment Vaults (CEVs), huts, and Customer Premise

Environments (CPEs).

1.1 Installation Overview

When installed in an equipment rack, the ONS 15454 assembly is typically connected to a fuse and alarm

panel to provide centralized alarm connection points and distributed power for the ONS 15454. Fuse and

alarm panels are third-party equipment and are not described in this documentation. If you are unsure

about the requirements or specifications for a fuse and alarm panel, consult the documentation for the

related equipment. The front door of the ONS 15454 allows access to the shelf assembly, fan-tray

assembly, and cable-management area. The backplanes provide access to alarm contacts, external

interface contacts, power terminals, and BNC/SMB connectors.

Warning

The ONS 15454 relies on the protective devices in the building installation to protect against short

circuit, overcurrent, and grounding faults. Ensure that the protective devices are properly rated to

protect the system, and that they comply with national and local codes.

Warning

Incorporate a readily-accessible, two-poled disconnect device in the fixed wiring.

You can mount the ONS 15454 in a 19- or 23-inch rack. The shelf assembly weighs approximately 55

pounds with no cards installed and features a front door for added security, a fan tray module for cooling,

and extensive cable-management space.

ONS 15454 optical cards have SC connectors on the card faceplate. Fiber optic cables are routed into

the front of the destination cards. Electrical cards (DS-1, DS-3, DS3XM-6, and EC-1) require electrical

interface assemblies (EIAs) to provide the cable connection points for the shelf assembly. In most cases,

EIAs are ordered with the ONS 15454 and come pre-installed on the backplane. See the “Backplane

Access” section on page 1-14 for more information about the EIAs.

1-3

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Installation Equipment

The ONS 15454 is powered using -48V DC power. Negative, return, and ground power terminals are

accessible on the backplane.

Table 1-1 lists the tasks required to install an ONS 15454.

Note In this chapter, the terms “ONS 15454” and “shelf assembly” are used interchangeably. In the

installation context, these terms have the same meaning. Otherwise, shelf assembly refers to the

physical steel enclosure that holds cards and connects power, and ONS 15454 refers to the entire

system, both hardware and software.

Install the ONS 15454 in compliance with your local and national electrical codes:

•United States: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70; United States National Electrical

Code

•Canada: Canadian Electrical Code, Part I, CSA C22.1

•Other countries: If local and national electrical codes, are not available, refer to IEC 364, Part 1

through Part 7.

Warning

Read the installation instructions before you connect the system to its power source.

Warning

Dispose of this product according to all national laws and regulations.

1.2 Installation Equipment

You will need the following tools and equipment to install and test the ONS 15454.

Table 1-1 Installation Tasks

Task Reference

Mount the ONS 15454 in the rack. See the “Rack Installation” section on page 1-5.

Install the EIAs. See the “Install a BNC, High-Density BNC, or SMB EIA”

procedure on page 1-22.

Install the fan-tray assembly. See the “Fan-Tray Assembly Installation” section on page 1-25.

Ground the equipment. See the “Power and Ground Installation” section on page 1-28.

Run the power cables and fuse the

power connections. See the “Power and Ground Installation” section on page 1-28.

Connect the backplane pins. See the “Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections”

section on page 1-32.

Install the coaxial cable and DS-1

cable on the back of the unit. See the “Coaxial Cable Installation” section on page 1-36 and

the “DS-1 Cable Installation” section on page 1-39.

Install the cards. See the “Card Installation” section on page 1-44.

Install the fiber-optic cables. See the “Fiber-Optic Cable Installation” section on page 1-52.

1-4

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Installation Equipment

1.2.1 Included Materials

The following materials are required and are shipped with the ONS 15454. The number in parentheses

gives the quantity of the item included in the package.

•#12-24 x 3/4 pan head phillips mounting screws (8)

•#12 -24 x 3/4 socket set screws (2)

•T-handle #12-24 hex tool for set screws (1)

•ESD wrist strap with 1.8 m (6 ft) coil cable (1)

•Tie wraps (10)

•Pinned Allen key for front door (1)

•Spacers (4)

•Spacer mounting brackets (2)

•Clear plastic rear cover (1)

•Bottom brackets for the fan-tray air filter

1.2.2 User-Supplied Materials

The following materials and tools are required but are not supplied with the ONS 15454.

•Equipment rack (22 inches total width for a 19-inch rack; 26 inches total width for a 23-inch rack)

•Fuse panel

•Power cable (from fuse and alarm panel to assembly), #10 AWG, copper conductors, 194°F [90°C])

•Ground cable #6 AWG stranded

•Alarm cable pairs for all alarm connections, #22 or #24 AWG, solid tinned

•Shielded Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) clock cable pair #22 or #24, solid tinned

•Single mode SC fiber jumpers with UPC polish (55 dB or better) for optical cards

•Shielded coaxial cable terminated with SMB or BNC connectors for DS-3 cards

•Shielded ABAM cable terminated with AMP Champ connectors or unterminated for DS-1 cards

with #22 or #24 AWG ground wire (typically about two feet in length)

•Tie wraps and/or lacing cord

•Labels

•Listed pressure terminal connectors such as ring and fork types; connectors must be suitable for

10AWG copper conductors

1.2.2.1 Tools Needed

•#2 phillips screw driver

•Medium slot head screw driver

•Small slot head screw driver

•Wire wrapper

•Wire cutters

1-5

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Rack Installation

•Wire strippers

•Crimp tool

1.2.2.2 Test Equipment

•Volt meter

•Power meter (for use with fiber optics only)

•Bit Error Rate (BER) tester, DS-1 and DS-3

1.3 Rack Installation

Warning

To prevent the equipment from overheating, do not operate it in an area that exceeds the maximum

recommended ambient temperature of 131°F (55°C). To prevent airflow restriction, allow at least 3

inches (7.6 cm) of clearance around the ventilation openings.

The ONS 15454 is easily mounted in a 19- or 23-inch equipment rack. The shelf assembly projects five

inches from the front of the rack. It mounts in both EIA-standard and Telcordia-standard racks. The shelf

assembly is a total of 17 inches wide with no mounting ears attached. With the mounting ears attached,

the shelf assembly is 19 inches wide. Ring runs are not provided by Cisco and may hinder side-by-side

installation of shelves where space is limited.

The ONS 15454 measures 18.5 inches high, 19 or 23 inches wide (depending on which way the mounting

ears are attached), and 12 inches deep (47 by 48.3 by 30.5 cm). You can install up to four ONS 15454s

in a seven-foot equipment rack. The ONS 15454 must have 1 inch of airspace below the installed

shelf assembly to allow air flow to the fan intake. If a second ONS 15454 is installed underneath

the shelf assembly, the air ramp on top of the lower shelf assembly provides the air spacing needed

and should not be modified in any way. Figure 1-1 shows the dimensions of the ONS 15454.

Note The 10 Gbps compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-10G) and fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA3) are

required with the ONS 15454 XC10G, OC-192, and OC-48 any slot (AS) cards.

Warning

The ONS 15454 should be installed in the lower rack position or mounted above another ONS

15454 shelf assembly.

Warning

The ONS 15454 must have 1 inch of airspace below the installed shelf assembly to allow air flow

to the fan intake. The air ramp (the angled piece of sheet metal on top of the shelf assembly)

provides this spacing and should not be modified in any way.

1-6

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Rack Installation

Figure 1-1 Cisco ONS 15454 dimensions

1.3.1 Reversible Mounting Bracket

Caution Use only the fastening hardware provided with the ONS 15454 to prevent loosening, deterioration,

and electromechanical corrosion of the hardware and joined material.

Caution When mounting the ONS 15454 in a frame with a non-conductive coating (such as paint, lacquer, or

enamel) either use the thread-forming screws provided with the ONS 15454 shipping kit, or remove

the coating from the threads to ensure electrical continuity.

The shelf assembly comes preset for installation in a 23-inch rack, but you can reverse the mounting

bracket to fit the smaller, 19-inch rack. The following steps describe how to reverse the shelf assembly

mounting bracket to fit a 19-inch rack.

Front View

Side View

Top View

18.5"

12"

22" total width

19" or 23" between mounting screw holes

22" total width

19" or 23" between mounting screw holes

32099

1-7

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Rack Installation

Procedure: Reverse the Mounting Bracket to Fit a 19-Inch Rack

Step 1 Remove the screws that attach the mounting bracket to the side of the shelf assembly.

Step 2 Flip the detached mounting bracket upside down.

Text imprinted on the mounting bracket will now also be upside down.

Step 3 Place the widest side of the mounting bracket flush against the shelf assembly (see Figure 1-2).

The narrow side of the mounting bracket should be towards the front of the shelf assembly. Text

imprinted on the mounting bracket should be visible and upside down.

Step 4 Align the mounting bracket screw holes against the shelf assembly screw holes.

Step 5 Insert the screws that were removed in Step 1 and tighten them.

Step 6 Repeat the procedure for the mounting bracket on the opposite side.

Figure 1-2 Reversing the mounting brackets (23-inch position to 19-inch position)

1.3.2 Mounting a Single Node

Mounting the ONS 15454 in a rack requires a minimum of 18.5 inches of vertical rack space (and one

inch for air flow). To ensure the mounting is secure, use two to four #12-24 mounting screws for each

side of the shelf assembly. Figure 1-3 shows the rack mounting position for the ONS 15454.

Top of unit Side of unit

Top of unit

19 inch position 23 inch

mounting holes

23 inch position

47869

Mounting

L brackets

Mounting

L brackets

Rear Front

19 inch

mounting holes

1-8

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Rack Installation

Figure 1-3 Mounting an ONS 15454 in a rack

Two people should install the shelf assembly; however, one person can install it using the temporary set

screws included. The shelf assembly should be empty for easier lifting. The front door can also be

removed to lighten the shelf assembly (see the “Remove the Front Door” procedure on page 1-13).

Note If you are installing the fan-tray air filter using the brackets provided, mount the brackets on the

bottom of the shelf assembly before installing the ONS 15454 in a rack.

Procedure: Mount the Shelf Assembly in a Rack (One Person)

Step 1 Ensure that the shelf assembly is set for the desired rack size (either 19 or 23 inches).

Step 2 Using the hex tool that shipped with the assembly, install the set screws into the screw holes that will

not be used to mount the shelf.

Step 3 Lift the shelf assembly to the desired rack position and set it on the set screws.

Step 4 Align the screw holes on the mounting ears with the mounting holes in the rack.

Step 5 Install one mounting screw in each side of the assembly.

Step 6 When the shelf assembly is secured to the rack, install the remaining mounting screws.

Note Use at least one set of the horizontal screw slots on the ONS 15454 to prevent future slippage.

Step 7 Remove the temporary set screws.

FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN

Equipment rack

Universal

ear mounts

(reversible)

39392

1-9

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Rack Installation

Procedure: Mount the Shelf Assembly in a Rack (Two People)

Step 1 Ensure that the shelf assembly is set for the desired rack size (either 19 or 23 inches).

Step 2 Lift the shelf assembly to the desired position in the rack.

Step 3 Align the screw holes on the mounting ears with the mounting holes in the rack.

Step 4 While one person holds the shelf assembly in place, the other person can install one mounting screw in

each side of the assembly.

Step 5 When the shelf assembly is secured to the rack, install the remaining mounting screws.

Note Use at least one set of the horizontal screw slots on the ONS 15454 to prevent future slippage.

1.3.3 Mounting Multiple Nodes

Most standard seven-foot racks can hold four ONS 15454s and a fuse and alarm panel. However, unequal

flange racks are limited to three ONS 15454s and a fuse and alarm panel or four ONS 15454s and a fuse

and alarm panel from an adjacent rack.

If you are using the bottom brackets to install the fan-tray air filter, you can install three shelf assemblies

in a standard seven-foot rack. If you are not using the bottom brackets, you can install four shelf

assemblies in a rack. The advantage to using the bottom brackets is that you can replace the filter without

removing the fan tray.

Procedure: Mount Multiple Shelf Assemblies in a Rack

Note The ONS 15454 must have one inch of airspace below the installed shelf assembly to allow air flow

to the fan intake. If a second ONS 15454 is installed underneath a shelf assembly, the air ramp on top

of the bottom shelf assembly provides the desired space. However, if the ONS 15454 is installed

above third-party equipment, you must provide a minimum spacing of one inch between the

third-party shelf assembly and the bottom of the ONS 15454. The third-party equipment must not

vent heat upward into the ONS 15454.

Step 1 Install the fuse and alarm panel in the top space.

Step 2 Mount the first ONS 15454 directly below the fuse and alarm panel.

Step 3 Repeat the procedure with the third and fourth ONS 15454s.

1.3.3.1 Four Node Configuration

You can link multiple ONS 15454s using their OC-N cards (i.e., create a fiber-optic bus) to accommodate

more access traffic than a single ONS 15454 can support. For example, if you need to drop more than

112 DS-1s or 96 DS-3s (the maximum that can be aggregated in a single node), you can link the nodes

1-10

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Rack Installation

but not merge multiple nodes into a single ONS 15454. You can link nodes with OC-12 or OC-48 fiber

spans as you would link any other two network nodes. The nodes can be co-located in a facility to

aggregate more local traffic.

Figure 1-4 shows a four-shelf node setup. Each shelf assembly is reorganized as a separate node in the

ONS 15454’s software interface (Cisco Transport Controller [CTC]), and traffic is mapped using CTC

cross-connect options. In the figure, each node uses redundant fiber-optic cards. Node 1 uses redundant

OC-N transport and OC-N bus (connecting) cards for a total of four cards, with eight free slots

remaining. Nodes 2 and 3 each use two redundant OC-N bus cards for a total of four cards, with eight

free slots remaining. Node 4 uses redundant OC-12 bus cards for a total of two cards, with ten free slots

remaining. The four node example presented here is one of many ways to set up a multiple-node

configuration. See “Chapter 5, “SONET Topologies”” for more information about multiple-node

configurations.

Figure 1-4 A four-shelf node configuration

1.3.3.2 ONS 15454 Bay Assembly

The Cisco ONS 15454 Bay Assembly simplifies ordering and installing the ONS 15454 because it allows

you to order shelf assemblies pre-installed in a seven-foot rack. The Bay Assembly is available in a

three- or four-shelf configuration. The three-shelf configuration includes three ONS 15454 shelf

assemblies, a pre-wired fuse and alarm panel, and two cable-management trays. Optional fiber channels

can be ordered. The four-shelf configuration includes four ONS 15454 shelf assemblies and a pre-wired

fuse and alarm panel. Optional fiber channels can be ordered. A four shelf ONS 15454 Bay Assembly is

shown in Figure 1-5.

Redundant

OC-N Bus

OC-N Feed

Redundant

OC-N Bus

Redundant

OC-N Bus

Up to 72 DS-3s, 84 DS-1s

ONS 15454

Redundant

Up to 72 DS-3s, 84 DS-1s

Up to 96 DS-3s, 112 DS-1s

32097

1-11

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Front Door Access

Figure 1-5 A four-shelf ONS 15454 Bay Assembly

1.4 Front Door Access

The Critical, Major, and Minor alarm LEDs visible through the front door indicate whether a Critical,

Major, or Minor alarm is present anywhere on the ONS 15454. These LEDs must be visible so

technicians can quickly determine if any alarms are present. You can use the LCD to further isolate

alarms. See Chapter 10, “Alarm Monitoring and Management” for more information.

This section tells you how to access ONS 15454 equipment in the front compartment. The ONS 15454

features a locked door to the front compartment. A pinned Allen key that unlocks the front door ships

with the ONS 15454. A button on the right side of the shelf assembly releases the door. The front door

provides access to the shelf assembly, cable-management tray, fan-tray assembly, and LCD screen

(Figure 1-8).

You can remove the front door of the ONS 15454 to provide unrestricted access to the front of the shelf

assembly. An erasable label (Figure 1-6) is pasted on the inside of the front door. You can use the label

to record slot assignments, port assignments, card types, node ID, rack ID, and serial number for the

ONS 15454.

39157

Fuse & Alarm

Panel

ONS 15454s

Fiber

Channel

(Optional Kit)

Fiber Channel

Mounting

Brackets

(Optional Kit)

1-12

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Front Door Access

Figure 1-6 The front-door erasable label

Note The front door label also includes the Class I and Class 1M laser warning shown in the laser warning

on the front-door label (Figure 1-7).

Figure 1-7 The laser warning on the front-door label

Procedure: Open the Front Cabinet Compartment (Door)

Note The ONS 15454 has an ESD plug input and is shipped with an ESD wrist strap. The ESD plug input

is located on the outside edge of the shelf assembly on the right-hand side. It is labeled “ESD” on the

top and bottom. Always wear an ESD wrist strap and connect the strap to the ESD plug when working

on the ONS 15454.

Step 1 Open the front door lock.

The ONS 15454 comes with a pinned hex key for locking and unlocking the front door. Turn the key

counterclockwise to unlock the door and clockwise to lock it.

Step 2 Press the door button to release the latch.

Step 3 Swing the door open.

61840

67575

1-13

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Front Door Access

Figure 1-8 The ONS 15454 front door

Procedure: Remove the Front Door

Step 1 Open the door.

Step 2 Lift the door from its hinges at the top left-hand corner of the door (Figure 1-9).

Door lock Door button

Viewholes for Critical, Major and Minor alarm LEDs

33923

CISCO ONS 15454

Optical Network System

1-14

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Backplane Access

Figure 1-9 Removing the ONS 15454 front door

1.5 Backplane Access

To access the ONS 15454 backplane, remove the two standard sheet metal covers on each side of the

backplane (Figure 1-10). Each sheet metal cover is held in place with nine 6-32 x 3/8 inch phillips

screws.

Door hinge

Assembly hinge pin

Assembly hinge

Translucent

circles

for LED

viewing

38831

FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN

1-15

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Backplane Access

Figure 1-10 Backplane sheet metal covers

Procedure: Remove the Backplane Sheet Metal Covers

Step 1 To remove the lower backplane cover, loosen the five screws that secure it to the ONS 15454 and pull it

away from the shelf assembly.

Step 2 Loosen the nine perimeter screws that hold the backplane sheet metal cover(s) in place.

Step 3 Lift the panel by the bottom to remove it from the shelf assembly.

Step 4 Store the panel for later use. Attach the backplane sheet metal cover(s) whenever EIA(s) are not

installed.

1.5.1 Lower Backplane Cover

The lower section of the ONS 15454 backplane is covered by a clear plastic protector, which is held in

place by five 6-32 x 1/2 inch screws. Remove the lower backplane cover to access the alarm interface

panel (AIP), alarm pin field, frame ground, and power terminals.

32074

Lower Backplane

Cover

Backplane Sheet Metal

Covers

1-16

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Backplane Access

Figure 1-11 Removing the lower backplane cover

Procedure: Remove the Lower Backplane Cover

Step 1 Unscrew the five retaining screws that hold the clear plastic cover in place.

Step 2 Grasp the clear plastic cover at each side.

Step 3 Gently pull the cover away from the backplane (shown in Figure 1-11).

1.5.2 Alarm Interface Panel

The AIP is located above the alarm pin field on the lower section of the backplane. The AIP provides

surge protection for the ONS 15454. It also provides an interface from the backplane to the fan-tray

assembly and LCD. The AIP plugs into the backplane using a 96-pin DIN connector and is held in place

with two retaining screws. The panel has a non-volatile memory chip that stores the unique node address

(MAC address).

Note The 5-amp AIP card (73-7665-XX) is required when installing the new fan-tray assembly

(15454-FTA3). See the “Install the Fan-Tray Assembly” procedure on page 1-27.

The MAC address identifies the nodes that support circuits. It allows CTC to determine circuit sources,

destinations, and spans. The Timing Communication and Control+ (TCC+) cards in the ONS 15454 also

read the MAC address to store the node database. If the AIP fails, a MAC Fail alarm displays on the CTC

Alarms menu and/or the LCD display on the fan tray will go blank.

Note A blown fuse on the AIP board can cause the LCD display to go blank.

32069

Retaining

screws

1-17

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

EIA Installation

1.6 EIA Installation

Optional EIA backplane covers are typically pre-installed when ordered with the ONS 15454. EIAs must

be ordered when using DS-1, DS-3, DS3XM-6, or EC-1 cards. A minimum amount of assembly may be

required when EIAs are ordered separately from the ONS 15454. Four different EIA backplane covers

are available for the ONS 15454: BNC, High-Density BNC, SMB, and AMP Champ. This section

describes each EIA in detail.

EIAs are attached to the shelf assembly backplane to provide coaxial cable connections. EIAs are

available with SMB and BNC connectors for DS-3 or EC-1 cards. EIAs are available with AMP Champ

connectors for DS-1 cards. You must use SMB EIAs for DS-1 twisted-pair cable installation. You can

install EIAs on one or both sides of the ONS 15454 backplane in any combination (in other words, AMP

Champ on Side A and BNC on Side B or High-Density BNC on side A and SMB on side B, and so forth).

If you are installing EIAs after the shelf assembly is installed, plug the EIA into the backplane. The EIA

has six electrical connectors that plug into six corresponding backplane connectors. The EIA backplane

must replace the standard sheet metal cover to provide access to the coaxial cable connectors. The EIA

sheet metal covers use the same screw holes as the solid backplane panels, but they have 12 additional

6-32 x 1/2 inch phillips screw holes so you can screw down the cover and the board using standoffs on

the EIA board. This section describes each EIA and provides installation procedures.

For EIA replacement procedures, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Guide. For information about attaching ferrites to EIA connectors, see the “Ferrite Installation” section

on page 1-61.

1.6.1 BNC EIA

The ONS 15454 BNC EIA supports 24 DS-3 circuits on each side of the ONS 15454 (24 transmit and

24 receive connectors). If you install BNC EIAs on both sides of the shelf assembly, the ONS 15454

hosts up to 48 circuits. The BNC connectors on the EIA supports Trompeter UCBJ224 (75 Ohm) 4 leg

connectors (King or ITT are also compatible). You can use BNC EIAs for DS-3 (including the

DS3XM-6) or EC-1 cards. Figure 1-39 shows the ONS 15454 with pre-installed BNC EIAs.

To install coaxial cable with BNC connectors, see the “BNC Connector Installation” section on

page 1-36.

1-18

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

EIA Installation

Figure 1-12 A BNC backplane for use in 1:1 protection schemes

The EIA side marked “A” has 24 pairs of BNC connectors. The first 12 pairs of BNC connectors

correspond to Ports 1 – 12 for a 12-port card and map to Slot 2 on the shelf assembly. The BNC connector

pairs are marked “Tx” and “Rx” to indicate transmit and receive cables for each port. You can install an

additional card in Slot 1 as a protect card for the card in Slot 2. The second 12 BNC connector pairs

correspond to Ports 1 – 12 for a 12-port card and map to Slot 4 on the shelf assembly. You can install an

additional card in Slot 3 as a protect card for the card in Slot 4. Slots 5 and 6 do not support DS-3 cards

when BNC connectors are used.

The EIA side marked “B” provides an additional 24 pairs of BNC connectors. The first 12 BNC

connector pairs correspond to Ports 1 – 12 for a 12-port card and map to Slot 14 on the shelf assembly.

The BNC connector pairs are marked “Tx” and “Rx” to indicate transmit and receive cables for each

port. You can install an additional card in Slot 15 as a protect card for the card in Slot 14. The second

12 BNC connector pairs correspond to Ports 1 – 12 for a 12-port card and map to Slot 16 on the shelf

assembly. You can install an additional card in Slot 17 as a protect card for the card in Slot 16. Slots 12

and 13 do not support DS-3 cards when BNC connectors are used.

When BNC connectors are used with a DS3N-12 card in Slot 3 or 15, the 1:N card protection extends

only to the two slots adjacent to the 1:N card due to BNC wiring constraints.

1.6.2 High-Density BNC EIA

The ONS 15454 High-Density BNC EIA supports 48 DS-3 circuits on each side of the ONS 15454 (48

transmit and 48 receive connectors). If you install BNC EIAs on both sides of the unit, the ONS 15454

hosts up to 96 circuits. The High-Density BNC EIA supports Trompeter UCBJ224 (75 Ohm) 4 leg

connectors (King or ITT are also compatible). You can use High-Density BNC EIAs for DS-3 (including

the DS3XM-6) or EC-1 cards. Figure 1-13 shows the ONS 15454 with pre-installed High-Density BNC

EIAs.

BNC backplane

connectors

Tie wrap posts

2076

1717

2828

3939

410410

511511

612612

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX

1717

2828

3939

410410

511511

612612

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX

14 4 2

1-19

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

EIA Installation

To install coaxial cable with High-Density BNC connectors, see the “High-Density BNC Connector

Installation” section on page 1-37.

Figure 1-13 A High-Density BNC backplane for use in 1:N protection schemes

The EIA side marked “A” hosts 48 pairs of BNC connectors. Each column of connector pairs is

numbered and corresponds to the slot of the same number. The first column (12 pairs) of BNC connectors

corresponds to Slot 1 on the shelf assembly, the second column to Slot 2, the third column to Slot 4, and

the fourth column to Slot 5. The rows of connectors correspond to Ports 1 – 12 of a 12-port card.

The EIA side marked “B” provides an additional 48 pairs of BNC connectors. The first column (12 pairs)

of BNC connectors corresponds to Slot 13 on the shelf assembly, the second column to Slot 14, the third

column to Slot 16, and the fourth column to Slot 17. The rows of connectors correspond to Ports 1 – 12

of a 12-port card. The BNC connector pairs are marked “Tx” and “Rx” to indicate transmit and receive

cables for each port. The High-Density BNC EIA supports both 1:1 and 1:N protection across all slots.

1.6.3 SMB EIA

The ONS 15454 SMB EIA supports AMP 415484-1 75 Ohm 4 leg connectors. You can use SMB EIAs

with DS-1, DS-3 (including the DS3XM-6), and EC-1 cards. If you use DS-1 cards, use the DS-1

electrical interface adapter to terminate the twisted pair DS-1 cable from the backplane.

Figure 1-14 shows the ONS 15454 with pre-installed SMB EIAs and the sheet metal cover and screw

locations for the EIA.

To install SMB connectors, see the “SMB Connector Installation” section on page 1-38.

BNC backplane

connectors

39141

1111

3333

4444

5555

6666

7777

8888

9999

10 10 10 10

11 11 11 11

12 12 12 12

2222

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX

1111

3333

4444

5555

6666

7777

8888

9999

10 10 10 10

11 11 11 11

12 12 12 12

2222

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX

17161413 5421

1-20

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

EIA Installation

Figure 1-14 An SMB EIA backplane

The SMB EIA has 84 transmit and 84 receive connectors on each side of the ONS 15454 for a total of

168 SMB connectors (84 circuits).

The EIA side marked “A” hosts 84 SMB connectors in six columns of 14 connectors. The “A” side

columns are numbered 1 – 6 and correspond to Slots 1 – 6 on the shelf assembly. The EIA side marked

“B” hosts an additional 84 SMB connectors in six columns of 14 connectors. The “B” side columns are

numbered 12 – 17 and correspond to Slots 12 – 17 on the shelf assembly. The connector rows are

numbered 1 – 14 and correspond to the 14 ports on a DS-1 card.

For DS-3 or EC-1, the EIA supports 72 transmit and 72 receive connectors, for a total of 144 SMB

connectors (72 circuits). If you use a DS-3 or EC-1 card, only Ports 1 – 12 are active. If you use a

DS3XM-6 card, only Ports 1 – 6 are active. The SMB connector pairs are marked “Tx” and “Rx” to

identify transmit and receive cables for each port. If you use SMB connectors, you can install DS-1,

DS-3, or EC-1 cards in any multispeed slot.

1.6.4 AMP Champ EIA

The ONS 15454 AMP Champ EIA supports 64-pin (32 pair) AMP Champ connectors for each slot on

both sides of the shelf assembly where the EIA is installed. Cisco AMP Champ connectors are female

AMP # 552246-1 with AMP # 552562-2 bail locks. Each AMP Champ connector supports 14 DS-1 ports.

You can use AMP Champ EIAs with DS-1 cards only. Figure 1-15 shows the ONS 15454 with

pre-installed AMP Champ EIAs and the corresponding sheet metal cover and screw locations for the

EIA.

To install AMP Champ connector DS-1 cables, see the “AMP Champ Connector Installation” section on

page 1-41.

For information about attaching ferrites to AMP Champ connectors, see the “Ferrite Installation” section

on page 1-61.

Reserved

for DS-1s

12x DS-3s

32101

17 16 15 14 13 12

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX

654321

TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX

SMB backplane

connectors

Tie wrap posts

1-21

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

EIA Installation

For information about AMP champ cable management, see the “AMP Champ Cable Management”

section on page 1-59.

Figure 1-15 An AMP EIA Champ backplane

The EIA side marked “A” hosts six AMP Champ connectors. The connectors are numbered 1 – 6 for the

corresponding slots on the shelf assembly. Each AMP Champ connector on the backplane supports 14

DS-1 ports for a DS1-14 card, and each connector features 28 live pairs—one transmit pair and one

receive pair—for each DS-1 port.

The EIA side marked “B” hosts six AMP Champ connectors. The connectors are labeled 12–17 for the

corresponding slots on the shelf assembly. Each AMP Champ connector on the backplane supports 14

DS-1 ports for a DS1-14 card, and each connector features 28 live pairs—one transmit pair and one

receive pair—for each DS-1 port.

Note EIAs are hot-swappable. You do not need to disconnect power to install or remove EIAs.

Caution Always use an electrostatic discharge (ESD) wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454.

Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf

assembly.

AMP CHAMP

connector

32070

1-22

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

EIA Installation

Procedure: Install a BNC, High-Density BNC, or SMB EIA

See the “Install the AMP Champ EIA” procedure on page 1-24 if you are using an AMP Champ EIA.

Step 1 To remove the lower backplane cover, loosen the five screws that secure it to the ONS 15454 and pull it

away from the shelf assembly.

Step 2 Remove the EIA card from the packaging. Line up the connectors on the card with the mating connectors

on the backplane. Gently push the card until both sets of connectors fit together snugly.

Step 3 Place the metal EIA cover panel over the card.

Step 4 Insert and tighten the nine perimeter screws (P/N 48-0358) at 8-10 lbs to secure the cover panel to the

backplane.

Step 5 Insert and tighten the twelve (BNC and SMB) or nine (High-Density BNC) inner screws (P/N 48-0004)

at 8-10 lbs to secure the cover panel to the card and backplane.

Step 6 Replace the lower backplane cover, and insert and tighten the five screws to secure it.

If you are using SMB EIAs to make DS-1 connections, you need the DS-1 electrical interface adapter,

commonly referred to as a balun (P/N 15454-WW-14=).

Figure 1-16 shows a BNC EIA installation. Figure 1-17 shows High-Density BNC EIA installation.

Figure 1-18 shows an SMB EIA installation.

Figure 1-16 Installing the BNC EIA

43764

1-23

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

EIA Installation

Figure 1-17 Installing the High-Density BNC EIA

Figure 1-18 Installing the SMB EIA (use a balun for DS-1 connections)

43766

1111

2222

3333

4444

5555

6666

7777

8888

9999

10 10 10 10

11 11 11 11

12 12 12 12

43762

1-24

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

EIA Installation

Procedure: Install the AMP Champ EIA

Step 1 To remove the lower backplane cover, loosen the five screws that secure it to the ONS 15454 and pull it

away from the shelf assembly.

Step 2 Align the AMP Champ cover panel with the backplane and insert and tighten the nine perimeter screws

(P/N 48-0358) at 8-10 lbs.

Step 3 Align an AMP Champ card with the backplane connector and push until it fits snugly. Repeat until you

have installed all six AMP Champ cards.

Step 4 To secure each AMP Champ card to the cover panel, insert and tighten a screw (P/N 48-0003) at the top

of each card at 8-10 lbs.

Step 5 Place the AMP Champ fastening plate along the bottom of the cover panel, and hand tighten the two

thumbscrews.

Figure 1-19 shows an AMP Champ EIA installation.

Figure 1-19 Installing the AMP CHAMP EIA

44309

1-25

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Fan-Tray Assembly Installation

1.7 Fan-Tray Assembly Installation

The fan-tray assembly is located at the bottom of the ONS 15454 front compartment. The fan tray is a

removable drawer that holds fans and fan-control circuitry for the ONS 15454. The front door can be

left in place when removing or installing the fan tray but removal is recommended. After you install the

fan tray, you should only need to access it if a fan failure occurs or you need to replace or clean the

fan-tray air filter.

The front of the fan-tray assembly has an LCD screen that provides slot and port-level information for

all ONS 15454 card slots, including the number of Critical, Major, and Minor alarms.

The fan-tray assembly features an air filter at the bottom of the tray that you can install and remove by

hand. Remove and visually inspect this filter every 30 days and keep spare filters in stock. See the Cisco

ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide for information about cleaning and maintaining the

fan-tray air filter.

Note The 10-Gbps compatible shelf assembly (15454-SA-ANSI, P/N: 800-19857) and fan-tray assembly

(15454-FTA3) are required with the ONS 15454 XC10G, OC-192, and OC-48 any slot (AS) cards.

Caution Do not operate an ONS 15454 without a fan-tray filter. A fan-tray filter is mandatory.

Caution The 15454-FTA3 fan-tray assembly can only be installed in ONS 15454 Release 3.1 shelf assemblies

(15454-SA-ANSI, 800-19857). It includes a pin that does not allow it to be installed in ONS 15454

shelf assemblies released before ONS 15454 Release 3.1 (15454-SA-NEBS3E, 15454-SA-NEBS3,

and 15454-SA-R1, P/N 800-0714915454). Installing the 15454-FTA3 in a non-compliant shelf

assembly may result in failure of the alarm interface panel (AIP), which in turn, will result in power

loss to the fan-tray assembly.

Note The ONS 15454 Release 3.1 fan-tray assembly (15454-FTA3) is not I-temp. To obtain an I-temp fan

tray, install the 15454-FTA2 fan-tray assembly in an ONS 15454 Release 3.1 shelf assembly (P/N:

800-19857). However, do not install the ONS 15454 Release 3.1 XC10G, OC-192, and OC-48 any

slot (AS) cards in the shelf assembly with the 15454-FTA2 fan-tray assembly.

If one or more fans fail on the fan-tray assembly, replace the entire assembly. You cannot replace

individual fans. The red Fan Fail LED on the front of the fan tray illuminates when one or more fans fail.

For fan tray replacement instructions, see the “Install the Fan-Tray Assembly” procedure on page 1-27.

The red Fan Fail LED clears after you install a working fan tray.

Fan speed is controlled by TCC+ card temperature sensors. The sensors measure the input air

temperature at the fan-tray assembly. Fan speed options are low, medium, and high. If the TCC+ card

fails, the fans automatically shift to high speed. The temperature measured by the TCC+ sensors is

displayed on the LCD screen.

1-26

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Fan-Tray Assembly Installation

Procedure: Install the Bottom Brackets and Air Filter

The shelf assembly ships with bottom brackets that you should use to install the air filter. The bottom

brackets consist of two grooved metal pieces that attach to the bottom of the shelf assembly using three

screws each. When you use the bottom bracket to install the fan-tray air filter, you do not need to remove

the fan-tray assembly to access the air filter. Attach the brackets to the bottom of the shelf assembly

before installing the rack.

Although the filter will work if it is installed with either side facing up, Cisco recommends that you

install it with the metal bracing facing up to preserve the surface of the filter.

Note If you choose not to install the bottom brackets, install the air filter by sliding it into the compartment

at the bottom of the shelf assembly. Each time you remove and reinstall the air filter in the future,

you must first remove the fan-tray assembly.

Step 1 With the fan-tray assembly removed, place the ONS 15454 face down on a flat surface.

Step 2 Locate the three screw holes that run along the left and right sides of the bottom of the shelf assembly.

Step 3 Secure each bracket to the bottom of the shelf assembly using the screws provided.

Each bracket has a filter stopper and a flange on one end. Make sure to attach the brackets with the

stoppers and flanges facing the rear of the shelf assembly (the top, if the ONS 15454 is face-down during

installation).

Figure 1-20 illustrates bottom bracket installation. If you do not use the bottom brackets, in the future

you must remove the fan-tray assembly before removing the air filter. The bottom brackets enable you

to clean and replace the air filter without removing the fan-tray assembly.

Figure 1-20 Installing the bottom brackets

If you are using the bottom brackets to install the fan-tray air filter, you can install three shelf assemblies

in a standard seven-foot rack. If you are not using the bottom brackets, you can install four shelf

assemblies in a rack.

39487

RET 1

CAUTION: Remove power from both

the BAT1 and terminal blocks

prior to servicing

SUITABLE FOR MOUNTING ON

A NON-COMBUSTIBLE SURFACE.

PLEASE REFER TO INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS.

-42 TO -57 Vdc

650 Watts Maximum

BAT 1 RET 2 BAT 2

1-27

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Fan-Tray Assembly Installation

Step 4 Slide the air filter into the shelf assembly.

Procedure: Install the Fan-Tray Assembly

To install the fan-tray assembly, it is not necessary to move any of the cable-management facilities.

Caution You must place the edge of the air filter flush against the front of the fan-tray assembly compartment

when installing the fan tray on top of the filter. Failure to do so could result in damage to the filter,

the fan tray, or both.

Caution Do not force a fan-tray assembly into place. Doing so can damage the connectors on the fan tray

and/or the connectors on the back panel of the shelf assembly.

Step 1 Remove the front door of the shelf assembly.

Step 2 Slide the fan tray into the shelf assembly until the electrical plug at the rear of the tray plugs into the

corresponding receptacle on the backplane.

Step 3 To verify that the tray has plugged into the backplane, check that the LCD on the front of the fan tray is

activated.

Figure 1-21 shows the location of the fan tray.

1-28

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Power and Ground Installation

Figure 1-21 Installing the fan-tray assembly

1.8 Power and Ground Installation

This section explains how to connect the ONS 15454 assembly to the power supply. Ground the

equipment according to Telcordia standards or local practices.

Warning

Shut off the power from the power source or turn off the breakers before beginning work.

Warning

This equipment is intended to be grounded. Ensure that the host is connected to earth ground

during normal use.

Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the

wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.

Warning

Do not mix conductors of dissimilar metals in a terminal or splicing connector where physical

contact occurs (such as copper and aluminum, or copper and copper-clad aluminum), unless the

device is suited for the purpose and conditions of use.

FAN FAIL CRITMAJMIN

Fan tray

assembly

38532

1-29

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Power and Ground Installation

Warning

Connect the ONS 15454 only to a DC power source that complies with the safety extra-low voltage

(SELV) requirements in IEC 60950-based safety standards.

Warning

The ONS 15454 relies on the protective devices in the building installation to protect against short

circuit, overcurrent, and grounding faults. Ensure that the protective devices are properly rated to

protect the system, and that they comply with national and local codes.

Warning

A readily accessible two-poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring.

Cisco recommends the following wiring conventions, but customer conventions prevail:

•Red wire for battery connections (-48V DC)

•Black wire for battery return connections (0V DC)

The ONS 15454 has redundant -48V DC #8 power terminals on the shelf assembly backplane. The

terminals are labeled BAT1, RET1, BAT2, and RET2 and are located on the lower section of the

backplane behind a clear plastic cover. See the “Lower Backplane Cover” section on page 1-15 for

information about accessing the power terminals.

To install redundant power feeds, use four power cables and one ground cable. For a single power feed,

only two power cables (#10 AWG, copper conductor, 194°F [90°C]) and one ground cable (#6 AWG)

are required. Use a conductor with low impedance to ensure circuit overcurrent protection. However, the

conductor must have the capability to safely conduct any fault current that might be imposed.

The existing ground post is a #10-32 bolt. The nut provided for a field connection is also a #10, with an

integral lock washer. The lug must be a dual-hole type and rated to accept the #6 AWG cable. Two posts

are provided on the Cisco ONS 15454 to accommodate the dual-hole lug. Figure 1-22 shows the location

of the ground posts.

Figure 1-22 Ground posts on the ONS 15454 backplane

For information about attaching ferrites to power cabling, see the “Ferrite Installation” section on

page 1-61.

Warning

When installing redundant power feeds, do not use aluminum conductors.

Warning

If you use redundant power leads to power the ONS 15454, disconnecting one lead will not remove

power from the node.

FRAME GROUND

61852

1-30

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Power and Ground Installation

Procedure: Install Redundant Power Feeds

Ground only one cable to ground the shelf assembly. Terminate the other end of the ground cable to

ground according to local site practice. The ONS 15454 backplane also has a ground terminal on the

right side of the backplane. Connect a ground terminal for the frame ground (FGND) terminal according

to local site practice.

If the system loses power or both TCC+ cards are reset, you must reset the ONS 15454 clock. After

powering down, the date defaults to January 1, 1970, 00:04:15. To reset the clock, see the “Setting Up

Basic Node Information” section on page 3-2.

Note If you encounter problems with the power supply, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and

Maintenance Guide for possible causes.

Warning

Do not apply power to the ONS 15454 until you complete all installation steps and check the

continuity of the -48V DC and return.

Step 1 Measure and cut the cables as needed to reach the ONS 15454 from the fuse panel. Figure 1-23 shows

the ONS 15454 power terminals.

Step 2 Dress the power and ground cables according to local site practice.

Warning

When installing the ONS 15454, the ground connection must always be made first and

disconnected last.

Figure 1-23 Power terminals

33921

RET 1

CAUTION: Remove power from both

the BAT1 and terminal blocks

prior to servicing

SUITABLE FOR MOUNTING ON

A NON-COMBUSTIBLE SURFACE.

PLEASE REFER TO INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS.

-42 V 24 A

BAT 1 RET 2 BAT 2

Battery leads (red)

Return leads (black)

1-31

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Power and Ground Installation

Step 3 Remove or loosen the #8 power terminal screws on the ONS 15454. To avoid confusion, label the cables

connected to the BAT1/RET1 power terminals as 1, and the cables connected to the BAT2/RET2 power

terminals as 2.

Note Use only pressure terminal connectors, such as ring and fork types, when terminating the

battery, battery return, and frame ground conductors.

Caution Before you make any crimp connections, coat all bare conductors (battery, battery return, and

frame ground) with an appropriate antioxidant compound. Bring all unplated connectors,

braided strap, and bus bars to a bright finish, then coat with an antioxidant before you connect

them. You do not need to prepare tinned, solder plated, or silver-plated connectors and other

plated connection surfaces, but always keep them clean and free of contaminants.

Caution When terminating power, return, and frame ground, do not use soldering lug, screwless

(push-in) connectors, quick-connect, or other friction-fit connectors.

Step 4 Strip 1/2 inch of insulation from all power cables that you will use. Crimp the lugs onto the ends of all

power leads.

Note When terminating battery and battery return connections as shown in Figure 1-23, follow a

torque specification of 10 in-lbs. When terminating a frame ground, use the kep-nut provided

with the ONS 15454 and tighten it to a torque specification of 31 in-lbs. The kep-nut provides

a frame ground connection that minimizes the possibility of loosening caused by rotation

during installation and maintenance activity. This type of prevention is inherently provided

by the terminal block for battery and battery return connections.

Step 5 Terminate the return 1 lead to the RET1 backplane terminal. Use oxidation-prevention grease to keep

connections non-corrosive.

Warning

Do not secure multiple connectors with the same bolt assembly.

Step 6 Terminate the negative 1 lead to the negative BAT1 backplane power terminal. Use oxidation prevention

grease to keep connections non-corrosive.

Step 7 If you use redundant power leads, terminate the return 2 lead to the positive RET2 terminal on the ONS

15454. Terminate the negative 2 lead to the negative BAT2 terminal on the ONS 15454. Use

oxidation-preventative grease to keep connections non-corrosive.

Route the cables out below the power terminals using the plastic cable clamp.

1-32

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections

1.9 Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections

Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the

wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.

The ONS 15454 has a backplane pin field located at the bottom of the backplane. The backplane pin field

provides 0.045 square inch wire-wrap pins for enabling external alarms, timing input and output, and

craft interface terminals. This section describes the backplane pin field and the pin assignments for the

field. Figure 1-24 shows the wire-wrap pins on the backplane pin field. Beneath each wire-wrap pin is a

frame ground pin. Frame ground pins are labeled FG1, FG2, FG3, etc. Install the ground shield of the

cables connected to the backplane to the ground pin that corresponds to the pin field used. Figure 1-24

shows pinouts for the ONS 15454.

Figure 1-24 Pinouts

Field Pin Function Field Pin Function

BITS A1 BITS Output 2 negative (-) ENVIR

ALARMS

OUT

N/O

A1 Normally open output pair number 1

B1 BITS Output 2 positive (+) B1

A2 BITS Input 2 negative (-) A2 Normally open output pair number 2

B2 BITS Input 2 positive (+) B2

A3 BITS Output 1 negative (-) A3 Normally open output pair number 3

B3 BITS Output 1 positive (+) B3

A4 BITS Input 1 negative (-) A4 Normally open output pair number 4

B4 BITS Input 1 positive (+) B4

LAN 1 Connecting to a Router, Hub, or Switch ACO A1 Normally open ACO pair

A1 B1

B1 CRAFT A1 Receive (PC pin #2)

A2 A2 Transmit (PC pin #3)

LAN 2

B2 A3 Ground (PC pin #5)

A4 DTR (PC pin #4)

LOCAL

ALARMS

AUD

(Audible)

N/O

A1 Alarm output pair number 1: Remote

audible alarm.

B1 B1

ENVIR

ALARMS

A2 Alarm output pair number 2: Critical

audible alarm.

A3 Alarm output pair number 3: Major

audible alarm.

A1 B3

B1 A4 Alarm output pair number 4: Minor

audible alarm.

A2 B4

B2 LOCAL

ALARMS

VIS

(Visual)

A1 Alarm output pair number 1: Remote

visual alarm.

A3 B1

A2 Alarm output pair number 2: Critical

visual alarm.

A3 Alarm output pair number 3: Major

visual alarm.

A4 Alarm output pair number 4: Minor

visual alarm.

Not Used

RJ-45 pin 2

RJ-45 pin 1

RJ-45 pin 2

RJ-45 pin 1

RJ-45 pin 6

Alarm input pair number 1: Reports

closure on connected wires.

Alarm input pair number 2: Reports

closure on connected wires.

Alarm input pair number 3: Reports

closure on connected wires.

Alarm input pair number 4: Reports

closure on connected wires.

Connecting to a PC or Workstation

RJ-45 pin 3

RJ-45 pin 6

TBOS

AUDVIS

FG12FG11FG10FG9FG8FG7FG6FG5FG4FG3FG2

BITS LAN

FG1

111111111111

2222222222

3333333333

4444444444

ABABAABABABABABABABA B

LOCAL ALARMSCRAFTMODEM X . 25 ACO ENVIR ALARMS

OUTIN

38533

1-33

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections

Note The X.25, Modem, and TBOS pin fields are not active.

1.9.1 Alarm Installation

The alarm pin field supports up to 17 alarm contacts, including four audible alarms, four visual alarms,

one alarm cutoff (ACO), and four user-definable alarm input and output contacts.

Audible alarm contacts are in the LOCAL ALARM AUD pin field and visual contacts are in the LOCAL

ALARM VIS pin field. Both of these alarms are in the LOCAL ALARMS category. User-definable

contacts are in the ENVIR ALARM IN and ENVIR ALARM OUT pin fields. These alarms are in the

ENVIR ALARMS category; you must have the AIC card installed to use the ENVIR ALARMS. Alarm

contacts are Normally Open (N/O), meaning that the system closes the alarm contacts when the

corresponding alarm conditions are present. Each alarm contact consists of two wire-wrap pins on the

shelf assembly backplane. Visual and audible alarm contacts are classified as Critical, Major, Minor, and

Remote. Figure 1-24 shows alarm pin assignments.

Visual and audible alarms are typically wired to trigger an alarm light at a central alarm collection point

when the corresponding contacts are closed. You can use the Alarm Cutoff pins to activate a remote ACO

for audible alarms. You can also activate the ACO function by pressing the ACO button on the TCC+

card faceplate. The ACO function clears all audible alarm indications. After clearing the audible alarm

indication, the alarm is still present and viewable in the Alarms tab in CTC.

Procedure: Install Alarm Wires on the Backplane

Step 1 Use #22 or #24 AWG alarm wires.

Step 2 Wrap the alarm wires on the appropriate wire-wrap pins according to local site practice.

Note For information about attaching ferrites to wire-wrap pin fields, see the “Ferrite Installation”

section on page 1-61.

1.9.2 Timing Installation

The ONS 15454 backplane supports two Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) clock pin fields. The

first four BITS pins, rows 3 and 4, support output and input from the first external timing device. The

last four BITS pins, rows 1 and 2, perform the identical functions for the second external timing device.

Table 1-2 lists the pin assignments for the BITS timing pin fields.

1-34

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections

Note Refer to Telcordia SR-NWT-002224 for rules about provisioning timing references

Procedure: Install Timing Wires on the Backplane

Step 1 Use #22 or #24 AWG wire.

Step 2 Wrap the clock wires on the appropriate wire-wrap pins according to local site practice.

Step 3 The BITS pin field (FG1) has a frame ground pin beneath it. Wrap the ground shield of the alarm cable

to the frame ground pin.

Note For more detailed information about timing, see the “Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing” section

on page 3-12.

1.9.3 LAN Installation

Use the LAN pins on the ONS 15454 backplane to connect the ONS 15454 to a workstation or Ethernet

LAN, or to a LAN modem for remote access to the node. You can also use the LAN port on the TCC+

faceplate to connect a workstation or to connect the ONS 15454 to the network. Table 1-3 shows the

LAN pin assignments.

Before you can connect an ONS 15454 to other ONS 15454s or to a LAN, you must change the default

IP address that is shipped with each ONS 15454 (192.1.0.2). See the “Change IP Address, Default

Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD” procedure on page 3-4.

Table 1-2 External Timing Pin Assignments for BITS

External Device Contact Tip & Ring Function

First external device A3 (BITS 1 Out) Primary ring (-) Output to external device

B3 (BITS 1 Out) Primary tip (+) Output to external device

A4 (BITS 1 In) Secondary ring (-) Input from external

device

B4 (BITS 1 In) Secondary tip (+) Input from external

device

Second external device A1 (BITS 2 Out) Primary ring (-) Output to external device

B1 (BITS 2 Out) Primary tip (+) Output to external device

A2 (BITS 2 In) Secondary ring (-) Input from external

device

B2 (BITS 2 In Secondary tip (+) Input from external

device

1-35

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Alarm, Timing, LAN, and Craft Pin Connections

*The Cisco ONS 15454 is DCE.

Procedure: Install LAN Wires on the Backplane

Step 1 Use #22 or #24 AWG wire.

Step 2 Wrap the wires on the appropriate wire-wrap pins according to local site practice.

Step 3 A frame ground pin is located beneath each pin field (FG2 for the LAN pin field). Wrap the ground shield

of the LAN interface cable to the frame ground pin.

1.9.4 TL1 Craft Interface Installation

You can use the craft pins on the ONS 15454 backplane or the RS-232 port on the TCC+ faceplate to

create a VT100 emulation window to serve as a TL1 craft interface to the ONS 15454. Use a

straight-through cable to connect to the RS-232 port. Table 1-4 shows the pin assignments for the

CRAFT pin field.

Note You cannot use the craft backplane pins and the RS-232 port on the TCC+ card simultaneously.

Table 1-3 LAN Pin Assignments

Pin Field Backplane Pins RJ-45 Pins

LAN 1

Connecting to data

circuit-terminating

equipment (DCE*) (a

hub or switch)

B2 1

A2 2

B1 3

A1 6

LAN 1

Connecting to data

terminal equipment

(DTE) (a

PC/workstation or

router)

B1 1

A1 2

B2 3

A2 6

Table 1-4 Craft Interface Pin Assignments

Pin Field Contact Function

Craft A1 Receive

A2 Transmit

A3 Ground

A4 DTR

1-36

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Coaxial Cable Installation

Procedure: Install Craft Interface Wires on the Backplane

Step 1 Use #22 or #24 AWG wire.

Step 2 Wrap the craft interface wires on the appropriate wire-wrap pins according to local site practice.

Note For information about attaching ferrites to wire-wrap pin fields, see the “Ferrite Installation”

section on page 1-61.

Step 3 Wrap the ground shield of the craft interface cable to the frame-ground pin.

Step 4 Wrap the ground wire of your computer cable to pin A3 on the craft pin field.

1.10 Coaxial Cable Installation

Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the

wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.

When using ONS 15454 DS-3 electrical cables, the cables must terminate on an EIA installed on the

ONS 15454 backplane. EIAs are available with SMB and BNC connectors. All DS-3 cables connected

to the ONS 15454 DS-3 card must terminate with coaxial cables using the desired connector type to

connect to the specified EIA. For information about physically installing an EIA in the field, see the

“Install a BNC, High-Density BNC, or SMB EIA” procedure on page 1-22. For information about

coaxial cable management, see the “Coaxial Cable Management” section on page 1-57.

The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) performance of the system depends on good-quality DS-3

coaxial cables, such as Shuner Type G 03233 D, or the equivalent.

1.10.1 BNC Connector Installation

For a description of BNC EIAs, see the “BNC EIA” section on page 1-17. The BNC connectors on the

EIA supports Trompeter UCBJ224 (75 Ohm) 4 leg connectors. Right-angle mating connectors for the

connecting cable are AMP 413588-2 (75 Ohm) connectors. If preferred, you can also use a straight

connector of the same type. Use RG-59/U cable to connect to the ONS 15454 BNC EIA. These cables

are recommended to connect to a patch panel and are designed for long runs of up to 450 feet.

Procedure: Install Coaxial Cable With BNC Connectors

Step 1 Place the BNC cable connector over the desired connection point on the backplane.

Figure 1-25 shows how to connect a coaxial cable to the BNC EIA using a right-angle BNC cable

connector.

Step 2 Position the cable connector so that the slot in the connector is over the corresponding notch at the

backplane connection point.

1-37

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Coaxial Cable Installation

Step 3 Gently push the connector down until the notch backplane connector slides into the slot on the cable

connector.

Step 4 Turn the cable connector until the notch clicks into place.

Step 5 Tie wrap or lace the cables to the EIA according to Telcordia standards (GR-1275-CORE) or local site

practice.

Step 6 Route the cables to the nearest side of the shelf assembly through the side cutouts according to local site

practice. The rubber coated edges of the side cutouts prevent the cables from chafing.

Figure 1-25 Using a right-angle connector to install coaxial cable with BNC connectors

Note Slots 1, 3, 15 and 17 are designated protection slots when BNC connectors are used. Slots 5,

6, 11, and 12 do not support DS3-12 cards when BNC connectors are used. A total of four

DS3-12 cards can be used to carry traffic with BNC connectors.

Step 7 Label all cables at each end of the connection to avoid confusion with cables that are similar in

appearance.

1.10.2 High-Density BNC Connector Installation

The High-Density BNC EIA supports Trompeter UCBJ224 (75 Ohm) 4 leg connectors. Use straight

connectors on RG-59/U cable to connect to the High-Density BNC EIA. Cisco recommends these cables

for connection to a patch panel; they are designed for long runs of up to 450 feet. For more detail, see

the “High-Density BNC EIA” section on page 1-18.

Although not required, Cisco strongly recommends using the BNC insertion tool to connect cables to the

EIA. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide for more information about

the insertion tool.

32075

1-38

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Coaxial Cable Installation

Procedure: Install Coaxial Cable With High-Density BNC Connectors

Step 1 Place the BNC cable connector over the desired connection point on the backplane.

Step 2 Using the insertions tool, position the cable connector so that the slot in the connector is over the

corresponding notch at the backplane connection point.

Step 3 Gently push the connector down until the notch backplane connector slides into the slot on the cable

connector.

Step 4 Turn the cable connector until the notch clicks into place.

Step 5 Tie wrap or lace the cables to the EIA according to Telcordia standards (GR-1275-CORE) or local site

practice.

Step 6 Route the cables to the nearest side of the shelf assembly through the side cutouts according to local site

practice.

The rubber coated edges of the side cutouts prevent the cables from chafing.

1.10.3 SMB Connector Installation

The SMB backplane cover is similar to the BNC cover. For further detail, see the “SMB EIA” section

on page 1-19. The SMB connectors on the EIA are AMP 415504-3 (75 Ohm) 4 leg connectors.

Right-angle mating connectors for the connecting cable are AMP 415484-2 (75 Ohm) connectors. Use

RG-179/U cable to connect to the ONS 15454 EIA. Cisco recommends these cables for connection to a

patch panel; they are not designed for long runs (over 50 feet). Range does not affect loopback testing.

For information about attaching ferrites to SMB/BNC connectors, see the “Ferrite Installation” section

on page 1-61.

Procedure: Install Coaxial Cable with SMB Connectors

Refer to Figure 1-26 when performing the following steps.

Step 1 Place the SMB cable connector over the desired connection point on the backplane.

Step 2 Gently push the connector until it clicks into place.

Step 3 Tie wrap or lace the cables to the EIA according to Telcordia standards (GR-1275-CORE) or local site

practice.

Step 4 Route the cables to the nearest side of the shelf assembly into rack runs according to local site practice.

1-39

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

DS-1 Cable Installation

Figure 1-26 Installing coaxial cable with SMB connectors

Warning

Metallic interfaces for connection to outside plant lines (such as T1/E1/T3/E3, etc.) must be

connected through a registered or approved device such as CSU/DSU or NT1.

Step 5 Label the transmit, receive, working, and protect cables at each end of the connection to avoid confusion

with cables that are similar in appearance.

1.11 DS-1 Cable Installation

DS-1s support both twisted pair wire-wrap cabling and AMP Champ connector cabling. Install the

proper backplane EIA on the ONS 15454 for each cabling option. This section provides information

about the DS-1 EIA options.

For information about DS-1 cable management, see the “DS-1 Twisted-Pair Cable Management” section

on page 1-58.

1.11.1 Twisted Pair Wire-Wrap Installation

Installing twisted-pair, wire-wrap DS-1 cables requires separate pairs of grounded twisted-pair cables

for receive (in) and transmit (out). Prepare four cables, two for receive and two for transmit, for each

DS-1 facility to be installed.

32100

1-40

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

DS-1 Cable Installation

Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the

wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.

If you use DS-1 electrical twisted-pair cables, equip the ONS 15454 with an SMB EIA on each side of

the backplane where DS-1 cables will terminate. You must install special DS-1 electrical interface

adapters, commonly referred to as a balun, on every transmit and receive connector for each DS-1

termination.

Note DS-1 electrical interface adapters project an additional 1.72 inches from the ONS 15454 backplane.

If you install DS-1 cards in the ONS 15454, you must fit the corresponding transmit and receive SMB

connectors on the EIA with a DS-1 electrical interface adapter. You can install the adapter on the SMB

connector for the port. The adaptor has wire-wrap posts for DS-1 transmit and receive cables.

Figure 1-27 shows the DS-1 electrical interface adapter.

Figure 1-27 DS-1 electrical interface adapter (balun)

Each DS-1 electrical interface adapter has a female SMB connector on one end and a pair of .045 inch

square wire-wrap posts on the other end. The wire-wrap posts are .200 inches apart.

Procedure: Install DS-1 Cables Using Electrical Interface Adapters (Balun)

All DS-1 cables connected to the ONS 15454 DS-1 ports must terminate with twisted-pair cables to

connect to the DS-1 electrical interface adapter. The DS-1 electrical interface adapters project 1.72

inches beyond the SMB EIA.

Step 1 Attach the SMB connector on the adapter to the SMB connector for the port’s transmit pair on the

backplane.

Step 2 Attach the SMB connector on an adapter to the SMB connector for the port’s receive pair on the

backplane.

Step 3 Terminate the DS-1 transmit and receive cables for the port to the wire-wrap posts on the adapter:

a. Using a wire-wrap tool, connect the receive cables to the receive adapter pins on the backplane

connector for the desired port.

b. Connect the transmit cables to the transmit adapter pins on the backplane connector for the desired

port.

SMB Connector Wire wrap posts

DS-1

Electrical

interface

adapter

Ring

Tip

32071

1-41

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

DS-1 Cable Installation

c. Terminate the shield ground wire on the DS-1 cable to ground according to local site practice.

If you put DS1N-14 cards in Slots 3 and 15 to form 1:N protection groups, do not wire Slots 3 and 15

for DS-1 electrical interface adapters.

Figure 1-28 shows a ONS 15454 backplane with an SMB EIA with DS-1 electrical interface adapters

attached on both sides of the shelf assembly to create DS-1 twisted-pair termination points.

Figure 1-28 A backplane with SMB EIA for DS-1 cables

1.11.2 AMP Champ Connector Installation

To install AMP Champ connector DS-1 cables, you must use 64-pin bundled cable connectors with a

64-pin male AMP Champ connector. You need an AMP Champ connector #552276-1 for the receptacle

side and #1-552496-1 (for cable diameter .475in.–.540in) or #2-552496-1 (for cable diameter

.540in.–.605in.) for the right-angle shell housing (or their functional equivalent). The corresponding

64-pin female AMP Champ connector on the AMP Champ EIA supports one receive and one transmit

for each DS-1 port for the corresponding card slot.

Because each DS1-14 card supports 14 DS-1 ports, only 56 pins (28 pairs) of the 64-pin connector are

used. Prepare one 56-wire cable for each DS-1 facility installed. Table 1-5 shows the pin assignments

for the AMP Champ connectors on the ONS 15454 AMP Champ EIA. See the “AMP Champ EIA”

section on page 1-20 for more information about the AMP Champ EIA.

32085

DS-1 Electrical Interface

Adapter or balun

Table 1-5 Pin Assignments for AMP Champ Connectors (Shaded Area Corresponds to White/Orange

Binder Group)

Signal/Wire Pin Pin Signal/Wire Signal/Wire Pin Pin Signal/Wire

Tx Tip 1

white/blue 1 33 Tx Ring 1

blue/white Rx Tip 1

yellow/orange 17 49 Rx Ring 1

orange/yellow

Tx Tip 2

white/orange 2 34 Tx Ring 2

orange/white Rx Tip 2

yellow/green 18 50 Rx Ring 2

green/yellow

1-42

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

DS-1 Cable Installation

Table 1-6 shows the pin assignments for the AMP Champ connectors on the ONS 15454 AMP Champ

EIA for a shielded DS1 cable.

Tx Tip 3

white/green 3 35 Tx Ring 3

green/white Rx Tip 3

yellow/brown 19 51 Rx Ring 3

brown/yellow

Tx Tip 4

white/brown 4 36 Tx Ring 4

brown/white Rx Tip 4

yellow/slate 20 52 Rx Ring 4

slate/yellow

Tx Tip 5

white/slate 5 37 Tx Ring 5

slate/white Rx Tip 5

violet/blue 21 53 Rx Ring 5

blue/violet

Tx Tip 6

red/blue 6 38 Tx Ring 6

blue/red Rx Tip 6

violet/orange 22 54 Rx Ring 6

orange/violet

Tx Tip 7

red/orange 7 39 Tx Ring 7

orange/red Rx Tip 7

violet/green 23 55 Rx Ring 7

green/violet

Tx Tip 8

red/green 8 40 Tx Ring 8

green/red Rx Tip 8

violet/brown 24 56 Rx Ring 8

brown/violet

Tx Tip 9

red/brown 9 41 Tx Ring 9

brown/red Rx Tip 9

violet/slate 25 57 Rx Ring 9

slate/violet

Tx Tip 10

red/slate 10 42 Tx Ring 10

slate/red

Rx Tip 10

white/blue 26 58 Rx Ring 10

blue/white

Tx Tip 11

black/blue 11 43 Tx Ring 11

blue/black Rx Tip 11

white/orange 27 59 Rx Ring 11

orange/white

Tx Tip 12

black/orange 12 44 Tx Ring 12

orange/black Rx Tip 12

white/green 28 60 Rx Ring 12

green/white

Tx Tip 13

black/green 13 45 Tx Ring 13

green/black Rx Tip 13

white/brown 29 61 Rx Ring 13

brown/white

Tx Tip 14

black/brown 14 46 Tx Ring 14

brown/black Rx Tip 14

white/slate 30 62 Rx Ring 14

slate/white

Tx Spare0+ N/A 15 47 Tx Spare0- N/A Rx Spare0+ N/A 31 63 Rx Spare0- N/A

Tx Spare1+ N/A 16 48 Tx Spare1- N/A Rx Spare1+ N/A 32 64 Rx Spare1- N/A

Table 1-5 Pin Assignments for AMP Champ Connectors (Shaded Area Corresponds to White/Orange

Binder Group) (continued)

Signal/Wire Pin Pin Signal/Wire Signal/Wire Pin Pin Signal/Wire

Table 1-6 Pin Assignments for AMP Champ Connectors (shielded DS1 cable)

64-Pin Blue Bundle 64-Pin Orange Bundle

Signal/Wire Pin Pin Signal/Wire Signal/Wire Pin Pin Signal/Wire

Tx Tip 1

white/blue 1 33 Tx Ring 1

blue/white Rx Tip 1

white/blue 17 49 Rx Ring 1

blue/white

Tx Tip 2

white/orange 2 34 Tx Ring 2

orange/white Rx Tip 2

white/orange 18 50 Rx Ring 2

orange/white

Tx Tip 3

white/green 3 35 Tx Ring 3

green/white Rx Tip 3

white/green 19 51 Rx Ring 3

green/white

Tx Tip 4

white/brown 4 36 Tx Ring 4

brown/white Rx Tip 4

white/brown 20 52 Rx Ring 4

brown/white

1-43

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

DS-1 Cable Installation

Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the

wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.

When using DS-1 AMP Champ cables, you must equip the ONS 15454 with an AMP Champ connector

EIA on each side of the backplane where DS-1 cables will terminate. Each AMP Champ connector on

the EIA corresponds to a slot in the shelf assembly and is numbered accordingly. The AMP Champ

connectors have screw-down tooling at each end of the connector. To install an AMP Champ backplane

cover, see the “AMP Champ EIA” section on page 1-20.

Procedure: Install DS-1 AMP Champ Cables on the AMP Champ EIA

Step 1 Prepare a 56-wire cable for each DS-1 card you will install in the shelf assembly. See Table 1-5 on

page 1-41 for the ONS 15454 AMP Champ connector pin assignments.

Step 2 Connect the male AMP Champ connector on the cable to the female AMP Champ connector on the ONS

15454 backplane.

Tx Tip 5

white/slate 5 37 Tx Ring 5

slate/white Rx Tip 5

white/slate 21 53 Rx Ring 5

slate/white

Tx Tip 6

red/blue 6 38 Tx Ring 6

blue/red Rx Tip 6

red/blue 22 54 Rx Ring 6

blue/red

Tx Tip 7

red/orange 7 39 Tx Ring 7

orange/red Rx Tip 7

red/orange 23 55 Rx Ring 7

orange/red

Tx Tip 8

red/green 8 40 Tx Ring 8

green/red Rx Tip 8

red/green 24 56 Rx Ring 8

green/red

Tx Tip 9

red/brown 9 41 Tx Ring 9

brown/red Rx Tip 9

red/brown 25 57 Rx Ring 9

brown/red

Tx Tip 10

red/slate 10 42 Tx Ring 10

slate/red Rx Tip 10

red/slate 26 58 Rx Ring 10

slate/red

Tx Tip 11

black/blue 11 43 Tx Ring 11

blue/black Rx Tip 11

black/blue 27 59 Rx Ring 11

blue/black

Tx Tip 12

black/orange 12 44 Tx Ring 12

orange/black Rx Tip 12

black/orange 28 60 Rx Ring 12

orange/black

Tx Tip 13

black/green 13 45 Tx Ring 13

green/black Rx Tip 13

black/green 29 61 Rx Ring 13

green/black

Tx Tip 14

black/brown 14 46 Tx Ring 14

brown/black Rx Tip 14

black/brown 30 62 Rx Ring 14

brown/black

Tx Tip 15

black/slate 15 47 Tx Tip 15

slate/black Rx Tip 15

black/slate 31 63 Rx Tip 15

slate/black

Tx Tip 16

yellow/blue 16 48 Tx Tip 16

blue/yellow Rx Tip 16

yellow/blue 32 64 Rx Tip 16

blue/yellow

Table 1-6 Pin Assignments for AMP Champ Connectors (shielded DS1 cable) (continued)

64-Pin Blue Bundle 64-Pin Orange Bundle

Signal/Wire Pin Pin Signal/Wire Signal/Wire Pin Pin Signal/Wire

1-44

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Card Installation

Step 3 Use the clips on the male AMP Champ connector to secure the connection.

The female connector has grooves on the outside edge for snapping the clips into place.

Note To install optical cable, you must first install optical cards.

1.12 Card Installation

This section describes the how to install ONS 15454 cards. The procedure for installing ONS 15454

cards is nearly identical for each card. AIC card installation is slightly different from all other cards and

is described in its own procedure. The XC/XCVT /XC10G and TCC+ installation procedures are

virtually identical and are described in one procedure. Installation for all other cards is the same and is

covered by one procedure.

The order in which you install cards is important. The proper sequence follows:

1. TCC+ cards

2. XC/XCVT/XC10G cards

3. Optical cards

4. Electrical cards

5. Ethernet cards

6. AIC card

Note Because all other cards boot from the active TCC+ card which houses the ONS 15454 software, you

must install the TCC+ card before booting any other cards. See Chapter 2, “Software Installation”

for information about the TCC+ card and software versions.

Note Before installing cards, verify that the power is turned on.

ONS 15454 cards have electrical plugs at the back that plug into electrical connectors on the shelf

assembly backplane. When the ejectors are fully closed, the card plugs into the assembly backplane.

Figure 1-29 shows card installation.

Warning

During this procedure, wear grounding wrist straps to avoid ESD damage to the card. Do not

directly touch the backplane with your hand or any metal tool, or you could shock yourself.

Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the

wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.

Warning

Class I (21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11) and Class 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01) laser products.

1-45

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Card Installation

Warning

Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.

Do not stare into the beam or view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with

certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a

distance of 100 mm may pose an eye hazard. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Warning

The laser is active when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position (labeled 1). The

port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off

(labeled 0).

Figure 1-29 Installing cards in the ONS 15454

1.12.1 Slot Requirements

The ONS 15454 shelf assembly has 17 card slots numbered sequentially from left to right. Slots 1 –4

and 14 –17 are multispeed slots. They can host any ONS 15454 card, except the OC48IR 1310, OC48LR

1550, OC48ELR 1550, and OC192LR 1550 cards. Slots 5, 6, 12 and 13 are high-speed slots. They can

host any ONS 15454 card, including the OC48IR 1310, OC48LR 1550, OC48ELR 1550, and OC192LR

1550 cards. You can install the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 and the OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550

cards in any multispeed or high-speed card slot.

FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN

39391

Guide rail

Ejector

1-46

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Card Installation

Slots 7 and 11 are dedicated to TCC+ cards. Slots 8 and 10 are dedicated to cross-connect (XC, XCVT,

XC10G) cards. Slot 9 is reserved for the optional Alarm Interface Controller (AIC) card. Slots 3 and 15

can also host DS1N-14 and DS3N-12 cards that are used in 1:N protection.

Caution Do not operate the ONS 15454 with a single TCC+ card or a single XC/XCVT/XC10G card installed.

Always operate the shelf assembly with one working and one protect card of the same type.

Shelf assembly slots have symbols indicating the type of cards that you can install in them. Each ONS

15454 card has a corresponding symbol. The symbol on the card must match the symbol on the slot.

Table 1-7 shows the slot and card symbol definitions.

Table 1-8 lists the number of ports, line rates, connector options, and connector locations for ONS 15454

optical and electrical cards.

Table 1-7 Slot and Card Symbols

Symbol Color/Shape Definition

●Orange/Circle Multispeed slot (all traffic cards except the OC48IR 1310,

OC48LR 1550, and OC192 LR 1550 cards). Only install

ONS 15454 cards with a circle symbol on the faceplate.

▲Blue/Triangle High-speed slot (all traffic cards including the OC48IR

1310, OC48LR 1550, and OC192LR 1550 cards). Only

install ONS 15454 cards with circle or a triangle symbol on

the faceplate.

■Purple/Square TCC+ slot. Only install ONS 15454 cards with a square

symbol on the faceplate.

✚Green/Cross Cross-connect (XC/XCVT/XC10G) slot. Only install ONS

15454 cards with a cross symbol on the faceplate.

PRed/P Protection slot in 1:N protection schemes.

◆Red/Diamond AIC Slot. Only install ONS 15454 cards with a diamond

symbol on the faceplate.

★Gold/Star Multispeed slot - future

Table 1-8 Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors

Card Ports Line Rate per Port Connector Types

Connector

Location

DS1-14 14 1.544 Mbps SMB w/wire wrap

adapter, AMP

Champ Connector*

Backplane

DS1N-14 14 1.544 Mbps SMB w/wire wrap

adapter, AMP

Champ Connector*

—

DS3-12 12 44.736 Mbps SMB or BNC* Backplane

DS3N-12 12 44.736 Mbps SMB or BNC* —

DS3-12E 12 44.736 Mbps SMB or BNC* Backplane

1-47

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Card Installation

* When used as a protect card, the card does not have a physical external connection. The protect card connects to the working

card(s) through the backplane and becomes active when the working card fails. The protect card then uses the physical

connection of the failed card.

Procedure: Install the TCC+ and XC/XCVT/XC10G Cards

Although the installation procedure is the same for both TCC+ and XC/XCVT/XC10G cards, you must

install the TCC+ card and let it initialize before installing the XC/XCVT/XC10G cards. The TCC+ card

houses the ONS 15454 software. For a detailed explanation, see Chapter 2, “Software Installation.”

Note This is not the procedure to use when upgrading from XC to XCVT cards or from XCVT to XC10G

cards. If you are performing an XC to XCVT upgrade, an XCVT to a XC10G upgrade, or a TCC to

TCC+ upgrade, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide.

Step 1 Open the card ejectors.

Step 2 Slide the card along the guide rails into the correct slot (Slot 8 or 10 for the XC/XCVT/XC10G and Slot

7 or 11 for the TCC+).

Step 3 Close the ejectors.

Step 4 Verify that power is applied to the shelf assembly.

Step 5 Verify the LED activity as described in Table 1-9.

DS3N-12E 12 44.736 Mbps SMB or BNC* —

DS3XM-6 6 44.736 Mbps SMB or BNC* Backplane

EC1-12 12 51.84 Mbps SMB or BNC* Backplane

E100T-12 12 100 Mbps RJ-45 Faceplate

E1000-2 2 1000 Mbps SC (GBIC) Faceplate

E100T-G 12 100 Mbps RJ-45 Faceplate

E1000-2-G 2 1000 Mbps SC (GBIC) Faceplate

OC-3 IR 4 155.52 Mbps (STS-3) SC Faceplate

OC-12 (IR/LR) 1 622.08 Mbps

(STS-12) SC Faceplate

OC-48

(IR/LR/ELR) 1 2488.32 Mbps

(STS-48) SC Faceplate

OC-48 any slot

(IR/LR) 1 2488.32 Mbps

(STS-48) SC Faceplate

OC-192 (LR) 1 9.95 Gbps (STS-192) SC Faceplate

Table 1-8 Card Ports, Line Rates, and Connectors (continued)

Card Ports Line Rate per Port Connector Types

Connector

Location

1-48

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Card Installation

Note If the FAIL LED is lit continuously on the TCC+ card, see the tip below about the TCC+

automatic upload.

Step 6 Verify that the ACT/STBY LED is the correct color for the card (green for active, amber for standby).

The IP address for the node, the temperature of the ONS 15454, and the time of day will be displayed

on the LCD. The default time and date is 12:00 AM, January 1, 1970.

Tip When a TCC+ card installed in the shelf assembly has a different version of the ONS 15454 software

installed than the version running on the active TCC+, the newly-installed TCC+ card automatically

loads the software version running on the active TCC+. You do not need to do anything in this

situation. However, the loading TCC+ card will not boot up in the normal manner. When the card is

first inserted, the red FAIL LED stays on for a short period. The FAIL LED then blinks normally and

all LEDs go dark. The FAIL LED and the ACT/STBY LED flash alternately every 30 to 45 seconds

as the new software loads onto the new TCC+ card. After loading the new software for approximately

30 minutes, the TCC+ card becomes the standby card and the amber LED is illuminated.

Procedure: Install Optical, Electrical, and Ethernet Cards

Although the installation procedure is the same for optical, electrical, and Ethernet cards, you must

install the optical cards before installing the electrical cards.

Warning

Before installing an OC-192 card, make sure the safety key on the faceplate is in off position

(labeled 0). When in the on position (labeled 1), the laser is activated.

Step 1 Open the card ejectors.

Table 1-9 LED Activity during TCC+ and XC/XCVT/XC10G Card Installation

Card Type LED Activity

TCC+ 1. The red FAIL LED turns on and remains lit for 20 to 30 seconds.

2. The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.

3. The red FAIL LED remains lit for 5 to 10 seconds.

4. All LEDs (including the CRIT, MAJ, MIN, REM, SYNC, and ACO LEDs)

blink once and turn off for 5 to 10 seconds.

5. The ACT/STBY LED turns on. (On the TCC+ card, the ACT/STBY LED

may take several minutes to illuminate while the DCC processor boots.)

XC/XCVT/XC10G 1. The red LED turns on and remains lit for 20 to 30 seconds.

2. The red LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.

3. The red LED remains lit for 5 to 10 seconds.

4. All LEDs blink once and turn on.

5. The ACT/STBY LED turns on.

1-49

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Card Installation

Step 2 Slide the card along the guide rails into the correct slot.

Step 3 Close the ejectors.

Step 4 Verify that power is applied to the shelf assembly.

Step 5 Verify the LED activity, as described in Table 1-10.

Step 6 Verify that the ACT or ACT/STBY LED is on. The signal fail (SF) LED can persist until all card ports

connect to their far end counterparts and a signal is present.

Step 7 When you have displayed CTC on your workstation, verify that the card appears in the correct slot on

the CTC node view. See Chapter 2, “Software Installation” for CTC information and setup instructions.

Procedure: Install the AIC Card

Step 1 Open the card ejectors.

Step 2 Slide the card along the guide rails into the correct slot.

Step 3 Close the ejectors.

Step 4 Verify that power is applied to the shelf assembly.

Step 5 Verify the that red FAIL LED remains lit for 1 second.

Step 6 Verify that the red FAIL LED blinks for 1 to 5 seconds.

Step 7 Verify that after 1 to 5 seconds, all LEDs blink once and turn off.

Step 8 Verify that the ACT LED is on.

Table 1-10 LED Activity during Optical and Electrical Card Installation

Card Type LED Activity

OC-3, OC-12,

OC-48, OC-192

1. The red FAIL LED turns on and remains lit for 20 to 30 seconds.

2. The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.

3. All LEDs blink once and turn off for 5 to 10 seconds.

4. The ACT LED turns on.

DS-1, DS-3,

EC-1

1. The red FAIL LED turns on and remains lit for 10 to 15 seconds.

2. The red FAIL LED blinks for 30 to 40 seconds.

3. All LEDs blink once and turn off for 1 to 5 seconds.

4. The ACT/STBY LED turns on.

Ethernet 1. The red FAIL LED turns on and remains lit for 20 to 30 seconds.

2. The red FAIL LED blinks for 35 to 45 seconds.

3. All LEDs blink once and turn off for 1 to 5 seconds.

4. The ACT LED turns on.

1-50

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Card Installation

1.12.2 Gigabit Interface Converter

GBICs are hot-swappable input/output devices that plug into a Gigabit Ethernet (E1000-2 or E1000-2-G)

card to link the card with the fiber-optic network. Cisco provides two GBIC models: one for short reach

applications (part number 15454-GBIC-SX) and one for long-reach applications (15454-GBIC-LX).

The short reach, or “SX” model, connects to multimode fiber and the long reach, or “LX” model,

requires single-mode fiber. Because the GBICs are very similar in appearance, check the label on the

GBIC carefully before installing it.

For a description of GBICs and their capabilities, see Chapter 9, “Ethernet Operation.”

Procedure: Install Gigabit Interface Converters

Step 1 Remove the GBIC from its protective packaging.

Step 2 Check the part number to verify that the GBIC is the correct type for your network.

Step 3 Grip the sides of the GBIC with your thumb and forefinger and insert it into the slot on the front panel

of the Gigabit Ethernet card (shown in Figure 1-30).

GBICs are hot-swappable and can therefore be installed/removed while the card/shelf assembly is

powered and running.

Note GBICs are keyed to prevent incorrect installation.

1-51

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Card Installation

Figure 1-30 Installing a GBIC on an E1000-2 card

Step 4 Slide the GBIC through the cover flap until you hear a click.

The click indicates the GBIC is locked into the slot.

Warning

GBICs are Class I laser products. These products have been tested and comply with Class

I limits.

Warning

Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the aperture ports of the single-mode fiber

optic modules when no cable is connected. Avoid exposure and do not stare into open

apertures.

Step 5 When you are ready to attach the network interface fiber-optic cable, remove the plug from the GBIC

and save the plug for future use.

Step 6 Install and route the cable. See the “Optical Cable Management” section on page 1-55 for routing

instructions.

E1000

FAIL

ACT

33678 12931

ACT/LINK

44734

Plug

1-52

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Fiber-Optic Cable Installation

Procedure: Remove a Gigabit Interface Converter

Step 1 Disconnect the network fiber cable from the GBIC SC connector.

Step 2 Release the GBIC from the slot by simultaneously squeezing the two plastic tabs (one on each side of

the GBIC).

Step 3 Slide the GBIC out of the Gigabit Ethernet module slot.

A flap closes over the GBIC slot to protect the connector on the Gigabit Ethernet card.

1.13 Fiber-Optic Cable Installation

This section explains how to install optical fibers on OC-N cards.

Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454. Plug the

wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower-right outside edge of the shelf assembly.

ONS OC-N cards feature SC connectors. To install fiber-optic cables in the ONS 15454, a fiber cable

with the corresponding connector type must be connected to the transmit and receive ports on the ONS

15454 cards. On ONS 15454 optical card ports, the top connector is transmit and the bottom connector

is receive. Cisco recommends that the transmit and receive and the working and protection fibers be

labeled at each end of the fiber span to avoid confusion with cables that are similar in appearance.

For information about fiber cable management, see the “Optical Cable Management” section on

page 1-55.

Warning

Class I (21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11) and Class 1M (IEC 60825-1 2001-01) laser products.

Warning

Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from the end of the unterminated fiber cable or connector.

Do not stare into the beam or view directly with optical instruments. Viewing the laser output with

certain optical instruments (for example, eye loupes, magnifiers, and microscopes) within a

distance of 100 mm may pose an eye hazard. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specified may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Warning

The laser is active when the card is booted and the safety key is in the on position (labeled 1). The

port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on. The laser is off when the safety key is off

(labeled 0).

Warning

Follow all directions and warning labels when working with optical fibers. To prevent eye

damage, never look directly into a fiber or connector.

1-53

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Fiber-Optic Cable Installation

Caution Do not user fiber loopbacks with the OC192 LR 1550 card unless you are using a 20 dB attentuator.

Never connect a direct fiber loopback. Using fiber loopbacks causes irreparable damage to the

OC-192 card.

Procedure: Install Fiber-Optic Cables on OC-N Cards

Note Clean all fiber connectors thoroughly. Dust particles can degrade performance. Put caps on

any fiber connectors that are not used.

Step 1 Place the SC connector in front of the connection point on the card faceplate. Each card supports at least

one transmit and one receive connector to create an optical carrier port. Figure 1-31 shows the cable

location.

Figure 1-31 Installing fiber-optic cables

Step 2 Align the keyed ridge of the cable connector with the receiving slot on the faceplate connection point.

Step 3 Gently push the cable connector into the faceplate connection point until the connector snaps into place.

Procedure: Install the Fiber Boot

Cisco provides clear plastic fiber boots for the OC-3, OC-12, and OC-48 (except OC48 AS) cards. The

boots prevent hanging fibers from bending too sharply, which may degrade performance. The boots also

prevent the front door from interfering with hanging fibers. The fiber boots are not necessary for the

OC-192 and the OC-48 AS cards because of the angled SC connector. Figure 1-32 shows the fiber boot

attachment.

You can install the fiber boots on the fiber-optic cables before or after the fibers are attached to the optic

card.

FAIL

ACT

32082

Front edge of card

SC cable connector

SC faceplate connector

1-54

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Cable Routing and Management

Step 1 Position the open slot of the fiber boot underneath the fiber cable.

Step 2 Push the fiber cable down into the fiber boot.

Step 3 Twist the fiber boot to lock the fiber cable into the tail end of the fiber boot.

Slide the fiber boot forward along the fiber cable until the fiber boot fits snugly onto the end of the SC

cable connector.

Figure 1-32 Attaching a fiber boot

1.14 Cable Routing and Management

The ONS 15454 cable management facilities include the following:

•Cable management clips on optical card faceplates

•A cable-routing channel that runs the width of the shelf assembly

•Plastic horseshoe-shaped fiber guides at each side opening of the cable-routing channel that ensure

the proper bend radius is maintained in the fibers

Note You can remove the fiber guide if necessary to create a larger opening (if you need to route Cat-5

Ethernet cables out the side, for example). To remove the fiber guide, take out the three screws that

anchor it to the side of the shelf assembly.

•A fold-down door that provides access to the cable-management tray

•Cable tie-wrap facilities on EIAs that secure cables to the cover panel

•Reversible jumper routing fins that enable you to route cables out either side by positioning the fins

as desired

•Jumper slack storage reels (2) on each side panel that reduce the amount of slack in cables that are

connected to other devices

Fiber boot

SC cable

connector

Fiber

optic

line

32092

1-55

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Cable Routing and Management

Note To remove the reels, take out the screw in the center of each reel.

Figure 1-33 shows the cable management facilities that you can access through the fold-down front door,

including the cable-routing channel and the jumper routing fins.

Figure 1-33 Managing cables on the front panel

1.14.1 Optical Cable Management

Optical cables connect to the SC connectors which are located on the faceplate of the optical cards and

on GBICs. Route optical cables down through the fiber management clips on the optical card faceplate

(shown in Figure 1-34) or, if the optical cables are connected to GBICs, route them down through the

jumper routing fins (Ethernet cards do not have fiber management clips).

Route optical cables into the cable management area of the shelf assembly, through a cutout in the

nearest side of the assembly, and onto the side of the assembly. A hinged panel on the front of the shelf

assembly folds down to provide access to the cable-management tray.

FAN FAIL CRIT MAJMIN

34238

Reversible jumper

routing fins

Fold down

front door

1-56

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Cable Routing and Management

Figure 1-34 Routing fiber-optic cables on the optical-card faceplate

Procedure: Route Fiber-Optic Cables in the Shelf Assembly

Step 1 Open the fold-down front door on the cable-management tray.

Step 2 Route the cable on the card faceplate through the fiber clip on the faceplate.

GBICs do not have fiber clips; therefore, if you are routing optical cable from an E1000-2-G or E1000-2

card, skip to Step 3.

Step 3 Route the cables into the cable-management tray.

Step 4 Route the cables out either side of the cable-management tray through the cutouts on each side of the

shelf assembly. Use the reversible fiber guides to route cables out the desired side.

Step 5 Close the fold-down front door when all cables in the front compartment are properly routed.

Figure 1-35 shows the fold-down front door of the shelf assembly open to display the cable routing

channel.

FAIL

ACT

Fold down faceplate

Retaining clip

Slot on cable management tray

Cutout

Faceplate connector

Cable connector

39140

1-57

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Cable Routing and Management

Figure 1-35 Fold-down front door of the cable-management tray (displaying the cable routing

channel)

1.14.2 Coaxial Cable Management

Coaxial cables connect to EIAs on the ONS 15454 backplane using cable connectors. EIAs feature

cable-management eyelets for tie wrapping or lacing cables to the cover panel.

Procedure: Route the Coaxial Cables

Step 1 Tie wrap or lace the coaxial cables according to local site practice and route the cables through the side

cutouts on either side of the ONS 15454. The rubber coated edges of the side cutouts prevent the cables

from chafing.

Note When using the RG179 cable with SMB connectors, remember that the maximum distance

available with the RG179 cable is less than the maximum distance available with standard

RG59 cable. If you only use the RG179, the maximum available distance is 50 feet versus

the 450 feet available with the larger RG59 cable.

Step 2 Use short lengths of “pigtail” RG179 to terminate the shelf assembly.

Step 3 Use standard RG59 connected to the RG179 for the remainder of the cable run. When using a 10-foot

section of the RG179, you can attach a maximum length of 437 feet of RG59. When using a 30-foot

section of RG179, you can attach a maximum length of 311 feet of RG59.

The shorter maximum distance available with the RG179 is due to a higher attenuation rate for the

thinner cable. The attenuation rate for RG59 cable (based on testing with Belden 923, the equivalent of

328A cable) is ~1.0 dB/100 feet at 22 Mhz (DS-3 data rate). The attenuation rate of RG179 is

6.3 db/100 feet. Use a figure of 5.0 for total cable loss when making calculations. Figure 1-36 shows one

side of the ONS 15454 backplane with SMB EIAs and the coaxial cables properly routed.

FAN FAIL CRIT MAJ MIN

45063

1-58

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Cable Routing and Management

Figure 1-36 Routing coaxial cable through the SMB EIA backplane

1.14.3 DS-1 Twisted-Pair Cable Management

Connect twisted pair/DS-1cables to SMB EIAs on the ONS 15454 backplane using cable connectors and

DS-1 electrical interface adapters (balun).

Procedure: Route DS-1 Twisted-Pair Cables

When using DS-1 twisted-pair cables, the backplane cover has cutouts over the SMB cable connectors.

SMB EIAs feature cable-management eyelets for tie wrapping or lacing cables to the cover panel.

Step 1 Install DS-1 electrical interface adapters on every transmit and receive connector for DS-1 ports.

Step 2 Use wire-wrap posts on the DS-1 electrical interface adapters to connect the terminated incoming cables.

Step 3 Tie-wrap or lace the twisted-pair cables according to local site practice and route the cables into the side

cutouts on either side of the ONS 15454.

Connector ends

Tie-wrap

posts

32079

Tie-wraps

1-59

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Cable Routing and Management

1.14.4 AMP Champ Cable Management

EIAs have cable management eyelets to tiewrap or lace cables to the cover panel. Tie wrap or lace the

AMP Champ cables according to local site practice and route the cables. If you configure the ONS 15454

for a 23-inch rack, two additional inches of cable management area is available on each side of the shelf

assembly. See the“AMP Champ EIA” section on page 1-20 and the “AMP Champ Connector

Installation” section on page 1-41 and the for more information.

1.14.5 BIC Rear Cover Installation

The ONS 15454 has an optional backplane interface connector (BIC) rear cover. This clear plastic cover

provides additional protection for the cables and connectors on the backplane (Figure 1-37). You can

also install the optional spacers if more space is needed between the cables and rear cover (Figure 1-38).

Figure 1-37 Clear BIC rear cover

Procedure: Install the BIC Rear Cover

Step 1 Locate the three screws that run vertically along the edges of the backplane.

Only one pair of screws lines up with the screw slots on the mounting brackets, making them easy to

locate.

Step 2 Loosen the top and bottom screws on one edge of the backplane to provide room to slide the mounting

brackets into place using the u-shaped screw slots on each end.

Step 3 Slide one of the mounting brackets into place and tighten the screws.

Step 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the second mounting bracket.

Step 5 Attach the cover by hanging it from the mounting screws on the back of the mounting brackets and

pulling it down until it fits snugly into place.

33916

1-60

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Cable Routing and Management

Figure 1-38 Backplane attachment for BIC cover

Figure 1-39 Installing the BIC rear cover with spacers

32073

Screw locations

for attaching BIC

rear cover

55374

RET 1

CAUTION: Remove power from both

the BAT1 and terminal blocks

prior to servicing

SUITABLE FOR MOUNTING ON

A NON-COMBUSTIBLE SURFACE.

PLEASE REFER TO INSTALLATION

INSTRUCTIONS.

-42 TO -57 Vdc

650 Watts Maximum

BAT 1 RET 2 BAT 2

1-61

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Ferrite Installation

1.15 Ferrite Installation

Place third-party ferrites on certain cables to dampen electromagnetic interference (EMI) from the ONS

15454. Ferrites must be added to meet the requirements of GR 1089. Refer to the ferrite manufacturer

documentation for proper use and installation of the ferrites. The following illustrations show possible

ferrite placements on the ONS 15454 for power cables, AMP Champ connectors, baluns, BNC/SMB

connectors, and the wire-wrap pin field.

Procedure: Attach Ferrites to Power Cabling

Use a single oval ferrite TDK ZCAT2035-0930 for both pairs of cables and a block ferrite Fair Rite

0443164151 for each pair of cables.

Step 1 Wrap the cables once around and through the block ferrites and pull the cable straight through the oval

ferrites.

Step 2 Place the oval ferrite between the ONS 15454 and the block ferrite as shown in Figure 1-40.

Step 3 Place the oval ferrite as close to the power terminals as possible and place the block ferrite within 5 to

6 inches of the power terminals.

Figure 1-40 Attaching ferrites to power cabling

Figure 1-41 shows the suggested method for attaching the ferrites to AMP Champ connectors. Use a

block ferrite Fair Rite 0443164151 for each cable.

Power terminals

32087

1-62

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Ferrite Installation

Figure 1-41 Attaching ferrites to AMP Champ connectors

Figure 1-42 shows the suggested method for attaching ferrites to baluns. Use an oval ferrite TDK ZCAT

1730-0730 for each cable.

Figure 1-42 Attaching ferrites to electrical interface adapters (baluns)

Figure 1-43 shows the suggested method for attaching ferrites to SMB/BNC connectors. Use an oval

ferrite TDK ZCAT1730-0730 for each cable and place the ferrite as close to the connector as possible.

32088

32090

1-63

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Ferrite Installation

Figure 1-43 Attaching ferrites to SMB/BNC connectors

Procedure: Attach Ferrites to Wire-Wrap Pin Fields

Use an oval ferrite TDK ZCAT1730-0730 and block ferrite Fair Rite 0443164151 for each pair of cables.

Figure 1-44 shows the suggested method for attaching ferrites to wire-wrap pin fields.

Step 1 Wrap the cables once around and through the block ferrites and pull the cables straight through the oval

ferrites.

Step 2 Place the oval ferrite as close to the wire-wrap pin field as possible and between the ONS 15454 and the

block ferrite as shown. The block ferrite should be within 5 to 6 inches of the wire-wrap pin field.

Figure 1-44 Attaching ferrites to wire-wrap pin fields

32089

32091

1-64

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

ONS 15454 Assembly Specifications

1.16 ONS 15454 Assembly Specifications

This section contains hardware and software specifications for the ONS 15454.

1.16.1 Bandwidth

•Total bandwidth: 240 Gbps

•Data plane bandwidth: 160 Gbps

•SONET plane bandwidth: 80 Gbps

1.16.2 Slot Assignments

•Total card slots: 17

•Multispeed slots (any traffic card except OC48 IR 1310, OC48 LR/ELR 1550, and OC192 LR 1550

cards): Slots 1 – 4, 14 – 17

•High-speed slots (any traffic card including OC48 IR 1310, OC48 LR/ELR 1550, and OC192 LR

1550 cards): Slots 5, 6, 12, 13

•TCC+ (Timing Communication and Control): Slots 7, 11

•XC/XCVT/XC10G (Cross Connect): Slots 8, 10

•AIC (Alarm Interface Card): Slot 9

1.16.3 Cards

•TCC+

•XC

•XCVT

•XC10G

•AIC

•EC1-12

•DS1-14

•DS1N-14

•DS3-12

•DS3N-12

•DS3-12E

•DS3N-12E

•DS3XM-6

•OC3 IR 4 1310

•OC12 IR 1310

•OC12 LR 1310

1-65

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

ONS 15454 Assembly Specifications

•OC12 LR 1550

•OC48 IR 1310

•OC48 LR 1550

•OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310

•OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550

•OC192 LR 1550

•OC48 ELR DWDM

•OC48 ELR 1550

•E100T-12

•E1000-2

•E100T-G

•E1000-2-G

Note The OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and E1000-2 cards are Class 1 laser products (IEC 60825-1 2001-01/Class

I laser product (21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11).

Note The OC-192 card is a Class 1M laser product ((IEC 60825-1 2001-01)/Class I laser product (21CFR

1040.10 and 1040.11).

1.16.4 Configurations

•Two-fiber UPSR ring

•Path protected mesh network (PPMN)

•Two-fiber BLSR

•Four-fiber BLSR

•Add-drop multiplexer

•Terminal mode

•Regenerator mode

1.16.5 Cisco Transport Controller

•10 Base-T

•TCC+ access: RJ-45 connector

•Backplane access: LAN pin field

1.16.6 External LAN Interface

•10 Base-T Ethernet

1-66

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

ONS 15454 Assembly Specifications

•Backplane access: LAN pin field

1.16.7 TL1 Craft Interface

•Speed: 9600 bps

•TCC+ access: RS-232 DB-9 type connector

•Backplane access: CRAFT pin field

1.16.8 Modem Interface

•Hardware flow control

•TCC+: RS-232 DB-9 type connector

1.16.9 Alarm Interface

•Visual: Critical, Major, Minor, Remote

•Audible: Critical, Major, Minor, Remote

•Alarm contacts: 0.045mm, -48V, 50 mA

•Backplane access: Alarm pin fields

1.16.10 EIA Interface

•SMB: AMP #415504-3 75 Ohm 4 leg connectors

•BNC: Trompeter #UCBJ224 75 Ohm 4 leg connector (King or ITT are also compatible)

•AMP Champ: AMP#552246-1 with #552562-2 bail locks

1.16.11 Nonvolatile Memory

64 MB, 3.0V FLASH memory

1.16.12 BITS Interface

•2 DS-1 BITS inputs

•2 derived DS-1 outputs

•Backplane access: BITS pin field

1.16.13 System Timing

•Stratum 3 per Telcordia GR-253-CORE

•Free running accuracy: ± 4.6 ppm

1-67

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

Installation Checklist

•Holdover Stability: 3.7 x10-7/day, including temperature (< 255 slips in first 24 hours)

•Reference: External BITS, line, internal

1.16.14 Power Specifications

•Input power: -48 VDC

•Power consumption: 55W (fan tray only); 650W (maximum draw w/cards)

•Power Requirements: -42 to -57 VDC

•Power terminals: #6 Lug

1.16.15 Environmental Specifications

•Operating Temperature: 0 to +55 degrees Celsius

•Operating Humidity: 5 - 95%, non-condensing

1.16.16 Dimensions

•Height: 18.5 inches (40.7 cm)

•Width: 19 or 23 inches (41.8 or 50.6 cm) with mounting ears attached

•Depth: 12 inches (26.4 cm) (5 inch projection from rack)

•Weight: 55 lbs. (empty)

1.17 Installation Checklist

This section provides a summary of the steps required to install the ONS 15454. The section assumes

that individual cards are used with their default provisioning values or will be provisioned by local

technicians as required by the site.

Table 1-11 Installation Checklist

Description Check

The ONS 15454 is mounted securely in the rack.

The ONS 15454 is grounded with the frame ground.

Power runs to the ONS 15454.

Visual and Audible alarm pins connect to central alarm collection equipment.

If used, BITS, LAN, Alarm, ACO, and CRAFT pins connect to corresponding cables.

If used, BITS, LAN, Alarm, ACO, and CRAFT cables are tiewrapped and routed under

screw holes.

The preferred EIAs are installed.

Coaxial and/or DS-1 cables are installed on the backplane.

Laced or tiewrapped coaxial cables run onto the sides of the ONS 15454.

1-68

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility Matrix

1.18 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility Matrix

Table 1-12 provides a matrix showing software and hardware compatibility for ONS 15454 Releases 2.0,

2.1, 2.2.0, 3.0. and 3.1.

Power connections are fused properly (15A recommended).

-48V DC (tolerance -42 to -57V DC) power is present at DC A and DC B terminals (if used)

when power is applied.

The fan-tray air filter is installed in the fan tray with the flow direction arrow on the filter

frame pointing up.

The fan-tray assembly is installed. When installed, fans will run on high speed with no

TCC+s installed.

If used, Ethernet patchcords are connected to Ethernet cards.

Fiber-optic and/or Ethernet patchcords route through the faceplate clips, into the

cable-management tray, through the side cutout, and along the sides of the ONS 15454.

The fan-tray assembly can be removed without disturbing fiber or Ethernet patchcords.

The LCD is working. (Use LCD buttons to toggle through slots, ports and states of cards.)

The door is mounted with hinges on hinge pins.

Doors open and close without disturbing fiber or Ethernet patchcords.

Table 1-11 Installation Checklist (continued)

Description Check

Table 1-12 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility

Hardware 2.00.0x (2.0) 2.10.0x (2.1) 2.20.0x (2.2.0) 3.00.0x (3.0) 3.10.0x (3.1)

TCC Required Required Fully

Compatible Not Supported Not Supported

TCC+ Not Supported Not Supported Fully

Compatible Required Required

XC Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

XCVT Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

XC10G Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Fully

Compatible

AIC Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

EC1-12 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

DS1-14 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

DS1N-14 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

1-69

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility Matrix

DS3-12 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

DS3N-12 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

DS3-12E Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

DS3N-12E Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

DS3XM-6 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

OC3 IR 4

1310 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

OC12 IR 1310 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

OC12 LR

1310 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

OC12 LR

1550 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

OC48 IR 1310 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

OC48 LR

1550 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

OC48 ELR

DWDM Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

OC48

IR/STM16 SH

AS 1310

See Note See Note See Note See Note Fully

Compatible

OC48

LR/STM16

LH AS 1550

See Note See Note See Note See Note Fully

Compatible

Note Use the XC10G card, the TCC+ card, and Software R3.1 or higher to enable the any slot

function on the OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 and OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 cards.

OC192

LR/STM64

LH 1550

Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Fully

Compatible

E100T-12 Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

E1000-2 Not Supported Not Supported Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

Table 1-12 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility (continued)

Hardware 2.00.0x (2.0) 2.10.0x (2.1) 2.20.0x (2.2.0) 3.00.0x (3.0) 3.10.0x (3.1)

1-70

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 1 Hardware Installation

ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility Matrix

If an upgrade is required for compatibility, call the Cisco Technical Assistance Center at

1-877-323-7368.

E100T-G Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

E1000-2-G Not Supported Not Supported Fully

Compatible Fully

Compatible

Table 1-12 ONS 15454 Software and Hardware Compatibility (continued)

Hardware 2.00.0x (2.0) 2.10.0x (2.1) 2.20.0x (2.2.0) 3.00.0x (3.0) 3.10.0x (3.1)

CHAPTER

2-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Software Installation

Cisco Transport Controller (CTC), the Cisco ONS 15454’s software interface, is stored on the TCC+

card and download to your workstation each time you log into the ONS 15454. This chapter:

•Describes how Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) software is installed on PCs and Solaris

workstations

•Tells you how to connect PCs and Solaris workstations to the Cisco ONS 15454, including direct

connections, LAN connections, remote connections, and firewall-compliant connections

•Describes the CTC graphic user interface, including the three main CTC views, network, node, and

card

•Explains how to create domains to manage multiple nodes, change the network view background

color and image (map), and add a node to the network map

•Describes the different ways you can invoke commands within CTC

•Explains how to print and export CTC data

2.1 Installation Overview

ONS 15454 provisioning and administration is performed using the Cisco Transport Controller software.

CTC is a Java application that is installed in two locations:

•ONS 15454 Timing Communications and Control card (TCC+)

•PCs and Solaris workstations that connect to the ONS 15454

CTC software is pre-installed on the TCC+. The only time you install software on the TCC+ is when you

upgrade from one CTC release to another. To upgrade CTC on the TCC+, you must follow the upgrade

procedures specific to the software release. These procedures can be downloaded from the Cisco website

(www.cisco.com).

For PCs and Solaris workstations, CTC is downloaded from the TCC+ and installed on your computer

automatically after you connect to the ONS 15454. To connect to an ONS 15454, you enter the

ONS 15454 IP address in the URL field of a web browser, such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft®

Internet Explorer. After connecting to an ONS 15454, the following installation occurs automatically:

1. A CTC launcher applet is downloaded from the TCC+ to your computer’s Temp directory. (If these

files are deleted, they are reinstalled the next time you connect to the ONS 15454.)

2. The launcher determines whether your computer has a CTC release matching the release on the

ONS 15454 TCC+.

2-2

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Computer Requirements

3. If the computer does not have CTC installed, or if the installed release is older than the TCC+

version, the launcher downloads the CTC program files from the TCC+.

4. The launcher starts CTC. The CTC session is separate from the web browser session, so the web

browser is no longer needed. If you log into an ONS 15454 that is connected to ONS 15454s with

older versions of CTC, or to Cisco ONS 15327s, CTC “element” files are downloaded automatically

to enable you to interact with those nodes. You cannot interact with nodes on the network that have

a software version later than the node that you are logged into. Therefore, always log into nodes

having the latest software release.

Each ONS 15454 can handle up to four network-level CTC sessions (the login node and its

DCC-connected nodes) and one node-level session (login node only) at one time. CTC performance may

vary, depending upon the volume of activity in each session.

Note You can also use TL1 commands to communicate with the Cisco ONS 15454 through VT100

terminals and VT100 emulation software, or you can Telnet to an ONS 15454 using TL1 port 3083.

See the Cisco ONS 15454 TL1 Command Guide for a comprehensive list of TL1 commands.

2.2 Computer Requirements

To use CTC in ONS 15454 Release 3.1, your computer must have a web browser with the correct Java

Runtime Environment (JRE) installed. The correct JRE for each CTC software release is included on the

Cisco ONS 15454 ONS 15454 software CD. If you are running multiple CTC software releases on a

network, the JRE installed on the computer must be compatible with the different software releases.

Table 2-1 on page 2-2 shows JRE compatibility with ONS software releases.

Requirements for PCs and Solaris workstations are provided in Table 2-2. A modified java.policy file

must also be installed. In addition to Netscape Communicator and the JRE, also included on the ONS

15454 software CD and the ONS 15454 documentation CD are the Java plug-in and modified java.policy

file.

Table 2-1 JRE Compatibility

ONS Software Release JRE 1.2.2 Compatible JRE 1.3 Compatible

ONS 15327 Release 1.0 Yes No

ONS 15327 Release 1.0.1 Yes Yes

ONS 15454 Release 2.2.1 and earlier Yes No

ONS 15454 Release 2.2.2 Yes Yes

ONS 15454 Release 3.0 Yes Yes

ONS 15454 Release 3.1 Yes Yes

2-3

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Computer Requirements

Table 2-2 Computer Requirements for CTC

Area Requirements Notes

Processor Pentium II 300 MHz, UltraSPARC, or equivalent 300 Mhz is the recommended

processor speed. You can use

computers with less processor

speed; however, you may

experience longer response

times and slower performance.

RAM 128 MB

Hard drive 2 GB CTC application files are

downloaded from the TCC+ to

your computer’s Temp directory.

These files occupy 3-5 MB of

hard drive space.

Operating

System

•PC: Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT

4.0, or Windows 2000

•Workstation: Solaris 2.6 or 2.7

Web browser •PC: Netscape Navigator 4.51 or higher, or

Netscape Communicator 4.61 or higher, or

Internet Explorer 4.0 (service pack 2) or higher

•Workstation: Netscape Navigator 4.73 or higher

Netscape Communicator 4.73

(Windows) and 4.76 (Solaris) are

installed by the CTC Setup

Wizard included on the Cisco

ONS 15454 software and

documentation CDs.

Java Runtime

Environment JRE 1.2.2_05 with Java Plugin 1.2.2 minimum

JRE 1.3.0_C (PC) recommended

JRE 1.3.0_01 (Solaris) recommended

Use JRE 1.2.2_05 if you connect

to ONS 15454s running CTC

Release 2.2.1 or earlier.

Use JRE 1.3.0 if all ONS 15454s

that you connect to are running

Release 2.2.2 or later. JRE 1.3.0

is installed by the CTC Setup

Wizard included on the Cisco

ONS 15454 software and

documentation CDs.

Java.policy

file A java.policy file modified for CTC must be installed A modified java.policy file is

installed by the CTC Setup

Wizard included on the Cisco

ONS 15454 software and

documentation CDs.

Cable User-supplied Category 5 straight-through cable

with RJ-45 connectors on each end to connect the

computer to the ONS 15454 directly or though a

LAN.

2-4

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Running the CTC Setup Wizard

Note On PCs, the mouse pointer scheme should be set to Windows Standard (Windows 95/98) or None

(Windows NT or Windows 2000). To check the settings, choose Settings and then Control Panel from

the Windows Start menu. Double-click the Mouse option. From the Pointers tab of the Mouse

Properties dialog box, select the Windows Standard (or “none” for NT or Windows 2000) mouse

scheme. Click OK.

2.3 Running the CTC Setup Wizard

The ONS 15454 provides a setup wizard that installs the files needed to run CTC on PCs and Solaris

workstations. You can run the setup wizard from the Cisco ONS 15454 software CD or from the Cisco

ONS 15454 documentation CD. The wizard will install:

•Netscape Communicator 4.73 (Windows) or 4.76 (Solaris)

•JRE 1.3 (Windows) or JRE 1.3.0.01 (Solaris)

•Cisco ONS 15454 online documentation

•Modified java.policy file

For Solaris workstations, the JRE may require patches to run properly. You can find the patch tar file in

the Jre/Solaris directory on the CD. For information about installing the patches, see the

Jre/Solaris/Solaris.txt file on the CD. After installing the patches, if necessary, perform the “Set Up the

Environment Variable (Solaris installations only)” procedure on page 2-4 and the “Reference the JRE

(Solaris installations only)” procedure on page 2-5 to set up JRE on the workstation.

Procedure: Run the CTC Setup Wizard

Step 1 Insert the Cisco ONS 15454 Release 3.1 software or documentation CD into your computer CD drive.

If the CD directory does not automatically open, open it.

Step 2 Double-click setup.exe (Windows) or setup.bat (Solaris).

Step 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. You can choose to install all components, or select the Custom option

to install selected components.

Procedure: Set Up the Environment Variable (Solaris installations only)

Perform one of the following edit procedures. (JRE indicates the destination directory you selected for

the JRE.)

•If you are using csh, edit the .cshrc file in your home directory by adding:

setenv NPX_PLUGIN_PATH [JRE]/j2rel1_3_0_01/plugin/sparc/ns4

•If you are using ksh, edit the .kshrc file in your home directory by adding:

export NPX_PLUGIN_PATH = [JRE]/j2rel1_3_0_01/plugin/sparc/ns4

2-5

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Connecting PCs to the ONS 15454

Procedure: Reference the JRE (Solaris installations only)

Step 1 Run the Control Panel by typing:

[JRE]/j2rel1_3_0_01/bin/ControlPanel

Step 2 Click the Advanced tab.

Step 3 From the combo box, select [JRE]/j2rel1_3_0_01. If the JRE is not found, select other and enter the

following in the Path text box:

[JRE]/j2rel1_3_0_01

Step 4 Click Apply.

2.4 Connecting PCs to the ONS 15454

You can connect a PC to the ONS 15454 using the RJ-45 LAN port on the TCC+ or the LAN 1 pins on

the ONS 15454 backplane. For a list of LAN pin assignments, see Table 1-2 on page 1-34. Each ONS

15454 must have a unique IP address that you use to access the ONS 15454. The address is displayed on

the front panel LCD. The initial IP address, 192.1.0.2, is the default address for ONS 15454 access and

configuration. Each computer used to communicate with the ONS 15454 should have only one IP

address.

Note Do not use dual network interface cards (NIC) or an enabled NIC card and dial-up adapter at the same

time; this hampers communication between CTC and ONS 15454s.

2.4.1 Direct Connections to the ONS 15454

A direct PC to ONS 15454 connection means your computer is physically connected to the ONS 15454.

This is most commonly done by connecting a CAT-5 straight-through cable from your PC NIC card to

the RJ-45 port on the TCC+. However, direct connections include connections to switches or hubs to

which the ONS 15454 is physically connected. To connect to the ONS 15454 with a direction

connection, you must:

•Set up Windows on your PC for direct connections

•Attach cables from the PC to the ONS 15454

•Test your connection

Procedure: Creating a Direct Connection to an ONS 15454

Step 1 Attach a CAT-5 cable from the PC NIC card to one of the following:

•RJ-45 jack on the ONS 15454 TCC+ card

•RJ-45 jack on a hub or switch to which the ONS 15454 is physically connected

Step 2 Use the steps in Table 2-3 to set up Windows for direct connections to an ONS 15454 when:

2-6

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Connecting PCs to the ONS 15454

•DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is not enabled on the ONS 15454 or the ONS 15454

is not connected to a DHCP server. If DHCP is enabled, go to Step 2. (For information about DHCP,

see the“Setting Up Network Information” section on page 3-2.)

•The ONS 15454 is not connected to a LAN.

Step 3 Test the connection:

a. Start Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer.

Table 2-3 Setting Up Windows 95/98, Windows NT, and Windows 2000 PCs for Direct ONS 15454 Connections

Windows 95/98 Windows NT Windows 2000

1. From the Windows Start menu,

choose Settings > Control Panel.

2. On the Control Panel dialog box,

click the Network icon.

3. In the Network dialog box select

TCP/IP for your PC Ethernet card,

then click Properties.

4. On the TCP/IP Properties dialog

box, click the DNS Configuration

tab and choose Disable DNS.

5. Click the WINS Configuration tab

and choose Disable WINS

Resolution.

6. Click the IP Address tab.

7. In the IP Address window, click

Specify an IP address.

8. In the IP Address field, enter an IP

address that is identical to the ONS

15454 IP address except for the last

three digits. The last three digits

must be between 1 and 254.

9. In the Subnet Mask field, type

255.255.255.0.

10. Click OK.

11. On the TCP/IP dialog box, click the

Gateway tab.

12. In the New Gateway field, type the

ONS 15454 IP address. Click Add.

13. Verify that the IP address displays

in the Installed Gateways field,

then click OK.

14. When the prompt to restart your PC

displays, click Yes.

1. From the Windows Start menu,

choose Settings > Control Panel.

2. On the Control Panel dialog box,

click the Network icon.

3. In the Network dialog box click the

Protocols tab, choose TCP/IP

Protocol, then click Properties.

4. Click the IP Address tab.

5. In the IP Address window, click

Specify an IP address.

6. In the IP Address field, enter an IP

address that is identical to the ONS

15454 IP address except for the last

three digits. The last three digits

must be between 1 and 254.

7. In the Subnet Mask field, type

255.255.255.0.

8. Click OK.

9. On the TCP/IP Properties dialog

box, type the ONS 15454 IP

address in the Default Gateway

field.

10. Click Apply.

11. In some cases, Windows NT will

prompt you to reboot your PC. If

you receive this prompt, click Yes.

1. From the Windows Start menu,

choose Settings > Network and

Dial-up Connections > Local Area

Connection.

2. On the Local Area Connection

Status dialog box, click Properties.

3. On the General tab, choose TCP/IP

Protocol, then click Properties.

4. Click Use the following IP address.

5. In the IP Address field, enter an IP

address that is identical to the ONS

15454 IP address except for the last

three digits. The last three digits

must be between 1 and 254.

6. In the Subnet Mask field, type

255.255.255.0.

7. In the Default Gateway field, type

the ONS 15454 IP address.

8. Click OK.

2-7

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Connecting PCs to the ONS 15454

b. Enter the Cisco ONS 15454 IP address in the web address (URL) field. If the connection is

established, a Java Console window, CTC caching messages, and the Cisco Transport Controller

page 2-9 to complete the login. If the Login dialog box does not appear, complete Steps c and d.

c. From the Windows Start menu, choose the MS-DOS or command prompt.

d. At the prompt, type:

ping [ONS 15454 IP address]

For example, you would type “ping 192.1.0.2” to connect to an ONS 15454 with default IP address

192.1.0.2. If your computer is connected to the ONS 15454, a “reply from [IP address]” message

displays.

If your PC is not connected, a Request timed out message displays. If this occurs, check that the

cables connecting the PC to the ONS 15454 are securely attached. Check the Link Status LED on

the PC NIC card. Repeat the procedures provided in Table 2-3 while verifying IP and submask

information.

2.4.2 Network Connections

When connecting the PC to the ONS 15454 through a LAN, the PC’s IP address must be configured to

be on the same subnet as the ONS 15454’s LAN interface. The ONS 15454 IP address and netmask are

visible on the LCD panel. If needed, change the IP address configuration on the PC or use the LCD panel

on the ONS 15454.

Procedure: Access the ONS 15454 from a LAN

Step 1 Change the ONS 15454 IP address to an IP address that exists on the LAN. (See the “Change IP Address,

Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD” procedure on page 3-4 for instructions.)

Step 2 Ensure that the ONS 15454 is physically connected to the LAN (typically using a cross-over cable to a

hub or switch).

Step 3 If you changed the PC network settings for direct access to the ONS 15454, change the settings back to

the LAN access settings. Usually this means setting the IP Address on the TCP/IP dialog box back to

“Obtain an IP address automatically” (Windows 95/98) or “Obtain an IP address from a DHCP server”

(Windows NT/2000). If your LAN requires that DNS or WINS be enabled, change the setting on the

DNS Configuration or WINS Configuration tab of the TCP/IP dialog box.

Step 4 If your computer is connected to a proxy server, disable proxy service or add the ONS 15454 nodes as

exceptions.

Step 5 Start your web browser and type the ONS 15454 IP address in the URL field.

Procedure: Disable Proxy Service Using Internet Explorer (Windows)

Complete these steps if your computer is connected to a proxy server and your browser is Internet

Explorer.

Step 1 From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.

Step 2 In the Control Panel window, choose Internet Options.

2-8

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Connecting PCs to the ONS 15454

Step 3 From the Internet Properties dialog box, click Connections > LAN Settings.

Step 4 On the LAN Settings dialog box, either:

•Deselect Use a proxy server to disable the service

•Leave Use a proxy server selected and click Advanced. On the Proxy Setting dialog box under

Exceptions, enter the IP addresses of ONS 15454 nodes that you will access. Separate each address

with a semicolon. You can insert an asterisk for the host number to include all the ONS 15454s on

your network. Click OK to close each open dialog box.

Procedure: Disable Proxy Service Using Netscape (Windows and Solaris)

Complete these steps if your computer is connected to a proxy server and your browser is Netscape

Navigator.

Step 1 Open Netscape.

Step 2 From the Edit menu, choose Preferences.

Step 3 In the Preferences dialog box under Category, choose Advanced > Proxies.

Step 4 On the right side of the Preferences dialog box under Proxies, either:

•Choose Direct connection to the Internet to bypass the proxy server

•Choose Manual proxy configuration to add exceptions to the proxy server, then click View. On the

Manual Proxy Configuration dialog box under Exceptions, enter the IP addresses of the ONS 15454

nodes that you will access. Separate each address with a comma. Click OK to close each open dialog

box.

2.4.3 Remote Access to the ONS 15454

You can use LAN modems to access ONS 15454s from remote sites. The LAN modem must be

connected to the RJ-45 port on a TCC+ card or to the LAN pins on the ONS 15454 backplane. The LAN

modem must be properly configured for use with the ONS 15454. When the modem is installed, dial-up

access to the ONS 15454 is available using a PC or Solaris workstation modem.

2.4.4 TL1 Terminal Access to the ONS 15454

You can communicate with the ONS 15454 using TL1. To connect a TL1 terminal (or a PC running

terminal emulation software) to the ONS 15454, you can:

•Use the DB-9 plug on the front panel of the TCC+ card or the CRAFT pins on the backplane. (For

a list of CRAFT pin assignments, see Table 1-3 on page 1-35.)

•Telnet to port 3083 with a LAN connection.

•Start a TL1 session from CTC by selecting Open TL1 Session from the CTC Tools menu and

selecting the node where you want to hold the TL1 session in the Select Node dialog box.

2-9

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Logging into the ONS 15454

For information about using TL1 commands with the ONS 15454, see the Cisco ONS 15454 TL1

Command Guide.

2.5 Logging into the ONS 15454

After you set up the physical connections between the PC and ONS 15454 and change your PC network

settings, you can log into CTC.

Note If you encounter errors while logging in, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and

Maintenance Guide for possible causes.

Procedure: Log into the ONS 15454

Step 1 From the PC connected to the ONS 15454, start Netscape or Internet Explorer.

Step 2 In the Netscape or Internet Explorer Web address (URL) field, enter the ONS 15454 IP address. For

initial setup, this is the default address, 192.1.0.2. Press Enter.

Note If you are logging into ONS 15454 or ONS 15327 networks running different releases of

CTC software, log into the node running the most recent release. If you log into a node with

an older release, nodes running later releases display as grey icons on the network map, and

the IP address will display instead of the node name. To check the software version of a node,

select About CTC from the CTC Help menu.

A Java Console window displays the CTC file download status. The web browser displays information

about your Java and system environments. If this is the first login, CTC caching messages display while

CTC files are downloaded to your computer; then the CTC Login dialog box displays (Figure 2-1).

Figure 2-1 Logging into the ONS 15454

Step 3 Type a user name and password (both are case sensitive). For initial setup, type the user name

“CISCO15” and click Login (no password is required).

55020

2-10

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Logging into the ONS 15454

Note The CISCO15 user is provided with every ONS 15454. CISCO15 has superuser privileges,

so you can create other users. CISCO15 is delivered without a password. To create one, click

the Provisioning > Security tabs after you log in and change the CISCO15 password. (You

cannot delete the CISCO15 user.) For more information about ONS 15454 security, see the

“Creating Users and Setting Security” section on page 3-6.

Step 4 Set the following login options, as needed:

•Node Name—Displays the IP address entered in the web browser and a pull-down menu of

previously-entered ONS 15454 IP addresses. You can select any ONS 15454 (or ONS 15327) on the

list for the login, or you can enter the IP address (or node name) of any new node where you want

to log in.

•Additional Nodes—Displays a list of login node groups that were created. Login node groups allow

you to display ONS 15454s and/or ONS 15327s that are not connected by the SONET Data

Communications Channel (DCC) to the ONS 15454 in the Node Name field. (For instructions, see

the “Creating Login Node Groups” section on page 2-10.)

Note Topology hosts that were created in previous ONS 15454 releases by modifying the cms.ini

file are displayed as a “Topology Host” group under Additional Nodes.

•Exclude Dynamically Discovered Nodes—Check this box to view only the ONS 15454 (and login

node group members, if any) entered in the Node Name field. Nodes linked to the Node Name ONS

15454 through the DCC are not displayed.

Step 5 Click Login.

If login is successful, the CTC window displays. From here, you can navigate to other CTC views to

provision and manage the ONS 15454.

2.5.1 Creating Login Node Groups

When you log into an ONS 15454 node, only ONS 15454s optically connected (i.e., with DCC

connections) to the node will display in network view. However, you can create a login node group to

view and manage ONS 15454s that only have an IP connection. For example, logging into Node 1 in

Figure 2-2 displays Node 2 and Node 3 because they are optically connected to Node 1. Nodes 4, 5, and

6 do not display because DCC connections do not exist. To view all six nodes at once, you create a login

node group with the IP addresses of Nodes 1, 4, and 5. Those nodes, and all nodes optically connected

to them, display when you log into any node in the group.

2-11

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Logging into the ONS 15454

Figure 2-2 A login node group

Procedure: Create a Login Node Group

Step 1 From the CTC Edit menu, choose Preferences.

Step 2 Click the Login Node Group tab and click Create Group.

Step 3 Enter a name for the group in the Create Login Group Name dialog box. Click OK.

Step 4 Under Members, type the IP address (or node name) of a node you want to add to the group. Click Add.

Repeat this step for each node you want to add to the group.

Step 5 Click OK.

The next time you log into an ONS 15454, the login node group will be available in the Additional Nodes

list of the Login dialog box. You can create as many login groups as you need. The groups are stored in

the CTC preferences file and are not visible to other users.

LAN/WAN (Ethernet)

Three node ring

Single

Laptop PC

Node 1

IP Address

192.168.106.143

Node 4

IP Address

192.168.105.119

Node 5

IP Address

192.168.104.109

Node 6

IP Address

192.168.103.199

Node 3Node 2

IP Address

192.168.106.100

55029

Two node ring

2-12

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Logging into the ONS 15454

2.5.2 Accessing ONS 15454s Behind Firewalls

If an ONS 15454 or CTC computer resides behind a firewall that uses port filtering, you must receive

an Internet Inter-ORB Protocol (IIOP) port from your network administrator and enable the IIOP port

on the ONS 15454 and/or CTC computer, depending on whether one or both devices reside behind

firewalls.

If the ONS 15454 is in a protected network and the CTC computer is in an external network, as shown

in Figure 2-3, enable the IIOP listener port specified by the firewall administrator on the ONS 15454.

The ONS 15454 sends the port number to the CTC computer during the initial contact between the

devices using Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP). After the CTC computer obtains the ONS 15454

IIOP port, the computer opens a direct session with the node using the specified IIOP port.

Figure 2-3 ONS 15454s residing behind a firewall

If the CTC computer and the ONS 15454 both reside behind firewalls (Figure 2-4), set the IIOP port on

the CTC computer and on the ONS 15454. Each firewall can use a different IIOP port. For example, if

the CTC computer firewall uses IIOP port 4000, and the ONS 15454 firewall uses IIOP port 5000, 4000

is the IIOP port set on the CTC computer and 5000 is the IIOP port set on the ONS 15454.

Figure 2-4 A CTC computer and ONS 15454s residing behind firewalls

Procedure: Set the IIOP Listener Port on the ONS 15454

Step 1 Log into the ONS 15454 node from a CTC computer that is behind the firewall.

55351

CTC computer

External network Protected network

ONS 15454

Unprotected

network

Private

network

IIOP port

Firewall

Port

filtering ONS 15454

55350

CTC computer

Firewall

Port

filtering

Protected network External network Protected network

ONS 15454

Private

network Unprotected

network

Private

network

IIOP port IIOP port

IIOP port

Firewall

Port

filtering ONS 15454

2-13

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

Step 2 In node view, select the Provisioning > Network tabs.

Step 3 On the General subtab under TCC+ CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port, select a listener port option:

•Default - Variable—Used to connect to ONS 15454s on the same side of the firewall or if no firewall

is used

•Standard Constant—Uses port 683, the CORBA default port number

•Other Constant—Allows you to set an IIOP port specified by your firewall administrator

Step 4 Click OK to apply the change.

Step 5 When the Change Network Configuration? message displays, click Yes.

Both ONS 15454 TCC+s will reboot, one at a time.

Procedure: Set the IIOP Listener Port on CTC

Step 1 From the CTC Edit menu, select Preferences.

Step 2 On the Preferences dialog box, select the Firewall tab.

Step 3 Under CTC CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port, set the listener port option:

•Default - Variable—Used to connect to ONS 15454s from within a firewall or if no firewall is used

•Standard Constant—Uses port 683, the CORBA default port number

•Other Constant—Allows you to specify an IIOP port defined by your administrator

Step 4 Click OK to apply the change and close the dialog box.

2.6 Working with the CTC Window

The CTC window (screen) displays after you log into an ONS 15454 (Figure 2-5). The window includes

a menu bar, toolbar, and a top and bottom pane. The top pane displays status information about the

selected objects and a graphic of the current view. The bottom pane displays tabs and subtabs, which you

use to view ONS 15454 information and perform ONS 15454 provisioning and maintenance. From this

window you can display three ONS 15454 views: network, node, and card.

2-14

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

Figure 2-5 CTC window elements in the node view (default login view)

2.6.1 Node View

The CTC node view, shown in Figure 2-5, is the first view displayed after you log into an ONS 15454.

The login node is the first node displayed, and it is the “home view” for the session. Node view allows

you to view and manage one ONS 15454 node. The status area shows the node name, IP address, session

boot date and time, number of critical (CR), major (MJ), and minor (MN) alarms, the name of the current

logged-in user, and security level of the user.

2.6.1.1 CTC Card Colors

The graphic area of the CTC window depicts the ONS 15454 shelf assembly. The colors of the cards in

the graphic reflect the real-time status of the physical card and slot (Table 2-4).

Tool bar

Status area

Graphic area

Tabs

Subtabs

Menu bar

Top

pane

Bottom

pane

61867

Table 2-4 Node View Card Colors

Card Color Status

Grey Slot is not provisioned; no card is installed

Violet Slot is provisioned; no card is installed

White Slot is provisioned; a functioning card is installed

Yellow Slot is provisioned; a minor alarm condition exists

Orange Slot is provisioned; a major alarm condition exists

Red Slot is provisioned; a critical alarm exists

2-15

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

2.6.1.2 Node View Card Shortcuts

If you move your mouse over cards in the graphic, tooltips display additional information about the card

including the card type, card status (active or standby), the number of critical, major, and minor alarms

(if any), and the alarm profile used by the card. Right-clicking a card reveals a shortcut menu, which you

can use to open, reset, or delete a card. Right-click a slot (grey) to pre-provision a card (i.e., provision

a slot before installing the card).

2.6.1.3 Node View Tabs

Use the node view tabs and subtabs, shown in Table 2-5, to provision and manage the ONS 15454.

2.6.2 Network View

Network view (Figure 2-6) allows you to view and manage ONS 15454s and ONS 15327s that have DCC

connections to the node that you logged into and any login node groups you may have selected. (Nodes

with DCC connections to the login node will not display if you selected Exclude Dynamically

Discovered Nodes on the Login dialog box.) The graphic area displays a background image with colored

ONS 15454 icons. The icon colors indicate the node status (Table 2-6). Green lines show DCC

connections between the nodes. Selecting a node or span in the graphic area displays information about

the node and span in the status area.

Table 2-5 Node View Tabs and Subtabs

Tab Description Subtabs

Alarms Lists current alarms (CR, MJ, MN) for the

node and updates them in real-time none

Conditions Displays a list of standing conditions on the

node. none

History Provides a history of node alarms including

date, type, and severity of each alarm. The

Session subtab displays alarms and events for

the current session. The Node subtab displays

alarms and events retrieved from a fixed-size

log on the node.

Session, Node

Circuits Create, delete, edit, and map circuits none

Provisioning Provision the ONS 15454 node General, Ether Bridge, Network,

Protection, Ring, Security, SNMP,

Sonet DCC, Timing, Alarming

Inventory Provides inventory information (part number,

serial number, CLEI codes) for cards installed

in the node. Allows you to delete and reset

cards.

none

Maintenance Perform maintenance tasks for the node Database, Ether Bridge, Protection,

Ring, Software, XC cards,

Diagnostic, Timing, Audit, Routing

Table

2-16

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

Figure 2-6 A four-node network displayed in CTC network view

2.6.2.1 CTC Node Colors

The colors of nodes displayed in network view indicate the status of the node

2.6.2.2 Network View Tasks

Right-click the network view graphic area or a node, span, or domain (domains are described in the

“Creating Domains” section on page 2-17) to display shortcut menus. Table 2-7 lists the actions that are

available from the network view.

Icon color

indicates

node status

Bold letters

indicate login

node; asterisk

indicates

topology host

Dots indicate

the selected

node

61868

Table 2-6 Node Status

Color Alarm Status

Green No alarms

Yellow Minor alarms

Orange Major alarms

Red Critical alarms

Grey with node

name Node is initializing

Grey with IP

address Node is initializing, or a problem exists with IP routing from node to CTC

2-17

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

2.6.2.3 Creating Domains

Domains are icons where you can add a group of ONS 15454s or ONS 15327s. Adding domains to the

network view map makes networks with many nodes easier to manage. After you create a domain, you

can drag and drop ONS 15454 icons into it (Figure 2-7). The ONS 15454s are hidden until you open the

domain. Figure 2-9 shows an example of an opened domain.

Table 2-7 Performing Network Management Tasks in Network View

Action Procedure

Open a node Any of the following:

•Double-click a node icon

•Right-click a node icon, choose Drill Down to Node from the shortcut

•Click a node and choose Go to Selected Object View from the CTC View

•From the View menu, choose Other Node. Select a node from the Select

Node dialog box

•Double-click a node alarm or event in the Alarms or History tabs

Move a node icon Press the Ctrl key and the left mouse button simultaneously and drag the node

icon to a new location.

Reset node icon

position Right-click a node and choose Reset Node Position from the shortcut menu.

The node icon moves to the position defined by the longitude and latitude

fields on the Provisioning > General tabs in node view.

Provision a circuit Right-click a node. From the shortcut menu, choose Provision Circuit To and

select the node where you want to provision the circuit. For circuit creation

procedures, see the “Create an Automatically Routed Circuit” section on

page 6-2.

Update circuits with

new node Right-click a node and choose Update Circuits With New Node from the

shortcut menu. Use this command when you add a new node and want to pass

circuits through it.

Display a link end

point Right-click a span. On the shortcut menu, select Go To [node/slot/port] for the

drop port you want to view. CTC displays the card in card view.

Display span

properties Any of the following:

•Move mouse over a span; properties display above the span

•Click a span; properties display in the upper left corner of the window

•Right-click a span; properties display at the top of the shortcut menu

Perform a UPSR

protection switch for

an entire span

Right-click a network span and click Circuits. See the “Switch UPSR Traffic”

section on page 5-32 for UPSR protection switch procedures.

Upgrade a span Right-click a span and choose Upgrade Span from the shortcut menu.

Note For detailed span upgrade information and instructions, refer to the

Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide.

2-18

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

Figure 2-7 Adding nodes to a domain

After you add a node to a domain, the span lines leading to nodes within the domain become thicker

(Figure 2-8). The thick lines may represent multiple spans. For example, if the “rio-104” node in

Figure 2-8 is connected to two nodes within domain-0, the thick line represents two spans. The thick line

is green if all spans it represents are active and grey if any one span it represents is down. The domain

icon color reflects the highest alarm severity of any node within it.

Figure 2-8 Outside nodes displayed within the domain

Within the domain, external nodes and domains that are directly connected to nodes inside the domain

are displayed in a dimmed color (Figure 2-9). DCC links with one or two ends inside the domain are also

displayed.

Figure 2-9 Nodes inside a domain

You manage ONS 15454s that reside within a domain the same way you manage ONS 15454s on the

network map. Table 2-8 shows the domain actions.

Note Domains you create will be seen by all users who log into the network.

55023

2-19

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

2.6.2.4 Changing the Network View Background Color

You can change the color of the network view background and the domain view background (the area

displayed when you open a domain). If you modify background colors, the change is stored in your CTC

user profile on the computer. The change does not affect other CTC users.

Procedure: Modify the Network or Domain Background Color

Step 1 Right-click the network view or domain map area and choose Set Background Color from the shortcut

menu.

Step 2 On the Choose Color dialog box, select a background color.

Step 3 Click OK.

2.6.2.5 Changing the Network View Background Image

You can replace the background map image displayed in network view with any JPEG or GIF image that

is accessible on a local or network drive. If you want to position nodes on the map based on the node

coordinates, you will need the longitudes and latitudes for the edges of the map. However, if you will

use your mouse to position nodes, coordinates for the image edges are not necessary. The change does

not affect other CTC users.

Table 2-8 Managing Domains

Action Procedure

Create a domain Right-click the network map and choose Create New Domain from the shortcut

menu. When the domain icon appears on the map, type the domain name.

Move a domain Pressing Ctrl, drag the domain icon to the new location.

Rename a domain Right-click the domain icon and choose Rename Domain from the shortcut

menu. Type the new name in the domain name field.

Add a node to a

domain Drag a node icon to the domain icon. Release the mouse button when the node

icon is over the domain icon.

Move a node from a

domain to the

network map

Right-click a node.

Open a domain •Double-click the domain icon.

•Right-click the domain and choose Drill Down to Domain.

Return to network

view Right-click the domain view area and choose Go to Parent View from the

shortcut menu.

Preview domain

contents Right-click the domain icon and choose Show Domain Overview. The domain

icon shows a small preview of the nodes in the domain. To turn off the domain

overview, select Show Domain Overview again.

Remove domain Right-click the domain icon and choose Remove Domain. Any nodes residing in

the domain are returned to the network map.

2-20

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

Note You can obtain the longitude and latitude for cities and Zip Codes from the U.S. Census Bureau U.S.

Gazetteer website (http://www.census.gov/cgi-bin/gazetteer).

Procedure: Change the Network View Background Image

Caution Before you begin this procedure, verify that the image file you want to use is located on your hard

drive and is in JPEG or GIF format. CTC may stop responding if you link to a file that is not JPEG

or GIF, or if you provide an incorrect path.

Step 1 In network view, choose Edit > Preferences. (You also right-click the network or domain map and select

Set Background Image.)

Step 2 On the General tab of the Preferences dialog box (Figure 2-10), deselect Use Default Map.

Figure 2-10 Changing the CTC background image

Step 3 Click Browse. Navigate to the graphic file you want to use as a background.

Step 4 Select the file. Click Open.

Step 5 (Optional) Enter the coordinates for the map image edges in the longitude and latitude fields on the

Preferences dialog box. CTC uses the map’s longitude and latitude to position the node icons based on

the node coordinates entered for each node on the Provisioning > General tabs. Coordinates only need

to be precise enough to place ONS node icons in approximate positions on the image. You can also drag

and drop nodes to position them on the network view map.

Step 6 Click Apply and then click OK.

Browse to

alternate images

55024

2-21

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Working with the CTC Window

Figure 2-11 Network view with a custom map image

Step 7 At the network view, use the CTC toolbar Zoom buttons (or right-click the graphic area and select a

Zoom command from the shortcut menu) to set the area of the image you can view.

Procedure: Add a Node to the Current Session

During a CTC session, you can add nodes that are not displayed in the session without having to log out

of the session. When you add the node, you have the option to add it to the current login node group.

Step 1 From the CTC File menu, click Add Node (or click the Add Node button on the toolbar).

Step 2 On the Add Node dialog box, enter the node name (or IP address).

Step 3 If you want to add the node to the current login group, click Add Node to Current Login Group.

Otherwise, leave it unchecked.

Step 4 Click OK.

After a few seconds, the new node will be displayed on the network view map.

2.6.3 Card View

Card view displays information about individual ONS 15454 cards and is the window where you perform

card-specific maintenance and provisioning (Figure 2-12). A graphic of the selected card is shown in the

graphic area. The status area displays the node name, slot, number of alarms, card type, equipment type,

and either the card status (active or standby) or port status (IS [in service] or OOS [out of service]). The

information that is displayed and the actions you can perform depend on the card.

61872

2-22

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

CTC Navigation

Note CTC displays a card view for all ONS 15454 cards except the TCC+, XC, XCVT, and XC10G cards.

Card view provides access to the following tabs: Alarms, History, Circuits, Provisioning, Maintenance,

Performance, and Conditions. (The Performance tab is not displayed for the AIC card.) The subtabs,

fields, and information displayed under each tab depend on the card type selected.

Figure 2-12 CTC card view showing an DS3N-12 card

2.7 CTC Navigation

Different navigational methods are available within the CTC window to access views and perform

management actions. Commands on the View menu and CTC toolbar allow you to quickly move between

network, node, and card views. You can double-click and right-click objects in the graphic area and

move the mouse over nodes, cards, and ports to view popup status information. Figure 2-13 shows an

example.

Card identification

and status

61869

2-23

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

CTC Navigation

Figure 2-13 CTC node view showing popup information

Table 2-9 describes different methods for navigating within the CTC window.

Moving the mouse

over the CTC window

objects displays

ONS 15454

status information

61870

Table 2-9 CTC Window Navigation

Technique Description

View menu and

Toolbar You can choose from:

•The previous view (available after you navigate to two or more views)

•The next view (available after you navigate to previous views)

•The parent of the currently-selected view. Network is the parent of node

view; node view is the parent of card view.

•The currently selected object. For example, selecting a card on the node

view graphic displays the card in card view; selecting a node on the network

view map displays the node in node view.

•The home view (the node you initially logged into)

•The network view

•The other node (View menu only)

•Different zoom levels (toolbar only)

Double-Click •A node in network view to display the node view

•A card in node view to display the card view

2-24

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Viewing CTC Table Data

2.8 Viewing CTC Table Data

Much of the ONS 15454 data that CTC displays, such as alarms, alarm history, circuits, and inventory,

is displayed in tables. You can change the way the CTC tables are displayed. For example, you can:

•Rearrange or hide table columns

•Sort tables by primary and secondary keys in descending or ascending order. (Sorting and hiding is

available for all read-only tables.)

•Export CTC table data to spreadsheets and database management programs to perform additional

data manipulation. To export table data, see the “Printing and Exporting CTC Data” section on

page 2-26.

To change the display of a CTC table, left-click or right-click a column header in the table. Right-click

a column header to display a shortcut menu that has table column display options (Figure 2-14).

Right-Click •Network view graphic area—Displays a menu where you can create a new

domain, change the position and zoom level of the graphic image, and

change the background image and color.

•Node in network view—Displays a menu where you can open the node,

provision circuits, update circuits with a new node, and reset the node icon

position to the longitude and latitude set on the Provisioning > General tabs.

•Span in network view—Displays a menu where you can view information

about the source and destination ports, the span’s protection scheme, and

the span’s optical or electrical level. You can also display the Circuits on

Span dialog box, which displays additional span information and allows

you to perform UPSR protection switching.

•Card in node view—Displays a menu where you can open, delete, reset, and

change cards. The card that is selected determines the commands that are

displayed.

Move Mouse Cursor •Over node in network view—Displays a summary of node alarms and

provides a warning if the node icon has been moved out of the map range.

•Over span in network view—Displays circuit (node, slot, port) and

protection information

•Over card in node view—Displays card type and card status

•Over card port in node view—Displays port number and port status

Table 2-9 CTC Window Navigation (continued)

Technique Description

2-25

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Viewing CTC Table Data

Figure 2-14 Table shortcut menu that customizes table appearance

Table 2-10 lists the options that you can use to customize information that is displayed in CTC tables.

Column

preferences

61871

Table 2-10 Table Display Options

Task Click Right-Click Shortcut Menu

Resize column Left click while dragging the header

separator to the right or left N/A

Rearrange column order Left click while dragging the column

header to the right or left N/A

Reset column order N/A Choose Reset Columns

Order/Visibility

Hide column N/A Choose Hide Column

Display a hidden

column N/A Choose Show Column>[column

name]

Display all hidden

columns N/A Choose Reset Columns

Order/Visibility

Sort table (primary) Click a column header; each click

changes sort order (ascending or

descending)

Choose Sort Column

Sort table (secondary

sorting keys) Press the Shift key and

simultaneously click the column

header

Choose Sort Column

(incremental)

Reset sorting N/A Choose Reset Sorting

View table row count N/A Choose Row count; it is the last

item on the shortcut menu

2-26

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Printing and Exporting CTC Data

2.9 Printing and Exporting CTC Data

You can print CTC windows and table data such as alarms and inventory. You can also export CTC table

data for use by other applications such as spreadsheets, word processors, and database management

applications. Table 2-11 shows CTC data that can be exported.

Table 2-11 Table Data with Export Capability

View or Card Tab Subtab(s)

Network Alarms

History

Circuits

Provisioning Alarm Profiles

Maintenance Software

Node Alarms

Conditions

History Session/Node

Circuits

Provisioning Ether Bridge (Spanning Trees/Thresholds)

Network (General/Static Routes/OSPF)

Ring

Alarm Behavior

Inventory

Maintenance Ether Bridge (Spanning Trees/MAC Table/Trunk

Utilization)

Ring

Software

Audit

Routing Table

Test Access

OC-N Cards Alarms

Conditions

History Session/Card

Circuits

Provisioning Line/Threshold/STS/Alarm Behavior

Maintenance Loopback

Performance

DS-N Cards Alarms

Conditions

History Session/Card

Circuits

2-27

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Printing and Exporting CTC Data

Procedure: Print CTC Window and Table Data

Use the following procedure to print CTC windows and table data. Before you start, make sure your PC

is connected to a printer.

Step 1 From the CTC File menu, click Print.

Step 2 In the Print dialog (Figure 2-15) choose an option:

•Entire Frame—Prints the entire CTC window

•Tabbed View—Prints the lower half of the CTC window

Provisioning Line/Alarm Behavior

AIC Card Alarms

Conditions

History Session/Card

Circuits

Provisioning External Alarms/External Controls

Maintenance External Alarms/External Controls/Virtual Wires

EC1-12 Alarms

Conditions

History Session/Card

Circuits

Provisioning Line/Threshold/STS/Alarm Behavior

Maintenance

Performance

DS3XM-6 Alarms

Conditions

History Session/Card

Circuits

Provisioning Line/Alarm Behavior

Maintenance DS-1/DS-3/Performance

E100T-12/E1000-2/

E100T-12-G/E1000-2-G Alarms

Conditions

History Session/Card

Circuits

Provisioning Port/VLAN/Alarm Behavior

Performance Statistics/Utilization/History

Table 2-11 Table Data with Export Capability (continued)

View or Card Tab Subtab(s)

2-28

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Printing and Exporting CTC Data

•Table Contents—Prints CTC data in table format; this option is only available for CTC table data

(see the “Viewing CTC Table Data” section on page 2-24).

Figure 2-15 Selecting CTC data for print

Step 3 Click OK.

Step 4 In the Windows Print dialog, choose a printer and click Print.

Procedure: Export CTC Data

Step 1 From the CTC File menu, click Export.

Step 2 In the Export dialog (Figure 2-16) choose a format for the data:

•As HTML—Saves the data as an HTML file. The file can be viewed with a web browser without

running CTC.

•As CSV—Saves the CTC table values as text, separated by commas. You can import CSV data into

spreadsheets and database management programs.

•As TSV—Saves the CTC table values as text, separated by tabs. You can import TSV data into

spreadsheets and database management programs.

Figure 2-16 Selecting CTC data for export

Step 3 Click OK.

Step 4 In the Save dialog, enter a file name in one of the following formats:

•[filename].htm for HTML files

•[filename].csv for CSV files

•[filename].tsv for TSV files

2-29

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Displaying CTC Data in Other Applications

Step 5 Navigate to a directory where you want to store the file.

Step 6 Click OK.

2.10 Displaying CTC Data in Other Applications

CTC data exported in HTML format can be viewed with any web browser, such as Netscape Navigator

or Microsoft Internet Explorer. To display the data, use the browser’s File/Open command to open the

CTC data file.

CTC data exported as comma separated values (CSV) or tab separated values (TSV) can be viewed in

text editors, word processors, spreadsheets, and database management applications. Although

procedures depend on the application, you typically can use File/Open to display the CTC data. Text

editors and word processors display the data exactly as it is exported. Spreadsheet and database

management applications display the data in cells. You can then format and manage the data using the

spreadsheet or database management application tools.

In addition to the CTC exporting, CTC text information can be copied and pasted into other applications

using the Windows Copy (Ctrl+C), Cut (Ctrl+X) and Paste (Ctrl+V) commands.

2-30

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 2 Software Installation

Displaying CTC Data in Other Applications

CHAPTER

3-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Node Setup

This chapter explains how to set up a Cisco ONS 15454 node using the Cisco Transport Controller

(CTC). Topics include:

•Setting up general node information

•Preparing the ONS 15454 to connect to networks

•Changing the node IP address, default router, and subnet mask using the LCD

•Creating, editing, and deleting ONS 15454 users and assigning user security levels

•Setting the node timing references

•Creating card protection groups

•Viewing node inventory

•Viewing CTC software versions

Lastly, the chapter includes a node checklist to help you keep track of the procedures you have

performed. See Chapter 2, “Software Installation” for general CTC information.

3.1 Before You Begin

Before you begin node setup, review the following checklist to ensure you have the perquisite

information. Basic node information that you will provide need includes node name, contact, location,

date, and time. If the ONS 15454 will be connected to a network, you will need:

•The IP address and subnet mask to assign to the node and

•The IP address of the default router.

•If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is used, you will need the IP address of the DHCP server.

If you are responsible for setting up IP networking for the ONS 15454 network, see Chapter 4, “IP

Networking” for more information.

To create card protection groups, you will need to know:

•The card protection scheme that will be used and what cards will be included in it.

•The SONET protection topology that will be used for the node.

Note You must be able to log into the node to complete node provisioning. If you cannot log into the node,

see “Connecting PCs to the ONS 15454” section on page 2-5.

3-2

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up Basic Node Information

3.2 Setting Up Basic Node Information

Setting basic information for each Cisco ONS 15454 node is one of the first provisioning tasks you

perform. This information includes node name, location, contact, and timing. Completing the

information for each node facilitates ONS 15454 management, particularly when the node is connected

to a large ONS 15454 network.

Procedure: Add the Node Name, Contact, Location, Date, and Time

Step 1 Log into the ONS 15454 node. The CTC node view is displayed.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning > General tabs.

Step 3 Enter the following:

•Node Name—Type a name for the node. For TL1 compliance, names must begin with an alpha

character and have no more than 20 alphanumeric characters.

•Contact—Type the name of the node contact person and the phone number (optional).

•Location—Type the node location (optional) (such as a city name or specific office location).

•Latitude—Enter the node latitude: N (North) or S (South), degrees, and minutes.

•Longitude—Enter the node longitude: E (East) or W (West), degrees, and minutes.

CTC uses the latitude and longitude to position node icons on the network view map. (You can also

position nodes manually.) To convert a coordinate in degrees to degrees and minutes, multiply the

number after the decimal by 60. For example, the latitude 38.250739 converts to 38 degrees, 15

minutes (.250739 x 60 = 15.0443, rounded to the nearest whole number).

•Use SNTP Server—When checked, CTC uses a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server to set

the date and time of the node. Using an SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15454 network nodes use

the same date and time reference. The server synchronizes the node’s time after power outages or

software upgrades. If you check Use SNTP Server, type the server’s IP address in the next field. If

you do not use an SNTP server, complete the Date, Time, and Time Zone fields. The ONS 15454 will

use these fields for alarm dates and times. (CTC displays all alarms in the login node’s time zone

for cross network consistency.)

•Date—Type the current date.

•Time—Type the current time.

•Time Zone—Select the time zone.

Step 4 Click Apply.

3.3 Setting Up Network Information

ONS 15454s almost always operate in network environments. Before you connect an ONS 15454 to

other ONS 15454s or to a LAN, you must change the default IP address that is shipped with each ONS

15454 (192.1.0.2). IP addresses are unique identifiers for devices—called hosts—that connect to TCP/IP

networks. Every IP address includes a network number, which is assigned to an organization, and a host

(device) number, which the organization’s LAN administrator assigns to an individual network device.

3-3

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up Network Information

Subnetting enables LAN administrators to create subnetworks that are transparent to the Internet. Within

networks, ONS 15454s often exist as subnetworks, which are created by adding a subnet mask to the

ONS 15454 IP address.

The following procedure tells you how to set up the essential ONS 15454 networking information.

Additional ONS 15454 networking information and procedures, including IP addressing examples, static

route scenarios and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol options are provided in Chapter 3, “IP

Networking.”

Procedure: Set Up Network Information

Step 1 From the CTC node view, click the Provisioning > Network tabs (Figure 3-1).

Step 2 Complete the following:

•IP Address—Type the IP address assigned to the ONS 15454 node.

•Prevent LCD IP Config—If checked, prevents the ONS 15454 IP address from being changed using

the LCD. See the “Change IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD”

procedure on page 3-4.

•Default Router—If the ONS 15454 must communicate with a device on a network to which the ONS

15454 is not connected, the ONS 15454 forwards the packets to the default router. Type the IP

address of the router in this field. If the ONS 15454 is not connected to a LAN, leave the field blank.

•Subnet Mask Length—If the ONS 15454 is part of a subnet, type the subnet mask length (decimal

number representing the subnet mask length in bits) or click the arrows to adjust the subnet mask

length. The subnet mask length is the same for all ONS 15454s in the same subnet.

Note The MAC Address is read only. It displays the ONS 15454 address as it is identified on the

IEEE 802 Media Access Control (MAC) layer.

•Forward DHCP Request To—When checked, forwards Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

requests to the IP address entered in the Request To field. DHCP is a TCP/IP protocol that enables

CTC computers to get temporary IP addresses from a server. If you enable DHCP, CTC computers

that are directly connected to an ONS 15454 node can obtain temporary IP addresses from the DHCP

server.

•TCC CORBA (IIOP) Listener Port—Sets a listener port to allow communication with the ONS 15454

through firewalls. See the “Accessing ONS 15454s Behind Firewalls” section on page 2-12 for more

information.

3-4

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up Network Information

Figure 3-1 Setting up general network information

Step 3 Click Apply.

Step 4 Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

Both ONS 15454 TCC+ cards will reboot, one at a time.

Procedure: Change IP Address, Default Router, and Network Mask Using the LCD

You can change the ONS 15454 IP address, subnet mask, and default router address using the Slot,

Status, and Port buttons on the front panel LCD.

Note The LCD reverts to normal display mode after 5 seconds of button inactivity.

Step 1 On the ONS 15454 front panel, repeatedly press the Slot button until Node appears on the LCD.

Step 2 Repeatedly press the Port button until the following displays:

•To change the node IP address, Status=IpAddress (Figure 3-2)

•To change the node network mask, Status=Net Mask

•To change the default router IP address, Status=Default Rtr

3-5

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up Network Information

Figure 3-2 Selecting the IP address option

Step 3 Press the Status button to display the node IP address (Figure 3-3), the node subnet mask length, or

default router IP address.

Figure 3-3 Changing the IP address

Step 4 Push the Slot button to move to the IP address or subnet mask digit you need to change. The selected

digit flashes.

Step 5 Press the Port button to cycle the IP address or subnet mask digit to the correct digit.

Step 6 When the change is complete, press the Status button to return to the Node menu.

Step 7 Repeatedly press the Port button until the Save Configuration option appears (Figure 3-4).

Figure 3-4 Selecting the Save Configuration option

Step 8 Press the Status button to select the Save Configuration option.

A Save and REBOOT message appears (Figure 3-5).

Figure 3-5 Saving and rebooting the TCC+

Step 9 Press the Slot button to save the new IP address configuration. (Or press Port to cancel the

configuration.)

FAN FAIL

Slot

Slot-0

Status=IpAddress

44089

CRIT MAJ MIN

Status Port

FAN FAIL

Slot

172.020.214.107

44090

CRIT MAJ MIN

Status Port

FAN FAIL

Slot

Slot-0

Status=Save Cfg.

44091

CRIT MAJ MIN

Status Port

FAN FAIL

Slot

Save and REBOOT?

44092

CRIT MAJ MIN

Status Port

3-6

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Creating Users and Setting Security

Saving the new configuration causes the TCC+ cards to reboot. During the reboot, a “Saving Changes -

TCC Reset” message displays on the LCD. The LCD returns to the normal alternating display after the

TCC+ reboot is complete.

3.4 Creating Users and Setting Security

The CISCO15 user provided with each ONS 15454 can be used to set up other ONS 15454 users. You

can add up to 500 users to one ONS 15454. Each ONS 15454 user can be assigned one of the following

security levels:

•Retrieve users can retrieve and view CTC information but cannot set or modify parameters.

•Maintenance users can access only the ONS 15454 maintenance options.

•Provisioning users can access provisioning and maintenance options.

•Superusers can perform all of the functions of the other security levels as well as set names,

passwords, and security levels for other users.

Table 3-1 shows the actions that each user can perform in node view.

Table 3-1 ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View

CTC Tab Subtab Actions Retrieve Maintenance Provisioning Superuser

Alarms n/a Synchronize alarms X X X X

Conditions n/a Retrieve X X X X

History Session Read only

Node Retrieve Alarms/Events X X X X

Circuits n/a Create/Delete/Edit/ Upgrade X X

Path Selector Switching X X X

Search X X X X

Switch retrieval X X X X

Provisioning General Edit X

EtherBridge Spanning Trees: Edit X X

Thresholds: Create/Delete X X

Network All X

Protection Create/Delete/Edit X X

Browse groups X X X X

Ring All (BLSR) X X

Security Create/Delete X

Change password same user same user same user all users

SNMP Create/Delete/Edit X

Browse trap destinations X X X X

Sonet DCC Create/Delete X

Timing Edit X X

3-7

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Creating Users and Setting Security

Each ONS 15454 user has a specified amount of time that he or she can leave the system idle before the

CTC window is locked. The lockouts prevent unauthorized users from making changes. Higher-level

users have shorter idle times, as shown in Table 3-2.

You can perform ONS 15454 user management tasks from network or node view. In network view, you

can add, edit, or delete users from multiple nodes at one time. If you perform user management tasks in

node view, you can only add, edit, or delete users from that node.

Note You must add the same user name and password to each node the user will access.

Alarming Edit X X

Inventory n/a Delete X X

Reset XXX

Maintenance Database Backup/Restore X

EtherBridge Spanning Tree Retrieve X X X X

Spanning Tree Clear/Clear all X X X

MAC Table Retrieve X X X X

MAC Table Clear/Clear all X X X

Trunk Utilization Refresh X X X X

Protection Switch/lock out operations X X X

Ring BLSR maintenance X X X

Software Download/Upgrade/

Activate/Revert X

XC Cards Protection switches X X X

Diagnostic Retrieve/Lamp test X X X

TimingEdit XXX

AuditRetrieve XXXX

Routing Table Read only

Test Access Read only

Ta b l e 3 - 1 ONS 15454 Security Levels—Node View (continued)

CTC Tab Subtab Actions Retrieve Maintenance Provisioning Superuser

Table 3-2 ONS 15454 User Idle Times

Security Level Idle Time

Superuser 15 minutes

Provisioning 30 minutes

Maintenance 60 minutes

Retrieve Unlimited

3-8

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Creating Users and Setting Security

Procedure: Create New Users

Step 1 In network view, select the Provisioning > Security tabs.

Step 2 On the Security pane, click Create.

Step 3 In the Create User dialog box, enter the following:

•Name—Type the user name.

•Password—Type the user password. The password must be a minimum of six and a maximum of ten

alphanumeric (a-z, A-Z, 0-9) and special characters (+, #, %), where at least two characters are

non-alphabetic and at least one character is a special character.

•Confirm Password—Type the password again to confirm it.

•Security Level—Select the user’s security level.

Step 4 Under “Select applicable nodes,” deselect any nodes where you do not want to add the user (all network

nodes are selected by default).

Step 5 Click OK.

Procedure: Edit a User

Step 1 In network view, select the Provisioning > Security tabs.

Step 2 Click Change.

Step 3 On the Change User dialog box, edit the user information: name, password, password confirmation,

and/or security level. (A Superuser does not need to enter an old password. Other users must enter their

old password when changing their own passwords.)

Note You cannot change the CISCO15 user name.

Step 4 If you do not want the user changes to apply to all network nodes, deselect the unchanged nodes in the

Change Users dialog box.

Step 5 Click OK.

Changed user permissions and access levels do not take effect until the user logs out of CTC and logs

back in.

Procedure: Delete a User

Step 1 In network view, select the Provisioning > Security tabs.

Step 2 Click Delete.

Step 3 On the Delete User dialog box, enter the name of the user you want to delete.

Step 4 If you do not want to delete the user from all network nodes, deselect the nodes.

3-9

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Creating Protection Groups

Step 5 Click OK and click Apply.

3.5 Creating Protection Groups

The ONS 15454 provides several card protection methods. When you set up protection for ONS 15454

cards, you must choose between maximum protection and maximum slot availability. The highest

protection reduces the number of available card slots; the highest slot availability reduces the protection.

Table 3-3 shows the protection types that can be set up for ONS 15454 cards.

Procedure: Create Protection Groups

Step 1 From the CTC node view, click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.

Step 2 Under Protection Groups, click Create.

Step 3 In the Create Protection Group dialog box, enter the following:

•Name—Type a name for the protection group. The name can have up to 32 alpha-numeric characters.

•Type—Choose the protection type: 1:1, 1:N, or 1+1. The protection selected determines the cards

that are available to serve as protect and working cards. For example, if you choose 1:N protection,

only DS-1N and DS-3N cards are displayed.

•Protect Card or Port—Choose the protect card (if using 1:1 or 1:N) or protect port (if using 1+1)

from the list.

Table 3-3 Protection Types

Type Cards Description

1:1 DS-1

DS-3

EC-1-12

DS3XM-6

Pairs one working card with one protect card. Install the protect card in

an odd-numbered slot and the working card in an even-numbered slot

next to the protect slot towards the center, for example: protect in Slot

1, working in Slot 2; protect in Slot 3, working in Slot 4; protect in Slot

15, working in Slot 14.

1:N DS-1

DS-3

Assigns one protect card for several working cards. The maximum is

1:5. Protect cards (DS1N-14, DS3N-12) must be installed in Slots 3 or

15 and the cards they protect must be on the same side of the shelf.

Protect cards must match the cards they protect. For example, a

DS1N-14 can only protect DS1-14 or DS1N-14 cards. If a failure clears,

traffic reverts to the working card after the reversion time has elapsed.

1+1 Any optical Pairs a working optical port with a protect optical port. Protect ports

must match the working ports. For example, Port 1 of an OC-3 card can

only be protected by Port 1 of another OC-3 card. Cards do not need to

be in adjoining slots.

Unprotected Any Unprotected cards can cause signal loss if a card fails or incurs a signal

error. However, because no card slots are reserved for protection,

unprotected schemes maximize the service available for use on the ONS

15454. Unprotected is the default protection type.

3-10

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Creating Protection Groups

Based on these selections, a list of available working cards or ports is displayed under Available Cards

or Available Ports. Figure 3-6 shows a 1+1 protection group.

Figure 3-6 Creating a 1+1 protection group

Step 4 From the Available Cards or Available Ports list, choose the card or port that you want to be the working

card or port (the card(s) or port(s) that will be protected by the card or port selected in Protect Cards or

Protect Ports). Click the top arrow button to move each card/port to the Working Cards or Working Ports

list.

Step 5 Complete the remaining fields:

•Bidirectional switching—(optical cards only) click if you want both the transmit and the receive

channels to switch if a failure occurs to one.

•Revertive—if checked, the ONS 15454 reverts traffic to the working card or port after failure

conditions stay corrected for the amount of time entered in Reversion Time.

•Reversion time—if Revertive is checked, enter the amount of time following failure condition

correction that the ONS 15454 should switch back to the working card or port.

Step 6 Click OK.

Note To convert protection groups, see the “Converting DS-1 and DS-3 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N

Protection” section on page 7-30.

Card protection does not take effect until you enable the ports on all the cards in the protection group.

Because ports must be enabled before the cards carry traffic, you can enable the ports immediately after

provisioning card protection, or wait until you are ready to send traffic on the cards.

Caution Before running traffic on a card within a protection group, enable the ports of all protection group

cards.

Procedure: Enable Ports

Step 1 Log into the node in CTC and display the card you want to enable in card view.

3-11

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Creating Protection Groups

Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.

Step 3 Change the port status to In Service.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Procedure: Edit Protection Groups

Step 1 From the CTC node view, click the Provisioning > Protection tabs (Figure 3-7).

Figure 3-7 Editing protection groups

Step 2 In the Protection Groups section, choose a protection group.

Step 3 In the Selected Group section, edit the fields as appropriate. (For field descriptions, see the “Create

Protection Groups” procedure on page 3-9.)

Step 4 Click Apply.

Procedure: Delete Protection Groups

Step 1 From the CTC node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.

3-12

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing

Step 2 Verify that working traffic is not running on the protect card:

a. In the Protection Groups section, choose the group you want to delete.

b. In the Selected Group section, verify that the protect card is in standby mode. If it is in standby

mode, continue with Step 3. If it is active, complete Step c.

c. If the working card is in standby mode, manually switch traffic back to the working card. In the

Selected Group pane, click the working card, then click Manual. Verify that the protect card

switches to standby mode and the working card is active. If it does, continue with Step 3. If the

protect card is still active, do not continue. Begin troubleshooting procedures or call technical

support.

Step 3 From the node view, click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.

Step 4 In the Protection Groups section, click a protection group.

Step 5 Click Delete.

3.6 Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing

SONET timing parameters must be set for each ONS 15454. Each ONS 15454 independently accepts its

timing reference from one of three sources:

•The BITS (Building Integrated Timing Supply) pins on the ONS 15454 backplane

•An OC-N card installed in the ONS 15454. The card is connected to a node that receives timing

through a BITS source.

•The internal ST3 clock on the TCC+ card

You can set ONS 15454 timing to one of three modes: external, line, or mixed. If timing is coming from

the BITS pins, set ONS 15454 timing to external. If the timing comes from an OC-N card, set the timing

to line. In typical ONS 15454 networks:

•One node is set to external. The external node derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the

BITS backplane pins. The BITS source, in turn, derives its timing from a Primary Reference Source

(PRS) such as a Stratum 1 clock or GPS signal.

•The other nodes are set to line. The line nodes derive timing from the externally-timed node through

the OC-N trunk cards.

You can set three timing references for each ONS 15454. The first two references are typically two

BITS-level sources, or two line-level sources optically connected to a node with a BITS source. The third

reference is the internal clock provided on every ONS 15454 TCC+ card. This clock is a Stratum 3 (ST3).

If an ONS 15454 becomes isolated, timing is maintained at the ST3 level.

Caution Mixed timing allows you to select both external and line timing sources. However, Cisco does not

recommend its use because it can create timing loops. Use this mode with caution.

3-13

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing

3.6.1 Network Timing Example

Figure 3-8 shows an ONS 15454 network timing setup example. Node 1 is set to external timing. Two

timing references are set to BITS. These are Stratum 1 timing sources wired to the BITS input pins on

the Node 1 backplane. The third reference is set to internal clock. The BITS output pins on the backplane

of Node 3 are used to provide timing to outside equipment, such as a Digital Access Line Access

Multiplexer.

In the example, Slots 5 and 6 contain the trunk cards. Timing at Nodes 2, 3, and 4 is set to line, and the

timing references are set to the trunk cards based on distance from the BITS source. Reference 1 is set

to the trunk card closest to the BITS source. At Node 2, Reference 1is Slot 5 because it is connected to

Node 1. At Node 4, Reference 1 is set to Slot 6 because it is connected to Node 1. At Node 3, Reference

1 could be either trunk card because they are equal distance from Node 1.

Figure 3-8 An ONS 15454 timing example

Node 4

Timing Line

Ref 1: Slot 6

Ref 2: Slot 5

Ref 3: Internal (ST3)

Node 2

Timing Line

Ref 1: Slot 5

Ref 2: Slot 6

Ref 3: Internal (ST3)

Node 1

Timing External

Ref 1: BITS1

Ref 2: BITS2

Ref 3: Internal (ST3)

Node 3

Timing Line

Ref 1: Slot 5

Ref 2: Slot 6

Ref 3: Internal (ST3)

BITS1

out BITS2

out

BITS1

source BITS2

source

Third party

equipment

34726

Slot 5

Slot 6

3-14

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing

3.6.2 Synchronization Status Messaging

Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) is a SONET protocol that communicates information about

the quality of the timing source. SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SONET Line layer.

They enable SONET devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid

timing loops.

SSM messages are either Generation 1 or Generation 2. Generation 1 is the first and most widely

deployed SSM message set. Generation 2 is a newer version. If you enable SSM for the ONS 15454,

consult your timing reference documentation to determine which message set to use. Table 3-4 and

Table 3-5 show the Generation 1 and Generation 2 message sets.

Procedure: Set up ONS 15454 Timing

Step 1 From the CTC node view, click the Provisioning > Timing tabs (Figure 3-9).

Step 2 In the General Timing section, complete the following information:

Table 3-4 SSM Generation 1 Message Set

Message Quality Description

PRS 1 Primary reference source – Stratum 1

STU 2 Sync traceability unknown

ST2 3 Stratum 2

ST3 4 Stratum 3

SMC 5 SONET minimum clock

ST4 6 Stratum 4

DUS 7 Do not use for timing synchronization

RES Reserved; quality level set by user

Table 3-5 SSM Generation 2 Message Set

Message Quality Description

PRS 1 Primary reference source - Stratum 1

STU 2 Sync traceability unknown

ST2 3 Stratum 2

TNC 4 Transit node clock

ST3E 5 Stratum 3E

ST3 6 Stratum 3

SMC 7 SONET minimum clock

ST4 8 Stratum 4

DUS 9 Do not use for timing synchronization

RES Reserved; quality level set by user

3-15

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing

•Timing Mode—Set to External if the ONS 15454 derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the

backplane pins; set to Line if timing is derived from an OC-N card that is optically connected to the

timing node. A third option, Mixed, allows you to set external and line timing references. (Because

Mixed timing may cause timing loops, Cisco does not recommend its use. Use this mode with care.)

•SSM Message Set—Choose the message set level supported by your network. If a Generation 1 node

receives a Generation 2 message, the message will be mapped down to the next available Generation

1. For example, an ST3E message becomes an ST3.

•Quality of RES—If your timing source supports the reserved S1 byte, you set the timing quality here.

(Most timing sources do not use RES.) Qualities are displayed in descending quality order as ranges.

For example, ST3<RES<ST2 means the timing reference is higher than a Stratum 3 and lower than

a Stratum 2. See Table 3-4 and Table 3-5 for more information.

•Revertive—If checked, the ONS 15454 reverts to a primary reference source after the conditions that

caused it to switch to a secondary timing reference are corrected.

•Revertive Time—If Revertive is checked, indicate the amount of time the ONS 15454 will wait

before reverting back to its primary timing source.

Step 3 In the BITS Facilities section, complete the following information:

Note The BITS Facilities section sets the parameters for your BITS1 and BITS2 timing references.

Many of these settings are determined by the timing source manufacturer. If equipment is

timed through BITS Out, you can set timing parameters to meet the requirements of the

equipment.

•State—Set the BITS reference to IS (In Service) or OOS (Out of Service). For nodes set to Line

timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to OOS. For nodes using External

timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to IS.

•Coding—Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.

•Framing—Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either ESF (Extended Super Frame, or

SF (D4) (Super Frame). SSM is not available with Super Frame.

•Sync Messaging—Check to enable SSM.

•AIS Threshold—Sets the quality level where a node sends an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) from

the BITS 1 Out and BITS 2 Out backplane pins. When a node times at or below the AIS Threshold

quality, AIS is sent (used when SSM is disabled or frame is SF).

Step 4 Under Reference Lists, complete the following information:

Note Reference lists define up to three timing references for the node and up to six BITS Out

references. BITS Out references define the timing references used by equipment that can be

attached to the node’s BITS Out pins on the backplane. If you attach equipment to BITS Out

pins, you normally attach it to a node with Line mode because equipment near the External

timing reference can be directly wired to the reference.

•NE Reference—Allows you to define three timing references (Ref 1, Ref 2, Ref3). The node uses

Reference 1 unless a failure occurs to that reference, in which case, the node uses Reference 2. If

that fails, the node uses Reference 3, which is typically set to Internal Clock. This is the Stratum 3

clock provided on the TCC+. The options displayed depend on the Timing Mode setting.

–

Timing Mode set to External—options are BITS1, BITS2, and Internal Clock.

3-16

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing

–

Timing Mode set to Line—options are the node’s working optical cards and Internal Clock.

Select the cards/ports that are directly or indirectly connected to the node wired to the BITS

source, that is, the node’s trunk cards. Set Reference 1 to the trunk card that is closest to the

BITS source. For example, if Slot 5 is connected to the node wired to the BITS source, select

Slot 5 as Reference 1.

–

Timing Mode set to Mixed—both BITS and optical cards are available, allowing you to set a

mixture of external BITS and optical trunk cards as timing references.

•BITS 1 Out/BITS 2 Out—Define the timing references for equipment wired to the BITS Out

backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with Line nodes, so the options displayed are the

working optical cards. BITS 1 and BITS 2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities

are placed in service.

Figure 3-9 Setting Up ONS 15454 timing

Step 5 Click Apply.

Note Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide for timing-related

alarms.

3-17

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing

Procedure: Set Up Internal Timing

If no BITS source is available, you can set up internal timing by timing all nodes in the ring from the

internal clock of one node.

Caution Internal timing is Stratum 3 and not intended for permanent use. All ONS 15454s should be timed to

a Stratum 2 or better primary reference source.

Step 1 Log into the node that will serve as the timing source.

Step 2 In the CTC node view, click the Provisioning > Timing tabs.

Step 3 In the General Timing section, enter the following:

•Timing Mode—Set to External.

•SSM Message Set—Set to Generation 1.

•Quality of RES—Set to DUS.

•Revertive—Is not relevant for internal timing; the default setting (checked) is sufficient.

•Revertive Time—The default setting (5 minutes) is sufficient.

Step 4 In the BITS Facilities section, enter the following information:

•State—Set BITS 1 and BITS 2 to OOS (Out of Service).

•Coding—Is not relevant for internal timing. The default (B8ZS) is sufficient.

•Framing—Is not relevant for internal timing. The default (ESF) is sufficient.

•Sync Messaging—Checked

•AIS Threshold—Is not available.

Step 5 In the Reference Lists section, enter the following information

•NE Reference

–

Ref1—Set to Internal Clock.

–

Ref2—Set to Internal Clock.

–

Ref3—Set to Internal Clock.

•BITS 1 Out/BITS 2 Out—Set to None

Step 6 Click Apply.

Step 7 Log into a node that will be timed from the node set up in Steps 1–4.

Step 8 In the CTC node view, click the Provisioning > Timing tabs.

Step 9 In the General Timing section, enter the same information as entered in Step 3, except for the following:

•Timing Mode—Set to Line.

Reference Lists

•NE Reference

–

Ref1—Set to the OC-N trunk card with the closest connection to the node in Step 3.

–

Ref2—Set to the OC-N trunk card with the next closest connection to the node in Step 3.

–

Ref3—Set to Internal Clock.

Step 10 Click Apply.

3-18

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Viewing ONS 15454 Inventory

Step 11 Repeat Steps 7–10 at each node that will be timed by the node in Step 3.

3.7 Viewing ONS 15454 Inventory

The Inventory tab (Figure 3-10) displays information about cards installed in the ONS 15454 node

including part numbers, serial numbers, hardware revisions, and equipment types. The tab provides a

central location to obtain information and to determine applicability of ONS 15454 Product Change

Notices (PCNs) and Field Service Bulletins (FSBs). Using the ONS 15454 export feature, you can export

inventory data from ONS 15454 nodes into spreadsheet and database programs to consolidate ONS

15454 information for network inventory management and reporting.

Figure 3-10 Displaying ONS 15454 hardware information

The Inventory tab displays the following information about the cards installed in the ONS 15454:

•Location—The slot where the card is installed

•Eqpt Type—Equipment type the slot is provisioned for, for example, OC-12 or DS-1

•Actual Eqpt Type—The actual card that is installed in the slot, for example, OC12 IR 4 1310 or

DS1N-14

Tip You can pre-provision a slot before the card is installed by right-clicking the slot in node view and

selecting a card type.

3-19

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Viewing CTC Software Versions

•HW Part #—Card part number; this number is printed on the top of the card

•HW Rev—Card revision number

•Serial #—Card serial number; this number is unique to each card

•CLEI Code—Common Language Equipment Identifier code

•Firmware Rev—Revision number of the software used by the ASIC chip installed on the card

3.8 Viewing CTC Software Versions

CTC software is pre-loaded on the ONS 15454 TCC+ cards; therefore, you do not need to install

software on the TCC+. When a new CTC software version is released, you must follow procedures

provided by the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) to upgrade the ONS 15454 software.

When you upgrade CTC software, the TCC+ stores the older CTC version as the protect CTC version,

and the newer CTC release becomes the working version. You can view the software versions that are

installed on an ONS 15454 by selecting the Maintenance tab followed by the Software subtab. Select

these tabs in node view to display the software installed on one node. Select the tabs in network view to

display the software versions installed on all the network nodes.

3-20

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 3 Node Setup

Viewing CTC Software Versions

CHAPTER

4-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

IP Networking

This chapter explains how to set up Cisco ONS 15454s in internet protocol (IP) networks and includes:

•Scenarios showing Cisco ONS 15454s in common IP network configurations

•Procedures for creating static routes

•Procedures for using the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol

The chapter does not provide a comprehensive explanation of IP networking concepts and procedures.

Note To set up ONS 15454s within an IP network, you must work with a LAN administrator or other

individual at your site who has IP networking training and experience. To learn more about IP

networking, many outside resources are available. IP Routing Fundamentals, by Mark Sportack

(Cisco Press, 1999), provides a comprehensive introduction to routing concepts and protocols in IP

networks.

4.1 IP Networking Overview

ONS 15454s can be connected in many different ways within an IP environment:

•They can be connected to LANs through direct connections or a router.

•IP Subnetting can create ONS 15454 node groups, which allow you to provision non-DCC

connected nodes in a network.

•Different IP functions and protocols can be used to achieve specific network goals. For example,

Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) enables one LAN-connected ONS 15454 to serve as a

gateway for ONS 15454s that are not connected to the LAN.

•You can create static routes to enable connections among multiple CTC sessions with ONS 15454s

that reside on the same subnet but have different destination IP addresses.

•If ONS 15454s are connected to OSPF networks, ONS 15454 network information is automatically

communicated across multiple LANs and WANs.

4-2

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

4.2 ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

ONS 15454 IP addressing generally has seven common scenarios or configurations. Use the scenarios

as building blocks for more complex network configurations. Table 4-1 provides a general list of items

to check when setting up ONS 15454s in IP networks. Additional procedures for troubleshooting

Ethernet connections and IP networks are provided in Chapter 9, “Ethernet Operation.”

4.2.1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet

Scenario 1 shows a basic ONS 15454 LAN configuration (Figure 4-1). The ONS 15454s and CTC

computer reside on the same subnet. All ONS 15454s connect to LAN A, and all ONS 15454s have DCC

connections.

Note Instructions for creating DCC connections are provided in Chapter 5, “SONET Topologies” within

the BLSR, UPSR and linear ADM procedures.

Table 4-1 General ONS 15454 IP Networking Checklist

Item What to check

PC/workstation Each CTC computer must have the following:

•Netscape 4.61 or Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher

•JRE 1.3.0_C (PC) or JRE 1.3.0_01 (Solaris) for Releases 2.2.2 or higher;

JRE 1.2.2_05 or higher (Windows), or 1.2.2_03 or higher (Solaris) for

Releases 2.2.1 or earlier

•Modified Java policy file

See the “Computer Requirements” section on page 2-2 for additional

information.

Link integrity Link integrity exists between:

•CTC computer and network hub/switch

•ONS 15454s (backplane wire-wrap pins or RJ-45 port) and network

hub/switch

•Router ports and hub/switch ports

ONS 15454

hub/switch ports Set the hub or switch port that is connected to the ONS 15454 to 10 Mbps

half-duplex.

Ping Ping the node to test connections between computers and ONS 15454s.

IP addresses/subnet

masks ONS 15454 IP addresses and subnet masks are set up correctly.

Optical connectivity ONS 15454 optical trunk ports are in service; DCC is enabled on each trunk

port

4-3

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

Figure 4-1 Scenario 1: CTC and ONS 15454s on same subnet

4.2.2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s Connected to Router

In Scenario 2 the CTC computer resides on a subnet (192.168.1.0) and attaches to LAN A (Figure 4-2).

The ONS 15454s reside on a different subnet (192.168.2.0) and attach to LAN B. A router connects LAN

A to LAN B. The IP address of router interface A is set to LAN A (192.168.1.1), and the IP address of

router interface B is set to LAN B (192.168.2.1).

On the CTC computer, the default gateway is set to router interface A. If the LAN uses DHCP (Dynamic

Host Configuration Protocol), the default gateway and IP address are assigned automatically. In the

Figure 4-2 example, a DHCP server is not available.

CTC Workstation

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = N/A

Host Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.1.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.1.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.1.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

LAN A

SONET RING

33157

4-4

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

Figure 4-2 Scenario 2: CTC and ONS 15454s connected to router

4.2.3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway

Scenario 3 is similar to Scenario 1, but only one ONS 15454 (node #1) connects to the LAN (Figure 4-3).

Two ONS 15454s (#2 and #3) connect to ONS 15454 #1 through the SONET DCC. Because all three

ONS 15454s are on the same subnet, Proxy ARP enables ONS 15454 #1 to serve as a gateway for ONS

15454s #2 and #3.

CTC Workstation

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1

Host Routes = N/A

Router

IP Address of interface “A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1

IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Host Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.2.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = 192.168.2.1

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.2.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = 192.168.2.1

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.2.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = 192.168.2.1

Static Routes = N/A

LAN B

LAN A

Int "A"

Int "B"

SONET RING

33158

4-5

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

Figure 4-3 Scenario 3: Using Proxy ARP

ARP matches higher-level IP addresses to the physical addresses of the destination host. It uses a lookup

table (called ARP cache) to perform the translation. When the address is not found in the ARP cache, a

broadcast is sent out on the network with a special format called the ARP request. If one of the machines

on the network recognizes its own IP address in the request, it sends an ARP reply back to the requesting

host. The reply contains the physical hardware address of the receiving host. The requesting host stores

this address in its ARP cache so that all subsequent datagrams (packets) to this destination IP address

can be translated to a physical address.

Proxy ARP enables one LAN-connected ONS 15454 to respond to the ARP request for ONS 15454s not

connected to the LAN. (ONS 15454 Proxy ARP requires no user configuration.) For this to occur, the

DCC-connected ONS 15454s must reside on the same subnet. When a LAN device sends an ARP request

to an ONS 15454 that is not connected to the LAN, the gateway ONS 15454 returns its MAC address to

the LAN device. The LAN device then sends the datagram for the remote ONS 15454 to the MAC

address of the proxy ONS 15454. The proxy ONS 15454 uses its routing table to forward the datagram

to the non-LAN ONS 15454. The routing table is built using the OSPF IP routing protocol. (An OSPF

example is presented in Scenario 6.)

CTC Workstation

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = N/A

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.1.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.1.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.1.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

LAN A

SONET RING

33159

4-6

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

4.2.4 Scenario 4: Default Gateway on CTC Computer

Scenario 4 is similar to Scenario 3, but nodes #2 and #3 reside on different subnets, 192.168.2.0 and

192.168.3.0, respectively (Figure 4-4). Node #1 and the CTC computer are on subnet 192.168.1.0. The

network includes different subnets because Proxy ARP is not used. In order for the CTC computer to

communicate with ONS 15454s #2 and #3, ONS 15454 #1 is entered as the default gateway on the CTC

computer using the “Direct Connections to the ONS 15454” section on page 2-5.

Figure 4-4 Scenario 4: Default gateway on a CTC computer

4.2.5 Scenario 5: Using Static Routes to Connect to LANs

Static routes are used for two purposes:

•To connect ONS 15454s to CTC sessions on one subnet connected by a router to ONS 15454s

residing on another subnet. (These static routes are not needed if OSPF is enabled. Scenario 7 shows

an OSPF example.)

•To enable multiple CTC sessions among ONS 15454s residing on the same subnet. (Scenario 6

shows an example.)

In Figure 4-5, one CTC residing on subnet 192.168.1.0 connects to a router through interface A. (The

router is not set up with OSPF.) ONS 15454s residing on subnet 192.168.2.0 are connected through ONS

15454 #1 to the router through interface B. Proxy ARP enables ONS 15454 #1 as a gateway for ONS

15454s #2 and #3. To connect to CTC computers on LAN A, a static route is created on ONS 15454 #1.

CTC Workstation

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mask at CTC Workstation 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = 192.168.1.10

Host Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.2.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.1.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.3.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

LAN A

SONET RING

33160

4-7

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

Figure 4-5 Scenario 5: Static route with one CTC computer used as a destination

The destination and subnet mask entries control access to the ONS 15454s:

•If a single CTC computer is connected to router, enter the complete CTC “host route” IP address as

the destination with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255.

•If CTC computers on a subnet are connected to router, enter the destination subnet (in this example,

192.168.1.0) and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

•If all CTC computers are connected to router, enter a destination of 0.0.0.0 and a subnet mask of

0.0.0.0. Figure 4-6 shows an example.

The IP address of router interface B is entered as the next hop, and the cost (number of hops from source

to destination) is 2.

CTC Workstation

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1

Host Routes = N/A

Router

IP Address of interface ”A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1

IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.2.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.2.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = 192.168.2.1

Static Routes

Destination 192.168.1.100

Mask 255.255.255.255

Next Hop 192.168.2.1

Cost = 2

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.2.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

LAN B

LAN A

Int "A"

Int "B"

SONET RING

33162

4-8

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

Figure 4-6 Scenario 5: Static route with multiple LAN destinations

Procedure: Create a Static Route

Use the following steps to create a static route.

Step 1 Log into the ONS 15454 and select the Provisioning > Network tabs.

Step 2 Click the Static Routing tab. Click Create.

Step 3 In the Create Static Route dialog box enter the following:

•Destination—Enter the IP address of the computer running CTC. To limit access to one computer,

enter the full IP address (in the example, 192.168.1.100). To allow access to all computers on the

192.168.1.0 subnet, enter 192.168.1.0 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. You can enter a

destination of 0.0.0.0 to allow access to all CTC computers that connect to the router.

CTC Workstation

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1

Host Routes = N/A

Router #1

IP Address of interface ”A” to LAN “A” 192.168.1.1

IP Address of interface “B” to LAN “B” 192.168.2.1

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.2.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.2.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = 192.168.2.1

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.2.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

LAN B

LAN A

Int "A" Int "B"

SONET RING

55251

Static Routes

Destination 0.0.0.0

Mask 0.0.0.0

Next Hop 192.168.2.1

Cost = 2

LAN C

LAN D Router #3

Router #2

4-9

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

•Mask—Enter a subnet mask. If the destination is a host route (i.e., one CTC computer), enter a 32-bit

subnet mask (255.255.255.255). If the destination is a subnet, adjust the subnet mask accordingly,

for example, 255.255.255.0. If the destination is 0.0.0.0, enter a subnet mask of 0.0.0.0 to provide

access to all CTC computers.

•Next Hop—Enter the IP address of the router port (in this example, 192.168.90.1) or the node IP

address if the CTC computer is connected to the node directly.

•Cost—Enter the number of hops between the ONS 15454 and the computer. In this example, the cost

is two, one hop from the ONS 15454 to the router and a second hop from the router to the CTC

workstation.

Step 4 Click OK. Verify that the static route displays in the Static Route window, or ping the node.

4.2.6 Scenario 6: Static Route for Multiple CTCs

Scenario 6 shows a static route used when multiple CTC computers need to access ONS 15454s residing

on the same subnet (Figure 4-7). In this scenario, CTC #1 and #2 and all ONS 15454s are on the same

IP subnet; ONS 15454 #1 and CTC #1 are attached to LAN A. ONS 15454 #2 and CTC #2 are attached

to LAN B. Static routes are added to ONS 15454 #1 pointing to CTC #1, and to ONS 15454 #2 pointing

to CTC #2. The static route is entered from the node’s perspective.

4-10

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

Figure 4-7 Scenario 6: Static route for multiple CTCs

4.2.7 Scenario 7: Using OSPF

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is a link state Internet routing protocol. Link state protocols use a “hello

protocol” to monitor their links with adjacent routers and to test the status of their links to their

neighbors. Link state protocols advertise their directly-connected networks and their active links. Each

link state router captures the link state “advertisements” and puts them together to create a topology of

the entire network or area. From this database, the router calculates a routing table by constructing a

shortest path tree. Routes are continuously recalculated to capture ongoing topology changes.

ONS 15454s use the OSPF protocol in internal ONS 15454 networks for node discovery, circuit routing,

and node management. You can enable OSPF on the ONS 15454s so that the ONS 15454 topology is

sent to OSPF routers on a LAN. Advertising the ONS 15454 network topology to LAN routers eliminates

CTC Workstation #2

IP Address 192.168.1.200

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = N/A

CTC Workstation #1

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = N/A

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.1.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes

Destination 192.168.1.200

Mask 255.255.255.255

Next Hop 192.168.1.20

Cost = 1

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.1.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes

Destination 192.168.1.100

Mask 255.255.255.255

Next Hop 192.168.1.10

Cost = 1

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.1.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

LAN A

LAN B SONET RING

33163

4-11

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

the need to manually enter static routes for ONS 15454 subnetworks. Figure 4-7 shows the same network

enabled for OSPF. Figure 4-9 shows the same network without OSPF. Static routes must be manually

added to the router in order for CTC computers on LAN A to communicate with ONS 15454 #2 and #3

because these nodes reside on different subnets.

OSPF divides networks into smaller regions, called areas. An area is a collection of networked end

systems, routers, and transmission facilities organized by traffic patterns. Each OSPF area has a unique

ID number, known as the area ID, that can range from 0 to 4,294,967,295. Every OSPF network has one

backbone area called “area 0.” All other OSPF areas must connect to area 0.

When you enable ONS 15454 OSPF topology for advertising to an OSPF network, you must assign an

OSPF area ID to the ONS 15454 network. Coordinate the area ID number assignment with your LAN

administrator. In general, all DCC-connected ONS 15454s are assigned the same OSPF area ID.

Figure 4-8 Scenario 7: OSPF enabled

CTC Workstation

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1

Host Routes = N/A

Router

IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1

IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.3.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.2.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = 192.168.2.1

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.4.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

LAN B

LAN A

Int "A"

Int "B"

SONET RING

55250

4-12

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

Figure 4-9 Scenario 7: OSPF not enabled

Use the following procedure to enable OSPF on each ONS 15454 node that you want included in the

OSPF network topology. ONS 15454 OSPF settings must match the router OSPF settings, so you will

need to get the OSPF Area ID, Hello and Dead intervals, and authentication key (if OSPF authentication

is enabled) from the router to which the ONS 15454 network is connected before enabling OSPF.

Procedure: Set up OSPF

Step 1 Log into the ONS 15454 node.

Step 2 In node view, select the Provisioning > Network > OSPF tabs. The OSPF pane has several options

(Figure 4-10).

CTC Workstation

IP Address 192.168.1.100

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway = 192.168.1.1

Host Routes = N/A

Router

IP Address of interface “A” to LAN A 192.168.1.1

IP Address of interface “B” to LAN B 192.168.2.1

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Static Routes = Destination 192.168.3.20 Next Hop 192.168.2.10

Destination 192.168.4.30 Next Hop 192.168.2.10

ONS 15454 #2

IP Address 192.168.3.20

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

ONS 15454 #1

IP Address 192.168.2.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = 192.168.2.1

Static Routes

Destination = 192.168.1.100

Mask = 255.255.255.255

Next Hop = 192.168.2.1

Cost = 2

ONS 15454 #3

IP Address 192.168.4.30

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Router = N/A

Static Routes = N/A

LAN B

LAN A

Int "A"

Int "B"

SONET RING

33161

4-13

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

Figure 4-10 Enabling OSPF on the ONS 15454

Step 3 On the top left side, complete the following:

•DCC OSPF Area ID—Enter the number that identifies the ONS 15454s as a unique OSPF area. The

OSPF area number can be an integer between 0 and 4294967295, and it can take a form similar to

an IP address. The number must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.

•DCC Metric—This value is normally unchanged. It sets a “cost” for sending packets across the

DCC, which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be

higher than the LAN metric. The default DCC metric is 100.

Step 4 In the OSPF on LAN area, complete the following:

•OSPF active on LAN—When checked, enables ONS 15454 OSPF topology to be advertised to OSPF

routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15454s that directly connect to OSPF routers.

•Area ID for LAN Port—Enter the OSPF area ID for the router port where the ONS 15454 is

connected. (This number is different from the DCC Area ID.)

Step 5 In the Authentication area, complete the following:

•Type—If the router where the ONS 15454 is connected uses authentication, select Simple

Password. Otherwise, select No Authentication.

•Key—If authentication is enabled, enter the OSPF key (password).

Step 6 In the Priority and Intervals area, complete the following:

4-14

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

ONS 15454 IP Addressing Scenarios

The OSPF priority and intervals default to values most commonly used by OSPF routers. In the Priority

and Invervals area, verify that these values match those used by the OSPF router where the ONS 15454

is connected.

•Router Priority—Used to select the designated router for a subnet.

•Hello Interval (sec)—Sets the number of seconds between OSPF “hello” packet advertisements sent

by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the default.

•Dead Interval—Sets the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router’s packets are not

visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the default.

•Transit Delay (sec)—Indicates the service speed. One second is the default.

•Retransmit Interval (sec)—Sets the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is

the default.

•LAN Metric—Sets a “cost” for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be lower

than the DCC metric. Ten is the default.

Step 7 In the OSPF Area Range Table area, complete the following:

Area range tables consolidate the information that is propagated outside an OSPF Area border. One ONS

15454 in the ONS 15454 OSPF area is connected to the OSPF router. An area range table on this node

points the router to the other nodes that reside within the ONS 15454 OSPF area.

To create an area range table:

a. Under OSPF Area Range Table, click Create.

b. In the Create Area Range dialog box, enter the following:

–

Range Address—Enter the area IP address for the ONS 15454s that reside within the OSPF area.

For example, if the ONS 15454 OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses 10.10.20.100,

10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be 10.10.0.0.

–

Range Area ID—Enter the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15454s. This is either the ID in the DCC

OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.

–

Mask Length—Enter the subnet mask length. In the Range Address example, this is 16.

–

Advertise—Check if you want to advertise the OSPF range table.

c. Click OK.

Step 8 All OSPF areas must be connected to Area 0. If the ONS 15454 OSPF area is not physically connected

to Area 0, use the following steps to create a virtual link table that will provide the disconnected area

with a logical path to Area 0:

a. Under OSPF Virtual Link Table, click Create.

b. In the Create Virtual Link dialog box, complete the following fields (OSPF settings must match

OSPF settings for the ONS 15454 OSPF area):

Neighbor—Enter the router ID of the Area 0 router.

Transit Delay (sec)—The service speed. One second is the default.

Hello Int (sec)—The number of seconds between OSPF “hello” packet advertisements sent by OSPF

routers. Ten seconds is the default.

Auth Type—If the router where the ONS 15454 is connected uses authentication, select Simple

Password. Otherwise, set it to No Authentication.

Retransmit Int (sec)—Sets the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the

default.

4-15

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

Viewing the ONS 15454 Routing Table

Dead Int (sec)—Sets the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router’s packets are not

visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the default.

c. Click OK.

Step 9 After entering ONS 15454 OSPF area data, click Apply.

If you changed the Area ID, the TCC+ cards will reset, one at a time.

4.3 Viewing the ONS 15454 Routing Table

ONS 15454 routing information is displayed on the Maintenance > Routing Table tabs (Figure 4-11).

The routing table provides the following information:

•Destination—Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.

•Mask—Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.

•Gateway—Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.

•Usage—Shows the number of times this route has been used.

•Interface—Shows the ONS 15454 interface used to access the destination. Values are:

–

cpm0—the ONS 15454 Ethernet interface, that is, the RJ-45 jack on the TCC+ and the LAN 1

pins on the backplane.

–

pdcc0—an SDCC interface, that is, an OC-N trunk card identified as the SDCC termination.

–

lo0—a loopback interface

4-16

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

Viewing the ONS 15454 Routing Table

Figure 4-11 Viewing the ONS 15454 routing table

Table 4-2 shows sample routing entries for an ONS 15454.

Entry #1 shows the following:

•Destination (0.0.0.0) is the default route entry. All undefined destination network or host entries on

this routing table will be mapped to the default route entry.

•Mask (0.0.0.0) is always 0 for the default route.

•Gateway (172.20.214.1) is the default gateway address. All outbound traffic that cannot be found in

this routing table or is not on the node’s local subnet will be sent to this gateway.

•Interface (cpm0) indicates that the ONS 15454 Ethernet interface is used to reach the gateway.

Entry #2 shows the following:

•Destination (172.20.214.0) is the destination network IP address.

Table 4-2 Sample Routing Table Entries

Entry Destination Mask Gateway Interface

1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.20.214.1 cpm0

2 172.20.214.0 255.255.255.0 172.20.214.92 cpm0

3 172.20.214.92 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 lo0

4 172.20.214.93 255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0 pdcc0

5 172.20.214.94 255.255.255.255 172.20.214.93 pdcc0

4-17

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

Viewing the ONS 15454 Routing Table

•Mask (255.255.255.0) is a 24-bit mask, meaning all addresses within the 172.20.214.0 subnet can

be a destination.

•Gateway (172.20.214.92) is the gateway address. All outbound traffic belonging to this network is

sent to this gateway.

•Interface (cpm0) indicates that the ONS 15454 Ethernet interface is used to reach the gateway.

Entry #3 shows the following:

•Destination (172.20.214.92) is the destination host IP address.

•Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32 bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.92 address is a destination.

•Gateway (127.0.0.1) is a loopback address. The host directs network traffic to itself using this

address.

•Interface (lo0) indicates that the local loopback interface is used to reach the gateway.

Entry #4 shows the following:

•Destination (172.20.214.93) is the destination host IP address.

•Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32 bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.93 address is a destination.

•Gateway (0.0.0.0) means the destination host is directly attached to the node.

•Interface (pdcc0) indicates that a SONET SDCC interface is used to reach the destination host.

Entry #5 shows a DCC-connected node that is accessible through a node that is not directly connected:

•Destination (172.20.214.94) is the destination host IP address.

•Mask (255.255.255.255) is a 32-bit mask, meaning only the 172.20.214.94 address is a destination.

•Gateway (172.20.214.93) indicates that the destination host is accessed through a node with IP

address 172.20.214.93.

•Interface (pdcc0) indicates that a SONET SDCC interface is used to reach the gateway.

4-18

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 4 IP Networking

Viewing the ONS 15454 Routing Table

CHAPTER

5-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

SONET Topologies

This chapter explains how to set up the Cisco ONS 15454 in different SONET topologies, including:

•Two-fiber and four-fiber bidirectional line switched rings (BLSRs)

•Unidirectional path switched rings (UPSRs)

•Subtending rings

•Linear add/drop multiplexers (ADMs)

•Path-protected mesh networks (PPMNs)

5.1 Before You Begin

To avoid errors during network configuration, Cisco recommends that you draw the complete ONS

15454 SONET topology on paper (or electronically) before you begin the physical implementation. A

sketch ensures that you have adequate slots, cards, and fibers to complete the topology.

Table 5-1 shows the SONET rings that can be created on each ONS 15454 node.

5.2 Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

The ONS 15454 can support two concurrent BLSRs in one of the following configurations:

•Two, two-fiber BLSRs, or

•One two-fiber and one four-fiber BLSR.

Each BLSR can have up to 16 ONS 15454s. Because the working and protect bandwidths must be equal,

you can create only OC-12 (two-fiber only), OC-48, or OC-192 BLSRs.

Table 5-1 ONS 15454 Rings

Ring Type Maximum per node

All rings 5

BLSRs 2

2-Fiber BLSR 2

4-Fiber BLSR 1

UPSR 4

5-2

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Note Two-fiber BLSRs can support up to 24 ONS 15454s, but switch times are slightly longer for rings

containing more than 16 nodes. BLSRs with 16 or fewer nodes will meet the GR-1230 switch time

requirement. Four-fiber BLSRs can only support 16 nodes.

5.2.1 Two-Fiber BLSRs

In two-fiber BLSRs, each fiber is divided into working and protect bandwidths. For example, in an

OC-48 BLSR (Figure 5-1), STSs 1 – 24 carry the working traffic, and STSs 25 – 48 are reserved for

protection. Working traffic (STSs 1 – 24) travels in one direction on one fiber and in the opposite

direction on the second fiber. The Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) circuit routing routines calculate

the “shortest path” for circuits based on many factors, including requirements set by the circuit

provisioner, traffic patterns, and distance. For example, in Figure 5-1, circuits going from Node 0 to

Node 1 typically will travel on Fiber 1, unless that fiber is full, in which case circuits will be routed on

Fiber 2 through Node 3 and Node 2. Traffic from Node 0 to Node 2 (or Node 1 to Node 3), may be routed

on either fiber, depending on circuit provisioning requirements and traffic loads.

Figure 5-1 A four-node, two-fiber BLSR

Node 0

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3 OC-48 Ring

= Fiber 1

= Fiber 2

61938

STSs 1-24 (working)

STSs 25-48 (protect)

STSs 1-24 (working)

STSs 25-48 (protect)

5-3

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

The SONET K1 and K2 bytes carry the information that governs BLSR protection switches. Each BLSR

node monitors the K bytes to determine when to switch the SONET signal to an alternate physical path.

The K bytes communicate failure conditions and actions taken between nodes in the ring.

If a break occurs on one fiber, working traffic targeted for a node beyond the break switches to the

protect bandwidth on the second fiber. The traffic travels in reverse direction on the protect bandwidth

until it reaches its destination node. At that point, traffic is switched back to the working bandwidth.

Figure 5-2 shows a sample traffic pattern on a four-node, two-fiber BLSR.

Figure 5-2 Four-node, two-fiber BLSR sample traffic pattern

Figure 5-3 shows how traffic is rerouted following a line break between Node 0 and Node 3.

•All circuits originating on Node 0 carried to Node 2 on Fiber 2 are switched to the protect bandwidth

of Fiber 1. For example, a circuit carried on STS-1 on Fiber 2 is switched to STS-25 on Fiber 1. A

circuit carried on STS-2 on Fiber 2 is switched to STS-26 on Fiber 1. Fiber 1 carries the circuit to

Node 3 (the original routing destination). Node 3 switches the circuit back to STS-1 on Fiber 2

where it is routed to Node 2 on STS-1.

•Circuits originating on Node 2 that were normally carried to Node 0 on Fiber 1 are switched to the

protect bandwidth of Fiber 2 at Node 3. For example, a circuit carried on STS-2 on Fiber 1 is

switched to STS-26 on Fiber 2. Fiber 2 carries the circuit to Node 0 where the circuit is switched

back to STS-2 on Fiber 1 and then dropped to its destination.

Node 0

Node 1

Traffic flow

Node 2

Node 3 OC-48 Ring

Fiber 1

Fiber 2

61956

5-4

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-3 Four-node, two-fiber BLSR traffic pattern following line break

5.2.2 Four-Fiber BLSRs

Four-fiber BLSRs double the bandwidth of two-fiber BLSRs. Because they allow span switching as well

as ring switching, four-fiber BLSRs increase the reliability and flexibility of traffic protection. Two

fibers are allocated for working traffic and two fibers for protection, as shown in Figure 5-4. To

implement a four-fiber BLSR, you must install four OC-48 or OC-48AS cards, or four OC-192 cards at

each BLSR node.

Node 0

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3 OC-48 Ring

61957

Traffic flow

Fiber 1

Fiber 2

5-5

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-4 A four-node, four-fiber BLSR

Four-fiber BLSRs provide span and ring switching:

•Span switching (Figure 5-5) occurs when a working span fails. Traffic switches to the protect fibers

between the nodes (Node 0 and Node 1 in the Figure 5-5 example) and then returns to the working

fibers. Multiple span switches can occur at the same time.

•Ring switching (Figure 5-6) occurs when a span switch cannot recover traffic, such as when both

the working and protect fibers fail on the same span. In a ring switch, traffic is routed to the protect

fibers throughout the full ring.

Node 0

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3

Span 1

Span 2Span 3

Span 4

Span 8

Span 7Span 6

Span 5

OC-48 Ring

= Working fibers

= Protect fibers

61932

5-6

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-5 A four-fiber BLSR span switch

Figure 5-6 A four-fiber BLSR ring switch

Node 0

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3

Span 1

Span 2Span 3

Span 4

Span 8

Span 7Span 6

Span 5

OC-48 Ring

= Working fibers

= Protect fibers

61959

Node 0

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3

Span 1

Span 2Span 3

Span 4

Span 8

Span 7Span 6

Span 5

OC-48 Ring

= Working fibers

= Protect fibers

61960

5-7

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

5.2.3 BLSR Bandwidth

BLSR nodes can terminate traffic that is fed from either side of the ring. Therefore, BLSRs are suited

for distributed node-to-node traffic applications such as interoffice networks and access networks.

BLSRs allow bandwidth to be reused around the ring and can carry more traffic than a network with

traffic flowing through one central hub. BLSRs can also carry more traffic than a UPSR operating at the

same OC-N rate. Table 5-2 shows the bidirectional bandwidth capacities of two-fiber BLSRs. The

capacity is the OC-N rate divided by two, multiplied by the number of nodes in the ring minus the

number of pass-through STS-1 circuits. Table 5-3 shows the bidirectional bandwidth capacities of

four-fiber BLSRs.

Figure 5-7 shows an example of BLSR bandwidth reuse. The same STS carries three different traffic sets

simultaneously on different spans on the ring: one set from Node 3 to Node 1, one from Node 1 to Node

2, and another from Node 2 to Node 3.

Table 5-2 Two-Fiber BLSR Capacity

OC Rate Working Bandwidth Protection Bandwidth Ring Capacity

OC-12 STS1-6 STS 7-12 6 x N1 - PT2

1. N equals the number of ONS 15454 nodes configured as BLSR nodes.

2. PT equals the number of STS-1 circuits passed through ONS 15454 nodes in the ring (capacity can vary

depending on the traffic pattern).

OC-48 STS 1-24 STS 25-48 24 x N - PT

OC-192 STS 1-96 STS 97-192 96 x N - PT

Table 5-3 Four-Fiber BLSR Capacity

OC Rate Working Bandwidth Protection Bandwidth Ring Capacity

OC-48 STS 1-48 (Fiber 1) STS 1-48 (Fiber 2) 48 x N - PT

OC-192 STS 1-192 (Fiber 1) STS 1-192 (Fiber 2) 192 x N - PT

5-8

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-7 BLSR bandwidth reuse

5.2.4 Sample BLSR Application

Figure 5-8 shows a sample two-fiber BLSR implementation. A regional long-distance network connects

to other carriers at Node 0. Traffic is delivered to the service provider’s major hubs.

•Carrier 1 delivers six DS-3s over two OC-3 spans to Node 0. Carrier 2 provides twelve DS-3s

directly. Node 0 receives the signals and delivers them around the ring to the appropriate node.

•The ring also brings 14 DS-1s back from each remote site to Node 0. Intermediate nodes serve these

shorter regional connections.

•The ONS 15454 OC-3 card supports a total of four OC-3 ports so that two additional OC-3 spans

can be added at little cost.

STS#1 STS#1

Node 0

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3

32131

= Node 3 – Node 1 traffic

= Node 1 – Node 2 traffic

= Node 2 – Node 3 traffic

5-9

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-8 A five-node BLSR

Figure 5-9 shows the shelf assembly layout for Node 0, which has one free slot. Figure 5-10 shows the

shelf assembly layout for the remaining sites in the ring. In this BLSR configuration, an additional eight

DS-3s at Node IDs 1 and 3 can be activated. An additional four DS-3s can be added at Node ID 4, and

ten DS-3s can be added at Node ID 2. Each site has free slots for future traffic needs.

Node 0

56 local

DS-1s 4 DS-1s 14 DS-1s

14 DS-1s

8 DS-3s

4 DS-1s

2 DS-1s

Carrier 1

2 OC-3s

Node 1

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4

= Fiber 1

= Fiber 2

32138

Carrier 2

12 DS-3s

5-10

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-9 Shelf assembly layout for Node 0 in Figure 5-8

Figure 5-10 Shelf assembly layout for Nodes 1 – 4 in Figure 5-8

5.2.5 Setting Up BLSRs

To set up a BLSR on the ONS 15454, you perform five basic procedures:

•Install the BLSR trunk cards. See the “Install the BLSR Trunk Cards” procedure on page 5-11.

DS1-14

DS1N-14

DS1-14

OC48

TCC

XCVT

AIC (Optional)

XCVT

TCC

OC48

OC3

DS3-12

Free Slot

32640

DS1-14

TCC

XCVT

AIC (Optional)

XCVT

TCC

Free Slot

OC48

DS3-12

Free Slot

OC48

Free Slot

32140

5-11

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

•Create the BLSR DCC terminations. See the “Create the BLSR DCC Terminations” procedure on

page 5-13.

•Enable the BLSR ports. See the “Enable the BLSR Ports” procedure on page 5-13.

•Set up BLSR timing. See the “Set up ONS 15454 Timing” procedure on page 3-14.

•Provision the BLSR. See the “Provision the BLSR” procedure on page 5-14.

Procedure: Install the BLSR Trunk Cards

Step 1 Install the OC-12, OC-48, OC-48AS, or OC-192 cards that will serve as the BLSR trunk cards. You can

install the OC-12 and OC-48AS cards in any slot, but you can install the OC-48 and OC-192 cards only

in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13.

Step 2 Allow the cards to boot.

Step 3 Attach the fiber to the east and west BLSR ports at each node.

Plan your fiber connections and use the same plan for all BLSR nodes. For example, make the east port

the farthest slot to the right and the west port the farthest left. Plug fiber connected to an east port at one

node into the west port on an adjacent node. Figure 5-11 shows fiber connections for a two-fiber BLSR

with trunk cards in Slot 5 (west) and Slot 12 (east).

Note Always plug the transmit (Tx) connector of an OC-N card at one node into the receive (Rx)

connector of an OC-N card at the adjacent node. Cards will display an SF LED if Tx and Rx

connections are mismatched.

For four-fiber BLSRs, use the same east - west connection pattern for the working and protect fibers. Do

not mix working and protect card connections. The BLSR will not function if working and protect cards

are interconnected. Figure 5-12 shows fiber connections for a four-fiber BLSR. Slot 5 (west) and Slot

12 (east) carry the working traffic. Slot 6 (west) and Slot 13 (east) carry the protect traffic.

5-12

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-11 Connecting fiber to a four-node, two-fiber BLSR

Figure 5-12 Connecting fiber to a four-node, four-fiber BLSR

55297

Node 1

West East

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 3

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 2

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 4

Slot 5

Slot 12

61958

Node 1

West East

Slot

5Slot

Node 3

Slot

5Slot

Node 2

Slot

5Slot

Node 4

Slot

5Slot

Slot

6Slot

Slot

6Slot

Slot

6Slot

Slot

6Slot

Working fibers

Protect fibers

5-13

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Procedure: Create the BLSR DCC Terminations

Step 1 Log into the first node that will be in the BLSR.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

Step 3 In the SDCC Terminations section, click Create.

Step 4 On the Create SDCC Terminations dialog, press Ctrl and click the two slots/ports that will serve as the

BLSR ports at the node. For example, Slot 5 (OC-48)/Port 1 and Slot 12 (OC-48)/ Port 1. For four-fiber

BLSRs, provision the working cards, but not the protect cards, as DCC terminations.

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 The slots/ports appear in the SDCC Terminations list.

Step 7 Complete Steps 2 – 5 at each node that will be in the BLSR.

Note The ONS 15454 uses the SONET Section layer DCC (SDCC) for data communications. It

does not use the Line DCCs; therefore, the Line DCCs are available to tunnel DCCs from

third-party equipment across ONS 15454 networks. For more detail, see the “Creating DCC

Tunnels” section on page 6-21.

Procedure: Enable the BLSR Ports

Step 1 Log into one of the nodes that will be in the BLSR.

Step 2 Double-click one of the OC-N cards that you configured as a DCC termination.

Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.

Step 4 Click Status (Figure 5-13) and choose In Service.

5-14

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-13 Enabling an optical port

Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 – 4 for the other optical card configured as a DCC termination.

Step 6 (Four-fiber BLSR only) Repeat Steps 2 – 4 for each protect card.

Step 7 Repeat Steps 2 – 5 at each node that will be in the BLSR.

After configuring the SONET DCC, set the timing for the node. For procedures, see the “Setting Up ONS

15454 Timing” section on page 3-12. After you configure the timing you can provision the BLSR.

Procedure: Provision the BLSR

Step 1 Log into one BLSR node.

Step 2 Select the Provisioning > Ring tabs.

Step 3 Click Create.

Step 4 On the Create BLSR dialog box (Figure 5-14), set the BLSR properties:

•Ring Type—select the BLSR ring type, either two-fiber or four-fiber.

•Ring ID—Assign a ring ID (a number between 0 and 9999). Nodes in the same BLSR must have the

same Ring ID.

•Node ID—Assign a Node ID. The Node ID identifies the node to the BLSR. Nodes in the same

BLSR must have unique Node IDs.

•Reversion time—Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original

working path. The default is 5 minutes. All nodes in a BLSR ring should have the same reversion

time setting, particularly if “never” (i.e., non-revertive) is selected.

•West Port—Assign the west BLSR port for the node from the pull-down menu. (In Figure 5-11, this

is Slot 5.)

5-15

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

•East Port—Assign the east BLSR port for the node from the pull-down menu. (In Figure 5-11, this

is Slot 12.)

The east and west ports must match the fiber connections and DCC terminations set up in the “Install

the BLSR Trunk Cards” procedure on page 5-11 and the “Create the BLSR DCC Terminations”

procedure on page 5-13.

For four-fiber BLSRs, complete the following:

•Span Reversion—Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original

working path following a span reversion. The default is 5 minutes. Span reversions can be set to

Never. If you set a reversion time, the times must be the same for both ends of the span. That is, if

Node A’s west fiber is connected to Node B’s east port, the Node A west span reversion time must

be the same as the Node B east span reversion time. To avoid reversion time mismatches, Cisco

recommends that you use the same span reversion time throughout the ring.

•West Protect—Assign the west BLSR port that will connect to the west protect fiber from the

pull-down menu. (In Figure 5-12, this is Slot 6.)

•East Protect—Assign the east BLSR port that will connect to the east protect fiber from the

pull-down menu. (In Figure 5-12, this is Slot 13.)

Figure 5-14 Setting BLSR properties

Step 5 Click OK.

Note Some or all of the following alarms display during BLSR setup: E-W MISMATCH, RING

MISMATCH, APSCIMP, APSDFLTK, BLSROSYNC. The alarms will clear after you

configure all the nodes in the BLSR.

Step 6 Complete Steps 2 – 5 at each node that you are adding to the BLSR.

Step 7 After you configure the last BLSR node, wait for the BLSR Ring Map Change dialog box to display (this

can take 10 – 30 seconds).

Note The dialog box will not display if SDCC Termination alarms (e.g., EOC) or BLSR alarms

(such as E-W MISMATCH and RING MISMATCH) are present. If an SDCC alarm is

present, review the DCC provisioning at each node; use the “Create the BLSR DCC

Terminations” procedure on page 5-13. If BLSR alarms have not cleared, repeat Steps 1 – 6

at each node, making sure each node is provisioned correctly. You can also following alarm

troubleshooting procedures provided in the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and

Maintenance Guide.

Step 8 On the BLSR Ring Map Change dialog, click Yes.

5-16

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Step 9 On the BLSR Ring Map dialog box, verify that the ring map contains all the nodes you provisioned in

the expected order. If so, click Accept. If the nodes do not appear, or are not in the expected order, repeat

Steps 1 – 8, making sure no errors are made.

Step 10 Switch to network view and verify the following:

•A green span line appears between all BLSR nodes

•All E-W MISMATCH, RING MISMATCH, APSCIMP, DFLTK, and BLSROSYNC alarms are

cleared.

Step 11 Test the BLSR using testing procedures normal for your site. Here are a few steps you can use:

a. Run test traffic through the ring.

b. Log into a node, click the Maintenance > Ring tabs, and choose MANUAL RING from the East

Switch list. Click Apply.

c. In network view, click the Conditions tab and click Retrieve. You should see a Ring Switch West

event, and the far-end node that responded to this request will report a Ring Switch East event.

d. Verify that traffic switches normally.

e. Choose Clear from the East Switch list and click Apply.

f. Repeat Steps a – d for the West Switch.

g. Disconnect the fibers at one node and verify that traffic switches normally.

5.2.6 Upgrading From Two-Fiber to Four-Fiber BLSRs

Two-fiber OC-48 or OC-192 BLSRs can be upgraded to four-fiber BLSRs. To upgrade, you install two

OC-48 or OC-192 cards at each two-fiber BLSR node, then log into CTC and upgrade each node from

two-fiber to four-fiber. The fibers that were divided into working and protect bandwidths for the

two-fiber BLSR are now fully allocated for working BLSR traffic.

Procedure: Upgrade From a Two-Fiber to a Four-Fiber BLSR

Step 1 Log into one of the two-fiber BLSR nodes. In network view:

a. Verify that all spans between BLSR nodes on the network map are green.

b. Click the Alarms tab. Verify that no critical or major alarms are present, nor any facility alarms,

such as LOS, LOF, AIS-L, SF, and SD. In a BLSR, these facility conditions may be reported as

minor alarms.

c. Click the Conditions tab, then click Retrieve Conditions. Verify that no ring switches are active.

If trouble is indicated, for example, a major alarm exists, resolve the problem before proceeding to

Step 2. See the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide for additional information.

Step 2 Install two OC-48 or OC-192 cards at each BLSR node. You must install the same OC-N card rate as the

two fiber.

Step 3 Enable the ports for each new OC-N card:

a. Display the card in card view.

b. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.

5-17

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

c. Click Status and choose In Service.

d. Click Apply.

e. Repeat Steps a – d for each new OC-N card at each BLSR node.

Step 4 Connect the fiber to the new cards. Use the same east – west connection scheme that was used to create

the two-fiber connections. Figure 5-12 shows an example.

Step 5 Test the new fiber connections using procedures standard for your site. For example, pull a Tx fiber for

a protect card and verify that an LOS alarm displays for the appropriate Rx card. Do this fiber test for

every span in the BLSR protect ring.

Step 6 Perform a span lockout at each BLSR node:

a. At one of the BLSR nodes, switch to node view. Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs.

b. Under West Switch for the two-fiber BLSR you will convert, select LOCKOUT SPAN. Click

Apply

c. Under East Switch, select LOCKOUT SPAN. Click Apply.

d. Repeat Steps a – c at each node in the two-fiber BLSR.

Step 7 Upgrade each node from two-fiber to four-fiber BLSR:

a. At one of the BLSR nodes, switch to node view. Click the Provisioning > Ring tabs.

b. Select the two-fiber BLSR. Click Upgrade.

c. On the Upgrade BLSR dialog box, complete the following:

–

Span Reversion—Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original

working path following a span reversion. The default is 5 minutes.

–

West Protect—Assign the east BLSR port that will connect to the east protect fiber from the

pull-down menu. (In Figure 5-12, this is Slot 6.)

–

East Protect—Assign the east BLSR port that will connect to the east protect fiber from the

pull-down menu. (In Figure 5-12, this is Slot 13.)

d. Click Ok.

e. Complete Steps a – d at each two-fiber BLSR node.

Step 8 Clear the span lockout:

a. Display a BLSR node in node view. Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs.

b. Under West Switch, select CLEAR. Click Apply

c. Under East Switch, select CLEAR. Click Apply.

d. Repeat Steps a – c at each node in the new four-fiber BLSR.

e. Switch to network view. Verify that no critical or major alarms are present, nor any facility alarms,

such as LOS, LOF, AIS-L, SF, and SD. If an alarm is present, resolve the problem using procedures

in the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide.

Step 9 Test the four-fiber BLSR using procedures in Step 11 in the “Provision the BLSR” procedure on

page 5-14.

5-18

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

5.2.7 Adding and Removing BLSR Nodes

This section explains how to add and remove BLSR nodes. To add or remove a node, you force a

protection switch to route traffic away from the span where you will add or remove the node. Figure 5-15

shows a three-node BLSR before the new node is added. To add Node 3, you would:

•Force a protection switch on the Node 1 (Slot 5, West) and Node 4 (Slot 12, East) span. The

protection switch forces traffic away from the fibers that you will remove and reconnect to the added

node.

•Remove fibers from Node 1/Slot 5 and Node 4/Slot 12, then, using additional fibers, connect Node

1 and Node 4 to Node 3.

•Remove the protection switch to route traffic through the added node.

Note You can only add one node at a time to an ONS 15454 BLSR.

Figure 5-15 A three-node BLSR before adding a new node

Procedure: Add a BLSR Node

Perform these steps on-site and not from a remote location.

Step 1 Draw a diagram, similar to Figure 5-15, for the BLSR installation where you will add the node. In the

diagram, identify the nodes, cards (slots) and spans (east or west) that will connect to the new node. This

information is essential to complete this procedure without error. For example, in Figure 5-15, you

would circle Slot 5 (west) on Node 1, and Slot 12 (east) on Node 4.

68118

West East

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 3

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 2Node 1

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 4

Slot 5

Slot 12

5-19

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Step 2 Log into CTC and display the BLSR nodes in network view. Verify the following:

•All BLSR spans on the network map are green.

•On the Alarms tab, no critical or major alarms are present, nor any facility alarms, such as LOS,

LOF, AIS-L, SF, and SD. In a BLSR, these facility conditions may be reported as minor alarms.

•On the Conditions tab, no ring switches are active.

If trouble is indicated, for example, a major alarm exists, resolve the problem before proceeding.

Step 3 Install the OC-N cards in the ONS 15454 that you will add to the BLSR; use the “Install the BLSR Trunk

Cards” procedure on page 5-11. Ensure fiber cables are available to connect to the cards. Run test traffic

through the node to ensure the cards are functioning properly.

Step 4 Log into the new node and complete the BLSR setup.

•Provision the SONET DCC using the “Create the BLSR DCC Terminations” procedure on

page 5-13.

•Configure the BLSR timing using the “Set up ONS 15454 Timing” procedure on page 3-14.

•Enable the BLSR ports using the “Enable the BLSR Ports” procedure on page 5-13.

•Provision the BLSR using the “Provision the BLSR” procedure on page 5-14

Step 5 Log into the node that will connect to the new node through its east port (Node 4 in the Figure 5-15

example).

Step 6 Switch protection on the east port:

a. Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs.

b. From the East Switch list, choose FORCE RING. Click Apply.

Performing a FORCE switch generates a manual switch request on an equipment (MANUAL-REQ)

alarm. This is normal.

Caution Traffic is unprotected during a protection switch.

Step 7 Log into the node that will connect to the new node through its west port (Node 1 in the Figure 5-15

example).

Step 8 Switch protection on the west port:

a. Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs.

b. From the West Switch list, choose FORCE RING. Click Apply.

Step 9 Following the diagram that you created in Step 1, remove the fiber connections from the two nodes that

will connect directly to the new node.

a. Remove the east fiber from the node that will connect to the west port of the new node. In the

Figure 5-15 example, this is Node 4/Slot 12.

b. Remove the west fiber from the node that will connect to the east port of the new node. In the

Figure 5-15 example, this is Node 1/Slot 5.

Step 10 Replace the removed fibers with fibers that are connected to the new node. Connect the west port to the

east port and the east port to the west port. Figure 5-16 shows the BLSR in the Figure 5-15 example after

the node is connected.

5-20

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-16 A BLSR with a newly-added fourth node

Step 11 Log out of CTC and then log back into any node in the BLSR.

Step 12 In node view, select the Provisioning > Ring tabs and click Ring Map.

Step 13 On the BLSR Map Ring Change dialog box, click Yes.

Step 14 On the BLSR Ring Map dialog box, verify that the new node is added. If it is, click Accept. If it does

not appear, log into the new node. Verify that the BLSR is provisioned correctly according to the

“Provision the BLSR” procedure on page 5-14, then repeat Steps 12 – 13. If the node still does not

appear, repeat the steps in the procedure making sure that no errors were made.

Step 15 From the Go To menu, select Network View. Click the Circuits tab. Wait until all the circuits are

discovered. The circuits that pass through the new node will be shown as incomplete.

Step 16 In network view, right-click the new node and select Update Circuits With The New Node from the

shortcut menu. Verify that the number of updated circuits displayed in the dialog box is correct.

Step 17 Select the Circuits tab and verify that no incomplete circuits are present.

Step 18 Clear the protection switch for the node that is using its east port to connect to the new node, and for the

node that is using its west port to connect to the new node.

a. To clear the protection switch from the east port, display the Maintenance > Ring tabs. From the

East Switch list choose CLEAR. Click Apply.

b. To clear the protection switch from the west port, choose CLEAR from the West Switch list. Click

Apply.

68119

Node 1 Fiber

connected to

Slot 12 (East)

Node 4 Fiber

connected to

Slot 5 (West)

West East

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 3

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 2Node 1

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 4

Slot 5

Slot 12

5-21

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Procedure: Remove a BLSR Node

Caution The following procedure minimizes traffic outages during node deletions, but traffic will be lost

when you delete and recreate circuits that passed through the deleted node.

Step 1 Before you start this procedure, make sure you know the following:

•Which node is connected through its east port to the node that will be deleted. For example if you

are deleting Node 1 in Figure 5-16, Node 3 is the node connected through its east port to Node 1.

•Which node is connected through its west port to the node that will be deleted. In Figure 5-16, Node

2 is connected to Node 1 through its west port.

Step 2 Log into a node on the same BLSR as the node you will remove. (Do not log into the node that you will

remove.)

Step 3 Display the BLSR nodes in network view and verify the following:

•All BLSR spans on the network map are green.

•No critical or major alarms (LOF, LOS, ASP, ASL) are displayed on the Alarms tab.

•On the Conditions tab, no ring switches are active.

If trouble is indicated, for example, a critical or major alarm exists, resolve the problem before

proceeding.

Step 4 Display the node that you will remove in node view.

Step 5 Delete all the circuits that originate or terminate in that node. (If a circuit has multiple drops, delete only

the drops that terminate on the node you want to delete.)

a. Click the Circuits tab. The circuits that use this node are displayed.

b. Select circuits that originate or terminate on the node. Click Delete.

c. Click Yes when prompted.

d. If a multidrop circuit has drops at the node that will be removed, select the circuit, click Edit, and

remove the drops.

Step 6 Complete this step if circuits that were created using Cisco Transport Controller Release 2.x. pass

through the node that will be deleted (i.e., circuits are displayed on the Circuits tab).

a. On the Circuits tab of the node that will be deleted, select a circuit and click Edit.

b. On the Edit Circuits window, check Show Detailed Map.

c. Verify that the circuits enter and exit the node on the same STS. For example, if a circuit enters on

s5/p1/S1 (Slot 5, Port 1, STS1), verify that it exits on STS1. If a circuit enters/exits on different

STSs, write down the name of the circuit. You will delete and recreate these circuits in Step e.

d. From the View menu select Go to Network View, then select the Circuits tab.

e. Delete and recreate each circuit recorded in Step c. To delete the circuit, select the circuit on the

Circuits window and click the Delete button. To create the circuit, go to the “Create an

Automatically Routed Circuit” procedure on page 6-2.

f. Repeat Steps a – e for each circuit displayed on the Circuits tab.

5-22

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Step 7 Use information recorded in Step 1 to switch traffic away from the ports of neighboring nodes that will

be disconnected when the node is removed:

Caution Traffic is unprotected during the protection switch.

a. Open the neighboring node that is connected through its east port to the removed node.

b. Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs.

c. From the East Switch list, choose FORCE RING. Click Apply.

d. Open the node that is connected through its west port to the removed node.

e. Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs.

f. From the West Switch list, choose FORCE RING. Click Apply.

Step 8 Remove all fiber connections between the node being removed and the two neighboring nodes.

Step 9 Reconnect the two neighboring nodes directly, west port to east port.

Step 10 Close CTC, then log into a node on the reduced ring.

Step 11 Wait for the BLSR Map Ring Change dialog box to display. (If the dialog box does not display after

10 – 15 seconds, select the Provisioning > Ring tabs and click Ring Map.) When the dialog box

displays, click Yes.

Step 12 On the BLSR Ring Map dialog box, click Accept.

Step 13 Clear the protection switches on the neighboring nodes:

a. Open the node with the protection switch on its east port.

b. Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs and choose CLEAR from the East Switch list. Click Apply.

c. Open the node with the protection switch on its west port.

d. Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs and choose CLEAR from the West Switch list. Click Apply.

Step 14 If a BITS clock is not used at each node, check that the synchronization is set to one of the eastbound or

westbound BLSR spans on the adjacent nodes. If the removed node was the BITS timing source, use a

new node as the BITS source or select internal synchronization at one node where all other nodes will

derive their timing. (For information about ONS 15454 timing, see the “Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing”

section on page 3-12.)

5.2.8 Moving BLSR Trunk Cards

Caution Call the Technical Assistance Center (1-877-323-7368) before performing this procedure to ensure

that circuit and provisioning data is preserved.

Caution To change BLSR trunk cards, you will drop one node at a time from the current BLSR. This

procedure is service affecting during the time needed to complete the steps below. This applies to all

BLSR nodes where cards will change slots. Review all the steps before you proceed.

5-23

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-17 shows a four node OC-48 BLSR using trunk cards in Slots 6 and 12 at all four nodes. Trunk

cards will be moved at Node 4 from Slots 6 and 12 to Slots 5 and 6. To do this Node 4 is temporarily

removed from the active BLSR while the trunk cards are switched.

Figure 5-17 A four-node BLSR before a trunk card switch

Figure 5-18 shows the BLSR after the cards are switched.

67550

Node 1

Node 4

Node 3

Node 2

Slot 12 (East)

Slot 6 (West)

Slot 12 (East)

Slot 6 (West)

Slot 12 (East)

Slot 6 (West)

Slot 12 (East)

Slot 6 (West)

5-24

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

Figure 5-18 A four-node BLSR after the trunk cards are switched at one node

Procedure: Move a BLSR Trunk Card

Use the following steps to move one BLSR trunk card to a different slot. Use this procedure for each

card you want to move. Although the procedure is for OC-48 BLSR trunk cards, you can use the same

procedure for OC-12, OC-48AS, and OC-192 cards.

Note The ONS 15454 nodes must have CTC Release 2.0 or later and cannot have active alarms for the

OC-48 or OC-12 cards or the BLSR configuration.

Step 1 Log into CTC and display the BLSR nodes in network view. Verify the following:

•All BLSR spans on the network map are green.

•On the Alarms tab, no critical or major alarms are present, nor any facility alarms, such as LOS,

LOF, AIS-L, SF, and SD. In a BLSR, these facility conditions may be reported as minor alarms.

•On the Conditions tab, no ring switches are active.

If trouble is indicated, for example, a critical or major alarm exists, resolve the problem before

proceeding. Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide for alarm

troubleshooting procedures.

Step 2 Switch traffic away from the node where the trunk card will be switched:

a. Log into the node that is connected through its east port to the node where the trunk card will be

moved. (In the Figure 5-17 example, this is Node 1.) Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs.

b. From the East Switch list, choose FORCE RING. Click Apply.

67551

Node 1

Node 4

Node 3

Node 2

Slot 12 (East)

Slot 6 (West)

Slot 6 (East)

Slot 5 (West)

Slot 12 (East)

Slot 6 (West)

Slot 12 (East)

Slot 6 (West)

Unchanged fiber route

Changed fiber route

5-25

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Bidirectional Line Switched Rings

When you perform a manual switch, a manual switch request equipment alarm (MANUAL-REA) is

generated. This is normal.

Caution Traffic is unprotected during a protection switch.

c. Log into the node that is connected through its west port to the node where the trunk card will be

moved. (In the Figure 5-17 example, this is Node 3.) Click the Maintenance > Ring tabs.

d. From the West Switch list, choose FORCE RING. Click Apply.

Step 3 Log into the node where the trunk card you will move is installed.

Step 4 Click the Circuits tab (Figure 5-19). Write down the circuit information or, from the File menu, select

Print or Export to print or export the information; you will need it to restore the circuits later. See the

“Printing and Exporting CTC Data” section on page 2-26 for more information.

Figure 5-19 Deleting circuits from a BLSR trunk card

Step 5 Delete the circuits on the card you are removing:

a. Highlight the circuit(s). To select multiple circuits, press the Shift or Ctrl key.

b. Click Delete.

c. On the Delete Circuit dialog box, click Yes.

Step 6 Delete the SONET DCC termination on the card you are removing:

a. Click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

b. From the SDCC Terminations list, click the SONET DCC you need to delete and click Delete.

5-26

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

Step 7 Disable the ring on the current node:

a. Click the Provisioning > Ring tabs.

b. Highlight the ring and click Delete.

c. On the confirmation message, confirm that this is the ring you want to delete. If so, click Yes.

Step 8 If an OC-N card is a timing source, select the Provisioning > Timing tabs and set timing to Internal.

Step 9 Place the ports on the card out of service:

a. Double-click the card.

b. On the Provisioning > Line tabs in the Status section, choose Out of Service for each port.

Step 10 Physically remove the card.

Step 11 Insert the card into its new slot and wait for the card to boot.

Step 12 To delete the card from its former slot, right-click the card in node view and select Delete from the list

of options.

Step 13 Place the port(s) back in service:

a. To open the card, double-click or right-click the card and select Open.

b. Click the Provisioning tab.

c. From Status choose In Service.

d. Click Apply.

Step 14 Follow the steps described in the “Setting Up BLSRs” section on page 5-10 to reenable the ring using

the same cards (in their new slots) and ports for east and west. Use the same BLSR Ring ID and Node

ID that was used before the trunk card was moved.

Step 15 Recreate the circuits that were deleted. See the “Create an Automatically Routed Circuit” procedure on

page 6-2 for instructions.

Step 16 If you use line timing and the card you are moving is a timing reference, reenable the timing parameters

on the card. See the “Set up ONS 15454 Timing” procedure on page 3-14 for instructions.

5.3 Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

UPSRs provide duplicate fiber paths around the ring. Working traffic flows in one direction and

protection traffic flows in the opposite direction. If a problem occurs in the working traffic path, the

receiving node switches to the path coming from the opposite direction.

CTC automates ring configuration. UPSR traffic is defined within the ONS 15454 on a circuit-by-circuit

basis. If a path-protected circuit is not defined within a 1+1 or BLSR line protection scheme and path

protection is available and specified, CTC uses UPSR as the default.

Figure 5-20 shows a basic UPSR configuration. If Node ID 0 sends a signal to Node ID 2, the working

signal travels on the working traffic path through Node ID 1. The same signal is also sent on the protect

traffic path through Node ID 3. If a fiber break occurs (Figure 5-21), Node ID 2 switches its active

receiver to the protect signal coming through Node ID 3.

Because each traffic path is transported around the entire ring, UPSRs are best suited for networks where

traffic concentrates at one or two locations and is not widely distributed. UPSR capacity is equal to its

bit rate. Services can originate and terminate on the same UPSR, or they can be passed to an adjacent

access or interoffice ring for transport to the service-terminating location.

5-27

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

Figure 5-20 A basic four-node UPSR

Figure 5-21 A UPSR with a fiber break

ONS 15454

Node ID 0

ONS 15454

Node ID 1

ONS 15454

Node ID 2

ONS 15454

Node ID 3

32148

= Fiber 1

= Fiber 2

Span 1

Span 2

Span 3

Span 4

Span 8

Span 7Span 6

Span 5

Fiber

break

Source

Destination

32639

ONS 15454

Node ID 0

ONS 15454

Node ID 1

ONS 15454

Node ID 2

ONS 15454

Node ID 3

= Fiber 1

= Fiber 2

5-28

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

5.3.1 Example UPSR Application

Figure 5-22 shows a common UPSR application. OC-3 optics provide remote switch connectivity to a

host TR-303 switch. In the example, each remote switch requires eight DS-1s to return to the host switch.

Figure 5-23 and Figure 5-24 show the shelf layout for each site.

Figure 5-22 An OC-3 UPSR

Node ID 0 has four DS1-14 cards to provide 56 active DS-1 ports. The other sites only require two

DS1-14 cards to handle the eight DS-1s to and from the remote switch. You can use the other half of

each ONS 15454 shelf assembly to provide support for a second or third ring to other existing or planned

remote sites.

In this sample OC-3 UPSR, Node ID 0 contains four DS1-14 cards and two OC3 IR 4 1310 cards. Six

free slots also exist in this setup and can be provisioned with cards or left empty. Figure 5-23 shows the

shelf setup for these cards.

8 DS-1s

TR-303

Switch

32149

ONS 15454

Node ID 0

ONS 15454

Node ID 1

ONS 15454

Node ID 2

ONS 15454

Node ID 3

= Fiber 1

= Fiber 2

5-29

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

Figure 5-23 Layout of Node ID 0 in the OC-3 UPSR example (Figure 5-15)

In the Figure 5-22 on page 5-28 example, Nodes IDs 1 - 3 each contain two DS1-14 cards and two OC3

4 IR 1310 cards. Eight free slots exist. They can be provisioned with other cards or left empty.

Figure 5-24 shows the shelf assembly setup for this configuration sample.

Figure 5-24 Layout of Node IDs 1 – 3 in the OC-3 UPSR example (Figure 5-15)

DS1-14

TCC

XCVT

AIC (Optional)

XCVT

TCC

Free Slot

OC3 IR 4 1310

Free Slot

OC3 IR 4 1310

Free Slot

DS1-14

32142

DS1-14

TCC

XCVT

AIC (Optional)

XCVT

TCC

Free Slot

OC3 IR 4 1310

Free Slot

OC3 IR 4 1310

Free Slot

32143

5-30

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

5.3.2 Setting Up a UPSR

To set up a UPSR, you perform four basic procedures:

•Install the UPSR trunk cards. Use the “Install the UPSR Trunk Cards” procedure on page 5-30

•Create the DCC terminations. Use the “Configure the UPSR DCC Terminations” procedure on

page 5-31.

•Configure the timing. Use the “Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing” section on page 3-12.

•Enable the ports. Use the “Enable the UPSR Ports” procedure on page 5-32.

After you enable the ports, you set up the UPSR circuits. UPSR signal thresholds—the levels that

determine when the UPSR path is switched—are set at the circuit level. To create UPSR circuits, see the

“Circuits Overview” section on page 6-1.

Procedure: Install the UPSR Trunk Cards

Step 1 Install the OC-N cards that will serve as the UPSR trunk cards. You can install the OC-3, OC-12, and

OC-48AS cards in any slot, but the OC-48 and OC-192 cards can only be installed in Slots 5, 6, 12, or 13.

Step 2 Allow the cards to boot.

Step 3 Attach the fiber to the east and west UPSR ports at each node.

To avoid errors, make the east port the farthest slot to the right and the west port the farthest left. Fiber

connected to an east port at one node must plug into the west port on an adjacent node. Figure 5-25

shows fiber connections for a four-node UPSR with trunk cards in Slot 5 (west) and Slot 12 (east).

Always plug the fiber plugged into the transmit (Tx) connector of an OC-N card at one node into the

receive (Rx) connector of an OC-N card at the adjacent node. The card will display an SF LED if Tx and

Rx fibers are mismatched.

5-31

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

Figure 5-25 Connecting fiber to a four-node UPSR

Procedure: Configure the UPSR DCC Terminations

Step 1 Log into the first node that will be in the UPSR.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

Step 3 In the SDCC Terminations section, click Create.

Step 4 On the Create SDCC Terminations dialog box, press Control and click the two slots/ports that will serve

as the UPSR ports at the node. For example, Slot 6 (OC-48)/Port 1 and Slot 12 (OC-48)/Port 1.

Note The ONS 15454 uses the SONET Section layer DCC (SDCC) for data communications. It

does not use the Line DCCs. Line DCCs can be used to tunnel DCCs from third party

equipment across ONS 15454 networks. For procedures, see the “Creating DCC Tunnels”

section on page 6-21.

Step 5 Click OK.

The slots/ports display in the SDCC Terminations section.

Step 6 Complete Steps 2 – 5 at each node that will be in the UPSR.

After configuring the SONET DCC, set the timing for the node. For procedures, see the “Setting Up ONS

15454 Timing” section on page 3-12. After configuring the timing, enable the UPSR ports as described

in the following procedure.

68120

Node 1

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 3

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 2

Slot 5

Slot 12

Node 4

Slot 5

Slot 12

5-32

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

Procedure: Enable the UPSR Ports

Step 1 Log into the first UPSR node.

Step 2 Double-click one of the cards that you configured as an SDCC termination.

Step 3 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.

Step 4 Under Status, select In Service for each port that you want enabled.

Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 - 4 for the second card.

Step 6 Click Apply.

You configured a UPSR for one node. Use the same procedures to configure the additional nodes. To

create path-protected mesh networks, see the “Path-Protected Mesh Networks” section on page 5-50. To

create circuits, see the “Circuits Overview” section on page 6-1.

5.3.3 Adding and Removing UPSR Nodes

This section explains how to add and remove nodes in an ONS 15454 UPSR configuration. To add or

remove a node, you switch traffic on the affected spans to route traffic away from the area of the ring

where service will be performed. Use the span selector switch option to switch traffic from a UPSR span

at different protection levels. The span selector switch option is useful when you need to reroute traffic

from a UPSR span temporarily to add or drop nodes, perform maintenance, or perform other operations.

Procedure: Switch UPSR Traffic

Step 1 Display the network view.

Step 2 Right-click the span that will be cut to add or delete a node and select Circuits from the shortcut menu

(Figure 5-26).

5-33

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

Figure 5-26 Using the span shortcut menu to display circuits

Step 3 On the Circuits on Span dialog box (Figure 5-27), select the protection from the Switch all UPSR

circuits away menu:

•CLEAR removes a previously-set switch command.

•MANUAL switches the span if the new span is error free.

•FORCE forces the span to switch, regardless of whether the new span is error free.

•LOCKOUT locks out or prevents switching to a highlighted span. (LOCKOUT is only available

when Revertive traffic is enabled.)

Caution FORCE and LOCKOUT commands override normal protective switching mechanisms. Applying

these commands incorrectly can cause traffic outages.

5-34

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

Figure 5-27 Switching UPSR circuits

Step 4 Click Apply.

Step 5 When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK to confirm the protection switching. The column

under Switch State changes to your chosen level of protection.

Step 6 Click Close after Switch State changes.

Procedure: Add a UPSR Node

Note You can add only one node at a time. Perform these steps onsite and not from a remote location.

Step 1 Log into CTC and display the UPSR nodes in network view. Verify the following:

•All UPSR spans on the network map are green.

•No critical or major alarms (LOF, LOS, ASP, ASL) are displayed on the Alarms tab.

•On the Conditions tab, no UPSR switches are active.

•At each physical UPSR node, all fibers are securely connected to the appropriate ports.

If trouble is indicated, for example, a critical or major alarm exists, resolve the problem before

proceeding.

Step 2 At the node that will be added to the UPSR:

•Verify that the OC-N cards are installed and fiber is available to connect to the other nodes.

•Run test traffic through the cards that will connect to the UPSR.

•Use the “Setting Up a UPSR” section on page 5-30 to provision the new node.

Step 3 Log into a node that will directly connect to the new node.

Step 4 Use the “Switch UPSR Traffic” procedure on page 5-32 to initiate a FORCE switch to switch traffic

away from the span that will connect to the new node.

Caution Traffic is not protected during a protection switch.

Step 5 Two nodes will connect directly to the new node; remove their fiber connections:

a. Remove the east fiber connection from the node that will connect to the west port of the new node.

5-35

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

b. Remove the west fiber connection from the node that will connect to the east port of the new node.

Step 6 Replace the removed fiber connections with connections from the new node.

Note Perform this step on site at the new node.

Step 7 Log out of CTC and then log back in.

Step 8 Display the network view. The new node should appear in the network map. Wait for a few minutes to

allow all the nodes to appear.

Step 9 Click the Circuits tab and wait for all the circuits to appear, including spans. The affected circuit will

display as “incomplete.”

Step 10 In the network view, right-click the new node and select Update Circuits With New Node from the list

of options. Wait for the confirmation dialog box to appear. Verify that the number of updated circuits

displayed in the dialog box is correct.

Step 11 Select the Circuits tab and verify that no incomplete circuits are displayed. If incomplete circuits are

displayed, repeat Step 9.

Step 12 Use the “Switch UPSR Traffic” procedure on page 5-32 to clear the protection switch.

Procedure: Remove a UPSR Node

Caution The following procedure is designed to minimize traffic outages while nodes are removed, but traffic

will be lost when you delete and recreate circuits that passed through the removed node.

Step 1 Log into CTC and display the UPSR nodes in network view. Verify the following:

•All UPSR spans on the network map are green.

•No critical or major alarms (LOF, LOS, ASP, ASL) are displayed on the Alarms tab.

•On the Conditions tab, no UPSR switches are active.

•At each physical UPSR node, all fibers are securely connected to the appropriate ports.

If trouble is indicated, for example, a critical or major alarm exists, resolve the problem before

proceeding.

Step 2 Use the “Switch UPSR Traffic” procedure on page 5-32 to initiate a FORCE switch to switch traffic

away from the node you are removing. Initiate a FORCE switch on all spans connected to the node you

are removing.

Caution Traffic is not protected during a forced protection switch.

Step 3 In the node that will be removed, delete circuits that originate or terminate in that node. (If a circuit has

multiple drops, delete only the drops that terminate on the node you are deleting.)

a. Click the Circuits tab.

b. Select the circuit(s) to delete. To select multiple circuits, press the Shift or Ctrl key.

c. Click Delete.

5-36

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Subtending Rings

d. Click Yes when prompted.

Step 4 From the node that will be deleted, remove the east and west span fibers. At this point, the node should

no longer be a part of the ring.

Step 5 Reconnect the span fibers of the nodes remaining in the ring.

Step 6 Open the Alarms tab of each newly-connected node and verify that the span cards are free of alarms.

Resolve any alarms before proceeding.

Step 7 One circuit at a time, delete and recreate each circuit that passed through the deleted node on different

STSs.

Note If the removed node was the BITS timing source, select a new node as the BITS source or

select another node as the master timing node.

Step 8 Use the “Switch UPSR Traffic” procedure on page 5-32 to clear the protection switch.

5.4 Subtending Rings

The ONS 15454 supports up to ten SONET DCCs. Therefore, one ONS 15454 node can terminate and

groom any one of the following ring combinations:

•5 UPSRs, or

•4 UPSRs and 1 BLSR, or

•3 UPSRs and 2 BLSRs

Subtending rings from an ONS 15454 reduces the number of nodes and cards required and reduces

external shelf-to-shelf cabling. Figure 5-28 shows an ONS 15454 with multiple subtending rings.

5-37

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Subtending Rings

Figure 5-28 An ONS 15454 with multiple subtending rings

Figure 5-29 shows a UPSR subtending from a BLSR. In this example, Node 3 is the only node serving

both the BLSR and UPSR. OC-N cards in Slots 5 and 12 serve the BLSR, and OC-N cards in Slots 6 and

13 serve the UPSR.

Figure 5-29 A UPSR subtending from a BLSR

UPSR

or BLSR

UPSR

BLSR

55302

Node 3

Node 1

Node 2

BLSR

UPSR

Node 4

55303

Slot 13

East

Slot 12

East

Slot 12

East

Slot 12

East

Slot 13

East

Slot 6

West

Slot 5

West

Slot 5

West

Slot 5

West

Slot 6

West

5-38

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Subtending Rings

Procedure: Subtend a UPSR from a BLSR

This procedure requires an established BLSR and one BLSR node with OC-N cards and fibers to carry

the UPSR. The procedure also assumes you can set up a UPSR. (For UPSR setup procedures, see the

“Setting Up a UPSR” section on page 5-30.)

Step 1 In the node that will subtend the UPSR (Node 3 in Figure 5-29), install the OC-N cards that will serve

as the UPSR trunk cards (Node 3, Slots 6 and 13).

Step 2 Attach fibers from these cards to the UPSR trunk cards on the UPSR nodes. In Figure 5-29, Slot 6 Node

3 connects to Slot 13/Node 5, and Slot 13 connects to Slot 6/Node 6.

Step 3 From the node view, click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

Step 4 Click Create.

Step 5 In the Create SDCC Terminations dialog box, click the slot and port that will carry the UPSR.

Step 6 Click OK.

The selected slots/ports are displayed in the SDCC Terminations section.

Step 7 Put the ports that you will use for the UPSR in service:

a. In the node view, double-click UPSR trunk card.

b. Select the Provisioning > Line tabs. Under Status, choose In Service.

c. Click Apply.

d. Repeat steps a - c for the second UPSR trunk card.

Step 8 Follow Steps 1 – 7 for the other nodes you will use for the UPSR.

Step 9 Go to the network view to view the subtending ring.

Procedure: Subtend a BLSR from a UPSR

This procedure requires an established UPSR and one UPSR node with OC-N cards and fibers to connect

to the BLSR. The procedure also assumes you can set up a BLSR. (For BLSR setup procedures, see the

“Setting Up BLSRs” section on page 5-10.)

Step 1 In the node that will subtend the BLSR (Node 3 in the Figure 5-29 example), install the OC-N cards that

will serve as the BLSR trunk cards (in Figure 5-29, Node 3, Slots 6 and 13).

Step 2 Attach fibers from these cards to the BLSR trunk cards on the BLSR nodes. In Figure 5-29, Slot 6/Node

3 connects to Slot 13/Node 5, and Slot 13 connects to Slot 6/Node 6.

Step 3 From the node view, click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

Step 4 Click Create.

Step 5 In the Create SDCC Terminations dialog box, click the slot and port that will carry the BLSR.

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 The selected slots/ports are displayed under SDCC Terminations.

Step 8 Put the ports that you will use for the BLSR in service:

a. In the node view, double-click the BLSR trunk card.

b. Select the Provisioning > Line tabs. Under Status, choose In Service.

5-39

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Subtending Rings

c. Click Apply.

d. Repeat steps a – c for the second BLSR trunk card.

Step 9 Use the “Provision the BLSR” procedure on page 5-14 to configure the BLSR.

Step 10 Follow Steps 1– 8 for the other nodes that will be in the BLSR.

Step 11 Go to the network view to see the subtending ring.

The ONS 15454 can support two BLSRs on the same node. This capability allows you to deploy an ONS

15454 in applications requiring SONET DCSs (digital cross connect systems) or multiple SONET

ADMs (add/drop multiplexers).

Figure 5-30 shows two BLSRs shared by one ONS 15454. Ring 1 runs on Nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4. Ring 2

runs on Nodes 4, 5, 6, and 7. Two BLSR rings, Ring 1 and Ring 2, are provisioned on Node 4. Ring 1

uses cards in Slots 5 and 12, and Ring 2 uses cards in Slots 6 and 13.

Note Although different node IDs are used for the two BLSRs shown in Figure 5-30, nodes in different

BLSRs can use the same node ID.

Figure 5-30 A BLSR subtending from a BLSR

After subtending two BLSRs, you can route circuits from nodes in one ring to nodes in the second ring.

For example in Figure 5-30, you can route a circuit from Node 1 to Node 7. The circuit would normally

travel from Node 1 to Node 4 to Node 7. If fiber breaks occur, for example between Nodes 1 and 4 and

Nodes 4 and 7, traffic is rerouted around each ring: in this example, Nodes 2 and 3 in Ring 1 and Nodes

5 and 6 in Ring 2.

55298

Node 5

Slot 6

West East

Slot 13

Node 7

Slot 13

East Slot 6

West

Slot 6

West

Slot 13

East

Node 6

Node 1

Slot 5

West

Slot 5

West

Slot 12

East

Slot 12

East

Node 3

Slot 12

East Slot 5

West

Node 2

Slot 5

West

Slot 12

East

Slot 13

East

Slot 6

West

Node 4

BLSR

Ring 1 BLSR

Ring 2

5-40

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Subtending Rings

Procedure: Subtend a BLSR from a BLSR

This procedure requires an established BLSR and one BLSR node with OC-N cards and fibers to carry

the BLSR. The procedure also assumes you know how to set up a BLSR. For BLSR setup procedures,

see the “Setting Up BLSRs” section on page 5-10.

Step 1 In the node that will subtend the BLSR (Node 4 in Figure 5-30), install the OC-N cards that will serve

as the BLSR trunk cards (Node 4, Slots 6 and 13).

Step 2 Attach fibers from these cards to the BLSR trunk cards on the BLSR nodes. In Figure 5-30, Node 4/Slot

6 connects to Node 7/Slot 13, and Slot 13 connects to Node 5/Slot 6.

Step 3 From the node view, click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

Step 4 Click Create.

Step 5 In the Create SDCC Terminations dialog box, click the slot and port that will carry the BLSR.

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 The selected slots/ports are displayed in the SDCC Terminations section.

Step 8 Put the ports that you will use for the BLSR in service:

a. In the node view, double-click the BLSR trunk card.

b. Select the Provisioning > Line tabs. Under Status, choose In Service.

c. Click Apply.

d. Repeat steps a – c for the second BLSR trunk card.

Step 9 To configure the BLSR, use the “Provision the BLSR” procedure on page 5-14. The subtending BLSR

must have a ring ID that differs from the ring ID of the first BLSR.

Step 10 Follow Steps 1 – 8 for the other nodes that will be in the subtending BLSR.

Step 11 Display the network view to see the subtending ring.

Figure 5-31 shows an example of two subtending BLSRs.

Figure 5-31 Viewing subtending BLSRs on the network map

Figure 5-32 shows the Ring subtab for Node 5, which is the node that carries the two rings.

5-41

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

Figure 5-32 Configuring two BLSRs on the same node

5.5 Linear ADM Configurations

You can configure ONS 15454s as a line of add/drop multiplexers (ADMs) by configuring one set of

OC-N cards as the working path and a second set as the protect path. Unlike rings, linear (point-to-point)

ADMs require that the OC-N cards at each node be in 1+1 protection to ensure that a break to the

working line is automatically routed to the protect line.

Figure 5-33 shows three ONS 15454s in a linear ADM configuration. Working traffic flows from Slot

6/Node 1 to Slot 6/Node 2, and from Slot 12/Node 2 to Slot 12/Node 3. You create the protect path by

placing Slot 6 in 1+1 protection with Slot 5 at Nodes 1 and 2, and Slot 12 in 1+1 protection with Slot 13

at Nodes 2 and 3.

Figure 5-33 A linear (point-to-point) ADM configuration

Node 1

Node 3

Node 2

Slot 6 to Slot 6

Slot 5 to Slot 5

Slot 12 to Slot 12

Slot 13 to Slot 13

Working Path

Protect Path

34284

5-42

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

Procedure: Create a Linear ADM

Complete the following steps for each node that will be included in the linear ADM.

Step 1 Complete the general setup information for the node. For procedures, see the “Setting Up Basic Node

Information” section on page 3-2.

Step 2 Set up the network information for the node. For procedures, see the “Setting Up Network Information”

section on page 3-2.

Step 3 Set up 1+1 protection for the OC-N cards in the ADM. In Figure 5-33, Slots 6 and 12 are the working

ports and Slots 5 and 13 are the protect ports. In this example, you would set up one protection group

for Node 1 (Slots 5 and 6), two for Node 2 (Slots 5 and 6, and 12 and 13) and one for Node 3 (Slots 12

and 13). To create protection groups, see the “Creating Protection Groups” section on page 3-9.

Step 4 For OC-N ports connecting ONS 15454s, set the SONET DCC terminations:

a. Log into a linear ADM node and select the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

b. In the SDCC Terminations section, click Create.

c. On the Create SDCC Terminations dialog box, select the working port. Click OK.

Note Terminating nodes (Nodes 1 and 3 in Figure 5-33) will have one SDCC, and intermediate

nodes (Node 2 in Figure 5-33) will have two SDCCs.

Step 5 Use the “Setting Up ONS 15454 Timing” section on page 3-12 to set up the node timing. If a node is

using line timing, set the working OC-N card as the timing source.

Step 6 Place the OC-N ports in service:

a. Open an OC-N card that is connected to the linear ADM.

b. On the Provisioning > Line tabs under Status, select In Service.

c. Click Apply.

Repeat Step 6 for each OC-N card connected to the linear ADM.

Procedure: Convert a Linear ADM to UPSR

The following procedures describe how to convert a three-node linear ADM to a UPSR. You will need

a SONET test set to monitor traffic while you perform these procedures.

Caution This procedure is service affecting.

Caution Always wear an authorized electrostatic discharge wrist band when removing or installing ONS

15454 cards.

Step 1 Start CTC and log into one of the nodes that you want to convert from linear to ring.

Step 2 Click the Maintenance > Protection tabs (Figure 5-34).

5-43

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

Figure 5-34 Verifying working slots in a protection group

Step 3 Under Protection Groups, select the 1+1 protection group (that is, the group supporting the 1+1 span

cards).

Step 4 Under Selected Group, verify that the working slot/port is shown as “Working/Active.” If yes, go to Step

5. If the working slot says “Working/Standby” and the protect slot says “Protect/Active,” switch traffic

to the working slot:

a. Under Selected Group, select the protect slot, that is, the slot that says “Protect/Active.”

a. From the Switch Commands, select Manual.

b. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

c. Under Selected Group, verify that the working slot/port says “Working/Active.” If so, continue to

Step (d). If not, clear the conditions that prevent the card from carrying working traffic before

proceeding.

d. From the Switch Commands, select Clear. A Confirm Clear Operation dialog is displayed.

e. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

Step 5 Repeat Step 4 for each group in the 1+1 Protection Groups list at all nodes that will be converted.

Step 6 For each node, delete the 1+1 OC-N protection group that supports the linear ADM span:

Note Deleting a 1+1 protection group may cause unequipped path (UNEQ-P) alarms to occur.

a. Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs (Figure 5-35).

b. From the Protection Groups list, choose the 1+1 group you want to delete. Click Delete.

5-44

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

c. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

d. Verify that no traffic disruptions are indicated on the test set. If disruptions occur, do not proceed.

Recreate the protection group and isolate the cause of the disruption.

e. Continue deleting 1+1 protection groups while monitoring the existing traffic with the test set.

Figure 5-35 Deleting a protection group

Step 7 Physically remove one of the protect fibers running between the middle and end nodes. For example, in

the Figure 5-36, the fiber from Node 2/Slot 13 to Node 3/Slot 13 is removed. The corresponding OC-48

card will go into an LOS condition for that fiber and port.

5-45

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

Figure 5-36 Converting a linear ADM to a UPSR

Step 8 Physically reroute the other protect fiber to connect the two end nodes. In the Figure 5-36 example, the

fiber between Node 1/Slot 5 and Node 2/Slot 5 is rerouted to connect Node 1/Slot 5 to Node 3/Slot 13.

If you are leaving the OC-N cards in place, go to Step 13. If you are removing the cards, complete Steps

9 – 12. (In this example, cards in Node 2/Slots 5 and 13 are removed.)

Step 9 In the middle node, place the cards in Slots 5 and 13 out of service:

a. Display the first card in card view and select the Provisioning > Line tabs.

b. Under Status, select Out of Service. Click Apply.

c. Repeat Steps a and b for the second card.

Step 10 Delete the equipment records for the cards:

a. Display the node view. (In card view, click the Up arrow on the toolbar.)

b. Right-click the card you just took out of service (e.g. Slot 5) and select Delete Card. (You can also

go to the Inventory tab, select the card, and click Delete.)

c. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

d. Repeat (a) through (c) for the second card (e.g. Slot 13).

Step 11 Save all circuit information.

a. In node view, select the Provisioning > Circuits tab.

b. Record the circuit information using one of the following procedures:

–

From the File menu, select Print to print the circuits table, or,

–

From the File menu, select Export to export the circuit data in HTML, CSV (comma separated

values), or TSV (tab separated values). Click Ok and save the file in a temporary directory.

See the “Printing and Exporting CTC Data” section on page 2-26 for more information.

Step 12 Remove the OC-N cards that are no longer connected to the end nodes (Slots 5 and 13, in the example).

Step 13 Display one of the end nodes (Node 1 or Node 3 in the example).

Step 14 Click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

Slot 6 to Slot 6

Linear

ONS 15454

Node 1

Slot 5 to Slot 5

Slot 12 to Slot 12

ONS 15454

Node 2

Slot 13 to Slot 13

ONS 15454

Node 3

Slot 6

(East)

UPSR

ONS 15454

Node 1 ONS 15454

Node 2 ONS 15454

Node 3

Slot 6

(West) Slot 12

(East) Slot 12

(West) Slot 13

(East)

Slot 5

(West)

32135

5-46

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

Step 15 In the SDCC Terminations section, click Create.

Step 16 In the Create SDCC Terminations dialog box, select the slot/port that had been the protect slot in the

linear ADM, for example, for Node 1, this would be Slot 5/Port 1 (OC-48).

Step 17 Click OK.

An EOC SDCC alarm will occur until an SDCC termination is created on the adjacent node.

Step 18 Go to the node on the opposite end (Node 3 in the Figure 5-36 example) and repeat Steps 14 – 17.

Step 19 Delete and reenter the circuits one at a time. (See the “Creating Circuits and VT Tunnels” section on

page 6-2.)

Note Deleting circuits is traffic affecting.

You can create the circuits automatically or manually. However, circuits must be protected. When they

were built in the linear ADM, they were protected by the protect path on Node 1/Slot 5 to Node 2/Slot

5 to Node 3/Slot 13. With the new UPSR, circuits should also be created with protection.

Deleting the first circuit and recreating it to the same card/port should restore the circuit immediately.

Step 20 Monitor your SONET test set to verify that the circuit was deleted and restored.

Step 21 You should also verify that the new circuit path for the clockwise (CW) fiber from Node 1 to Node 3 is

working. To do this, switch to network view and move your cursor to the green span between Node 1

and 3.

Although the cursor only shows the first circuit created, do not become alarmed that the other circuits

are not present. Verify with the SONET test set that the original circuits and the new circuits are

operational. The original circuits were created on the counter clockwise linear path.

Step 22 Go to the network map to view the newly-created ring (Figure 5-37).

5-47

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

Figure 5-37 A UPSR displayed in network view

Procedure: Convert a Linear ADM to a BLSR

The following procedures describe how to convert a three-node linear ADM to a BLSR. You will need

a SONET test set to monitor traffic while you perform these procedures.

Caution This procedure is service affecting.

Caution Always wear an authorized electrostatic discharge wrist band when removing or installing ONS

15454 cards.

Step 1 Start CTC and log into one of the nodes that you want to convert from linear to ring.

Step 2 Click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.

Step 3 Under Protection Groups, select the 1+1 protection group (that is, the group supporting the 1+1 span

cards).

Step 4 Under Selected Group, verify that the working slot/port is shown as “Working/Active.” If yes, go to Step

5. If the working slot says “Working/Standby” and the protect slot says “Protect/Active,” switch traffic

to the working slot:

a. Under Selected Group, select the protect slot, that is, the slot that says “Protect/Active.”

a. From the Switch Commands, select Manual.

b. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

5-48

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

c. Verify that the working slot is carrying traffic. If it is, continue to Step (d). If not, clear the conditions

that prevent the card from carrying working traffic before proceeding.

d. From the Switch Commands, select Clear. A Confirm Clear Operation dialog is displayed.

e. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

Step 5 Repeat Step 4 for each group in the 1+1 Protection Groups list at all nodes that will be converted.

Step 6 For each node, delete the 1+1 OC-N protection group that supports the linear ADM span:

a. Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.

b. From the Protection Groups list, choose the group you want to delete. Click Delete.

c. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

d. Verify that no traffic disruptions are indicated on the SONET test set. If disruptions occur, do not

proceed. Add the protection group and begin troubleshooting procedures to find out the cause of the

disruption.

Note Deleting a 1+1 protection group may cause unequipped path (UNEQ-P) alarms to occur.

Step 7 Physically remove one of the protect fibers running between the middle and end nodes. In the

Figure 5-38 example, the fiber running from Slot 13/Node 2 to Slot 13/Node 3 is removed. The

corresponding end-node trunk card will display an LOS alarm.

Figure 5-38 Converting a linear ADM to a BLSR

Step 8 Physically reroute the other protect fiber so it connects the two end nodes. In the Figure 5-38 example,

the fiber between Node 1/Slot 5 and Node 2/Slot 5 is rerouted to connect Node 1/Slot 5 to Node

3/Slot/ 13.

If you are leaving the OC-N cards in place, go to Step 13. If you are removing the cards, complete Steps

9 – 12. (In this example, cards in Node 2/Slots 5 and 13 are removed.)

Slot 6 to Slot 6

Linear

ONS 15454

Node 1

Slot 5 to Slot 5

Slot 12 to Slot 12

ONS 15454

Node 2

Slot 13 to Slot 13

ONS 15454

Node 3

Slot 6

(East)

BLSR

ONS 15454

Node 1 ONS 15454

Node 2 ONS 15454

Node 3

Slot 6

(West) Slot 12

(East) Slot 12

(West) Slot 13

(East)

Slot 5

(West)

47418

5-49

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Linear ADM Configurations

Step 9 In the middle node, place the cards in Slots 5 and 13 out of service:

a. Display the first card in card view, then select the Provisioning > Line tabs.

b. Under Status, select Out of Service. Click Apply.

c. Repeat Steps a and b for the second card.

Step 10 Delete the equipment records for the cards:

a. From the View menu, choose Node View.

b. Right-click the card you just took out of service (e.g. Slot 5) and select Delete Card. (You can also

go to the Inventory tab, select the card, and click Delete.)

c. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

d. Repeat (a) through (c) for the second card (e.g. Slot 13).

Step 11 Save all circuit information:

a. In node view, select the Provisioning > Circuits tab.

b. Record the circuit information using one of the following procedures:

–

From the File menu, select Print to print the circuits table, or,

–

From the File menu, select Export to export the circuit data in HTML, CSV (comma separated

values), or TSV (tab separated values). Click Ok and save the file in a temporary directory.

See the “Printing and Exporting CTC Data” section on page 2-26 for more information.

Step 12 Remove the OC-N cards that are no longer connected to the end nodes (Slots 5 and 13, in the example).

Step 13 Log into an end node. In node view, click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

Step 14 In the SDCC Terminations section, click Create.

Step 15 Highlight the slot that is not already in the SDCC Terminations list (in this example, Port 1 of Slot 5

(OC-48) on Node 1.

Step 16 Click OK. (An EOC SDCC alarm will occur until the DCC is created on the other node; in the example,

Node 3/Slot 13.

Step 17 Display the node on the opposite end (Node 3 in Figure 5-38) and repeat Steps 13 – 16.

Step 18 For circuits running on a BLSR protect STS (STSs 7 – 12 for an OC-12 BLSR, STSs 25 – 48 for an

OC-48 BLSR), delete and recreate the circuit:

a. Delete the first circuit.

b. Recreate the circuit on STSs 1 – 6 (for an OC-12 BLSR) or 1 – 24 (for an OC-48 BLSR) on the fiber

that served as the protect fiber in the linear ADM. During circuit creation, deselect “Route

Automatically” and “Fully Protected Path” on the Circuit Creation dialog box so you can manually

route the circuit on the appropriate STSs. See the “Create a Unidirectional Circuit with Multiple

Drops” procedure on page 6-8 for more information.

c. Repeat Steps (a) and (b) for each circuit residing on a BLSR protect STS.

Note Deleting circuits is traffic affecting.

Step 19 Follow all procedures in the “Setting Up BLSRs” section on page 5-10 to configure the BLSR. The ring

should have an East/West logical connection. While it may not physically be possible to connect the

OC-N cards in an East/West pattern, it is strongly recommended. If the network ring that is already

passing traffic does not provide the opportunity to connect fiber in this manner, logical provisioning can

be performed to satisfy this requirement.

5-50

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Path-Protected Mesh Networks

Be sure to assign the same Ring ID and different node IDs to all nodes in the BLSR. Do not accept the

BLSR ring map until all nodes are provisioned.

Note E-W Mismatch alarms will occur until all nodes are provisioned.

Step 20 Display the network map to view the newly-created ring.

5.6 Path-Protected Mesh Networks

In addition to single BLSRs, UPSRs and ADMs, you can extend ONS 15454 traffic protection by

creating path-protected mesh networks (PPMNs). PPMNs include multiple ONS 15454 SONET

topologies and extend the protection provided by a single UPSR to the meshed architecture of several

interconnecting rings. In a PPMN, circuits travel diverse paths through a network of single or multiple

meshed rings. When you create circuits, you can have CTC automatically route circuits across the

PPMN, or you can manually route them. You can also choose levels of circuit protection. For example,

if you choose full protection, CTC creates an alternate route for the circuit in addition to the main route.

The second route follows a unique path through the network between the source and destination and sets

up a second set of cross-connections.

For example, in Figure 5-39, a circuit is created from Node 3 to Node 9. CTC determines that the shortest

route between the two nodes passes through Node 8 and Node 7, shown by the dotted line, and

automatically creates cross-connections at Nodes, 3, 8, 7, and 9 to provide the primary circuit path.

If full protection is selected, CTC creates a second unique route between Nodes 3 and 9 which, in this

example, passes through Nodes 2, 1, and 11. Cross-connections are automatically created at Nodes, 3,

2, 1, 11, and 9, shown by the dashed line. If a failure occurs on the primary path, traffic switches to the

second circuit path. In this example, Node 9 switches from the traffic coming in from Node 7 to the

traffic coming in from Node 11 and service resumes. The switch occurs within 50 ms.

5-51

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Path-Protected Mesh Networks

Figure 5-39 A path-protected mesh network

PPMN also allows spans of different SONET line rates to be mixed together in “virtual rings.”

Figure 5-40 shows Nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4 in a standard OC-48 ring. Nodes 5, 6, 7, and 8 link to the

backbone ring through OC-12 fiber. The “virtual ring” formed by Nodes 5, 6, 7, and 8 uses both OC-48

and OC-12.

= Primary path

= Secondary path

Working traffic

Protect traffic

Source

Node

Destination

Node

32136

Node 1

Node 11

Node 2

Node 4

Node 5

Node 6

Node 7

Node 8Node 10

Node 9

Node 3

5-52

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

78-13453-01

Chapter 5 SONET Topologies

Path-Protected Mesh Networks

Figure 5-40 A PPMN virtual ring

OC-48 UPSR OC-12OC-12

32137

ONS 15454

Node 5 ONS 15454

Node 1

ONS 15454

Node 6 ONS 15454

Node 2

ONS 15454

Node 4 ONS 15454

Node 8

ONS 15454

Node 3 ONS 15454

Node 7

CHAPTER

6-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Circuits and Tunnels

This chapter explains how to create and administer Cisco ONS 15454 circuits and tunnels, which

includes:

•Creating standard STS and VT1.5 circuits

•Creating VT tunnels

•Creating multiple drop circuits

•Creating monitor circuits

•Editing UPSR circuits

•Creating path traces to monitor traffic

•Reviewing ONS 15454 cross-connect card capacities

•Creating DCC tunnels to tunnel third-party equipment through ONS 15454 networks

6.1 Circuits Overview

You can create STS and VT1.5 circuits across and within ONS 15454 nodes and assign different

attributes to circuits, for example:

•Create one-way, two-way, or broadcast circuits.

•Assign user-defined names to circuits.

•Assign different circuit sizes. STS circuits can be STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STS-48c, or STS-192c.

Ethernet circuits can be STS-1, STS-3c, STS-6c, or STS-12c. (To create Ethernet circuits see the

“Provision a Shared Packet Ring” procedure on page 9-10.)

•Route circuits automatically or manually.

•Automatically create multiple circuits.

•Require the circuit path to be fully protected.

•Require protected source and destination cards and ports.

•Define a secondary circuit source or destination that allows you to interoperate an ONS 15454

unidirectional path switched ring (UPSR) with third-party equipment UPSRs.

6-2

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating Circuits and VT Tunnels

Note In this chapter, “cross-connect” and “circuit” have the following meanings: Cross-connect refers to

the connections that occur within a single ONS 15454 to allow a circuit to enter and exit an ONS

15454. Circuit refers to the series of connections from a traffic source (where traffic enters the ONS

15454 network) to the drop or destination (where traffic exits an ONS 15454 network).

6.2 Creating Circuits and VT Tunnels

This section explains how to create STS and VT1.5 circuits and VT tunnels. For an explanation and

examples of circuits and VT tunnels, see the “Cross-Connect Card Capacities” section on page 6-15. You

can create unidirectional or bidirectional, revertive or non-revertive circuits. You can have circuits

routed automatically or you can manually route them. The auto range feature eliminates the need to

individually build circuits of the same type; CTC can create additional sequential circuits if you specify

the number of circuits you need and build the first circuit.

You can provision circuits at any of the following points:

•Before cards are installed. The ONS 15454 allows you to provision slots and circuits before

installing the traffic cards. (To provision an empty slot, right-click it and select a card from the

shortcut menu.) However, circuits will not carry traffic until you install the cards and place their

ports in service. For procedures, see the “Install Optical, Electrical, and Ethernet Cards” procedure

on page 1-48 and the “Enable Ports” procedure on page 3-10.

•Cards are installed; ports are out of service. You must place the ports in service before circuits will

carry traffic.

•Cards are installed, and their ports are in service. Circuits will carry traffic as soon as the signal is

received.

Procedure: Create an Automatically Routed Circuit

Note If you want to route circuits on protected drops, create the card protection groups before creating

circuits. See the “Create Protection Groups” procedure on page 3-9.

Step 1 Log into an ONS 15454 and click the Circuits tab.

Tip You can also right-click a source node in network view, select Provision Circuit To, and choose the

circuit destination node from the menu.

Step 2 Click Create.

Step 3 In the Circuit Creation dialog box (Figure 6-1), complete the following fields:

•Name—(optional) Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 32

characters (including spaces). If you leave the Name field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the

circuit.

•Type—Select the type of circuit you want to create: STS, VT (VT1.5), or VT tunnel. The circuit type

determines the circuit-provisioning options that are displayed. See the “VT1.5 Cross-Connects”

section on page 6-16 and the “VT Tunnels” section on page 6-19 for more information.

6-3

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating Circuits and VT Tunnels

•Size—Select the circuit size (STS circuits only). The “c” indicates concatenated STSs.

•Bidirectional—Check this box to create a two-way circuit; uncheck it to create a one-way circuit

(STS and VT circuits only; VT tunnels are bidirectional).

•Number of circuits—Type the number of circuits you want to create. If you enter more than 1, you

can use auto-ranging to create the additional circuits automatically. Otherwise, CTC returns to the

Circuit Source page after you create each circuit until you finish creating the number of circuits

specified here.

•Auto Ranged—If selected, and you select the source and destination of one circuit, CTC

automatically determines the source and destination for the remaining Number of circuits and

creates the circuits. To determine the source and destination, CTC increments the most specific part

of the end points. An end point can be a port, an STS, or a VT/DS-1. If CTC runs out of choices, or

selects an end point that is already in use, CTC stops and allows you to either select a valid end point

or cancel. If you select a valid end point and continue, auto-ranging begins after you click Finish

for the current circuit.

•Protected Drops—If this box is checked, CTC only displays protected cards and ports (1:1, 1:N, 1+1

or BLSR protection) as choices for the circuit source and destination.

Figure 6-1 Creating a circuit

Step 4 (UPSR circuits only) Set the UPSR Selector Defaults:

•Revertive—Check this box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that

diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect

path after the switch.

•Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that will

elapse before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the

switch are cleared (the default reversion time is 5 minutes).

•SF threshold—Set the UPSR path-level signal failure bit error rate (BER) thresholds (STS circuits

only).

•SD threshold—Set the UPSR path-level signal degrade BER thresholds (STS circuits only).

•Switch on PDI-P—Check this box if you want traffic to switch when an STS payload defect

indicator is received (STS circuits only).

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the Circuit Source dialog box, set the circuit source.

6-4

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating Circuits and VT Tunnels

Options include node, slot, port, STS, and VT/DS-1. The options that display depend on the circuit type

and circuit properties you selected in Step 3 and the cards installed in the node. For example, if you are

creating a VT circuit or tunnel, only nodes with XCVT and XC10G cards are displayed. For Ethergroups,

see the “Ethernet Circuit Configurations” section on page 9-6.

Click Use Secondary Source if you need to create a UPSR bridge/selector circuit entry point in a

multivendor UPSR.

Step 7 Click Next.

Step 8 In the Circuit Destination dialog box, enter the appropriate information for the circuit destination. If the

circuit is bidirectional, you can click Use Secondary Destination if you need to create a UPSR

bridge/selector circuit destination point in a multivendor UPSR. (To add secondary destinations to

unidirectional circuits, see “Create a Unidirectional Circuit with Multiple Drops” procedure on

page 6-8.)

Step 9 Click Next.

Step 10 Under Circuit Routing Preferences (Figure 6-2), select Route Automatically. The following options

(described in detail in the next step) are available:

•Using Required Nodes/Spans—If selected, you can specify nodes and spans to include or exclude in

the CTC-generated circuit route.

•Review Route Before Creation—If selected, you can review and edit the circuit route before the

circuit is created.

Step 11 If you want the circuit routed on a protected path, select Fully Protected Path. Otherwise, go to

Step 12. CTC creates a primary and alternate circuit route (virtual UPSR) based on the nodal diversity

option you select:

•Nodal Diversity Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within path-protected mesh

network (PPMN) portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse. (For information about

PPMN, see the “Path-Protected Mesh Networks” section on page 5-50.)

•Nodal Diversity Desired—Specifies that node diversity should be attempted, but if node diversity is

not possible, CTC creates link diverse paths for the PPMN portion of the complete circuit path.

•Link Diversity Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for PPMN

portions of the complete circuit path are needed. The paths may be node-diverse, but CTC does not

check for node diversity.

Figure 6-2 Setting circuit routing preferences

Step 12 Click Finish or Next depending on whether you selected Using Required Nodes/Spans and/or Review

Route Before Creation:

6-5

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating Circuits and VT Tunnels

•Using Required Nodes/Spans—If selected, click Next to display the Circuit Route Constraints panel

(Figure 6-3). On the circuit map, click a node or span and click Include (to include the node or span

in the circuit) or Exclude (to exclude the node/span from the circuit). The order in which you select

included nodes and spans sets the circuit sequence. Click spans twice to change the circuit direction.

After you add the spans and nodes, you can use the Up and Down buttons to change their order, or

click Remove to remove a node or span. When you are finished, click Finish or Next, depending

on whether you selected Review Route Before Creation.

Figure 6-3 Specifying circuit constraints

•Review Route Before Creation—If selected, click Next to display the route for you to review. To add

or delete a circuit span, select a node on the circuit route. Blue arrows show the circuit route. Green

arrows indicate spans that you can add. Click a span arrowhead, then click Include to include the

span or Remove to remove the span.

When you click Finish, CTC creates the circuit and returns to the Circuits window. If you entered more

than 1 in Number of Circuits in the Circuit Attributes dialog box in Step 3, the Circuit Source dialog box

is displayed so you can create the remaining circuits. If Auto Ranged is checked, CTC automatically

creates the number of sequential circuits that you entered in Number of Circuits. Otherwise, go on to

Step 13.

Step 13 If you are provisioning circuits before installing the traffic cards and enabling their ports, you must

install the cards and enable the ports before circuits will carry traffic. For procedures, see the “Install

Optical, Electrical, and Ethernet Cards” procedure on page 1-48 and the “Enable Ports” procedure on

page 3-10.

6-6

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating Circuits and VT Tunnels

Procedure: Create a Manually Routed Circuit

Note If you want to route circuits on protected drops, create the card protection groups before creating

circuits. See the “Create Protection Groups” procedure on page 3-9.

Step 1 Log into an ONS 15454 and click the Circuits tab.

Tip You can also right-click a source node in network view, select Provision Circuit To, and choose the

circuit destination node from the menu.

Step 2 Click Create.

Step 3 In the Circuit Creation dialog box (Figure 6-1), complete the following fields:

•Name—(optional) Assign a name to the circuit. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 32

characters (including spaces). If you leave the Name field blank, CTC assigns a default name to the

circuit.

•Type—Select the type of circuit you want to create: STS, VT (VT1.5), or VT tunnel. The circuit type

determines the circuit-provisioning options that are displayed. “VT1.5 Cross-Connects” section on

page 6-16 and the “VT Tunnels” section on page 6-19 for more information.

•Size—Select the circuit size (STS circuits only). The “c” indicates concatenated STSs.

•Bidirectional—Check this box to create a two-way circuit; uncheck it to create a one-way circuit

(STS and VT circuits only; VT tunnels are bidirectional).

•Number of circuits—Type the number of circuits you want to create. CTC returns to the Circuit

Source page after you create each circuit until you finish creating the number of circuits specified

here.

•Auto Ranged—This option is not available with manual circuit routing.

•Protected Drops—If this box is checked, CTC only displays protected cards and ports (1:1, 1:N, 1+1

or BLSR protection) as choices for the circuit source and destination.

Figure 6-4 Creating a circuit

Step 4 (UPSR circuits only) Set the UPSR Selector Defaults:

6-7

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating Circuits and VT Tunnels

•Revertive—Check this box if you want traffic to revert to the working path when the conditions that

diverted it to the protect path are repaired. If Revertive is not chosen, traffic remains on the protect

path after the switch.

•Reversion time—If Revertive is checked, set the reversion time. This is the amount of time that will

elapse before the traffic reverts to the working path. Traffic can revert when conditions causing the

switch are cleared (the default reversion time is 5 minutes).

•SF threshold—Set the UPSR path-level signal failure bit error rate (BER) thresholds (STS circuits

only).

•SD threshold—Set the UPSR path-level signal degrade BER thresholds (STS circuits only).

•Switch on PDI-P—Check this box if you want traffic to switch when an STS payload defect

indicator is received (STS circuits only).

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the Circuit Source dialog box, set the circuit source.

Options include node, slot, port, STS, and VT/DS-1. The options that display depend on the circuit type

and circuit properties you selected in Step 3 and the cards installed in the node. For example, if you are

creating a VT circuit or tunnel, only nodes with XCVT and XC10G cards are displayed. For Ethergroups,

see the “Ethernet Circuit Configurations” section on page 9-6.

Click Use Secondary Source if you need to create a UPSR bridge/selector circuit entry point in a

multivendor UPSR.

Step 7 Click Next.

Step 8 In the Circuit Destination dialog box, enter the appropriate information for the circuit destination. If the

circuit is bidirectional, you can click Use Secondary Destination if you need to create a UPSR

bridge/selector circuit destination point in a multivendor UPSR. (To add secondary destinations to

unidirectional circuits, see “Create a Unidirectional Circuit with Multiple Drops” procedure on

page 6-8.)

Step 9 Click Next.

Step 10 Under Circuit Routing Preferences (Figure 6-2), de-select Route Automatically.

Step 11 If you want the circuit routed on a protected path, select Fully Protected Path. Otherwise, go to Step

12. CTC creates a primary and alternate circuit route (virtual UPSR) based on the nodal diversity option

you select:

•Nodal Diversity Required—Ensures that the primary and alternate paths within path-protected mesh

network (PPMN) portions of the complete circuit path are nodally diverse. (For information about

PPMN, see the “Path-Protected Mesh Networks” section on page 5-50.)

•Nodal Diversity Desired—Specifies that node diversity should be attempted, but if node diversity is

not possible, CTC creates link diverse paths for the PPMN portion of the complete circuit path.

•Link Diversity Only—Specifies that only link-diverse primary and alternate paths for PPMN

portions of the complete circuit path are needed. The paths may be node-diverse, but CTC does not

check for node diversity.

Step 12 Click Next. The Route Review and Edit panel is displayed for you to manually route the circuit. The

green arrows pointing from the source node to other network nodes indicate spans that are available for

routing the circuit.

Step 13 Set the circuit route:

a. Click the arrowhead of the span you want the circuit to travel.

b. If you want to change the source STS or VT, change it in the Source STS or Source VT fields.

6-8

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating Multiple Drops for Unidirectional Circuits

c. Click Add Span.

The span is added to the Included Spans list and the span arrow turns blue.

Step 14 Repeat Step 13 until the circuit is provisioned from the source to the destination node.

When provisioning a protected circuit, you only need to select one path of BLSR or 1+1 spans from the

source to the drop. If you select unprotected spans as part of the path, select two different paths for the

unprotected segment of the path.

Step 15 When the circuit is provisioned, click Finish.

If you entered more than 1 in Number of Circuits in the Circuit Attributes dialog box in Step 3, the

Circuit Source dialog box is displayed so you can create the remaining circuits.

Step 16 If you are provisioning circuits before installing the traffic cards and enabling their ports, you must

install the cards and enable the ports before circuits will carry traffic. For procedures, see the “Install

Optical, Electrical, and Ethernet Cards” procedure on page 1-48 and the “Enable Ports” procedure on

page 3-10.

6.3 Creating Multiple Drops for Unidirectional Circuits

Unidirectional circuits can have multiple drops for use in broadcast circuit schemes. In broadcast

scenarios, one source transmits traffic to multiple destinations, but traffic is not returned back to the

source.

When you create a unidirectional circuit, the card that does not have its backplane Rx input terminated

with a valid input signal generates a loss of service (LOS) alarm. To mask the alarm, create an alarm

profile suppressing the LOS alarm and apply it to the port that does not have its Rx input terminated.

See the “Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles” section on page 10-9 for information.

Procedure: Create a Unidirectional Circuit with Multiple Drops

Step 1 Use the “Create an Automatically Routed Circuit” procedure on page 6-2 to create a circuit. To make it

unidirectional, clear the Bidirectional check box on the Circuit Creation dialog box.

Step 2 After the unidirectional circuit is created, in node or network view select the Circuits tab.

Step 3 Select the unidirectional circuit and click Edit (or double-click the circuit).

Step 4 On the Drops tab of the Edit Circuits dialog box, click Create or, if Show Detailed Map is selected,

right-click a node on the circuit map and select Add Drop.

Step 5 On the Define New Drop dialog box, complete the appropriate fields to define the new circuit drop:

Node, Slot, Port, STS, VT (if applicable).

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 If you need to create additional drops, repeat Steps 4 – 6. If not, click Close.

Step 8 Verify the new drops on the Edit Circuit map:

•If Show Detailed Map is selected: a “D” enclosed by circles appears on each side of the node

graphic.

•If Show Detailed Map is not selected: “Drop #1, Drop #2” appear under the node graphic.

6-9

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating Monitor Circuits

6.4 Creating Monitor Circuits

You can set up secondary circuits to monitor traffic on primary bidirectional circuits. Figure 6-5 shows

an example of a monitor circuit. At Node 1, a VT1.5 is dropped from Port 1 of an EC1-12 card. To

monitor the VT1.5 traffic, test equipment is plugged into Port 2 of the EC1-12 card and a monitor circuit

to Port 2 is provisioned in CTC. Circuit monitors are one-way. The monitor circuit in Figure 6-5 is used

to monitor VT1.5 traffic received by Port 1 of the EC1-12 card.

Note Monitor circuits cannot be used with EtherSwitch circuits.

Note For unidirectional circuits, create a drop to the port where the test equipment is attached.

Figure 6-5 A VT1.5 monitor circuit received at an EC1-12 port

Procedure: Create a Monitor Circuit

Step 1 Log into CTC.

Step 2 In node view, select the Circuits tab.

Step 3 Select the bidirectional circuit that you want to monitor. Click Edit.

Step 4 On the Edit Circuit dialog box, click the Monitors tab.

Step 5 The Monitors tab displays ports that you can use to monitor the circuit selected in Step 3.

Step 6 On the Monitors tab, select a port. The monitor circuit displays traffic coming into the node at the

card/port you select. In Figure 6-5, you would select either the DS1-14 card (to test circuit traffic

entering Node 2 on the DS1-14) or the OC-N card at Node 1 (to test circuit traffic entering Node 1 on

the OC-N card).

Step 7 Click Create Monitor Circuit.

Step 8 On the Circuit Creation dialog box, select the destination node, slot, port, and STS for the monitored

circuit. In the Figure 6-5 example, this is Port 2 on the EC1-12 card. Click Next.

Step 9 On the Circuit Creation dialog box confirmation, review the monitor circuit information. Click Finish.

Step 10 On the Edit Circuit dialog box, click Close. The new monitor circuit displays on the Circuits tab.

EC1-12 OC-N

ONS 15454

Node 1

OC-N DS1-14

ONS 15454

Node 2

VT1.5 Drop

VT1.5 Monitor

Test Set

Port 1

Port 2

Class 5

Switch

45157

6-10

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Searching for Circuits

6.5 Searching for Circuits

CTC provides the ability to search for ONS 15454 circuits based on circuit name. Searches can be

conducted at the network, node, and card level. You can search for whole words and include

capitalization as a search parameter.

Procedure: Search for ONS 15454 Circuits

Step 1 Log into CTC.

Step 2 Switch to the appropriate CTC view:

•Network view to conduct searches at the network level

•Node view to conduct searches at the network or node level

•Card view to conduct searches at the card, node, or network level

Step 3 Click the Circuits tab.

Step 4 If you are in Node or Card view, select the scope for the search in the Scope field.

Step 5 Click Search.

Step 6 In the Circuit Name Search dialog box, complete the following:

•Find What—Enter the text of the circuit name you want to find.

•Match Whole Word Only—If checked, CTC selects circuits only if the entire word matches the text

in the Find What field.

•Match Case—If checked, CTC selects circuits only when the capitalization matches the

capitalization entered in the Find What field.

•Direction—Select the direction for the search. Searches are conducted up or down from the

currently selected circuit.

Step 7 Click Find Next.

Step 8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 until you are finished, then click Cancel.

6.6 Editing UPSR Circuits

Use the Edit Circuits window to change UPSR selectors and switch protection paths (Figure 6-6). In this

window, you can:

•View the UPSR circuit’s working and protection paths

•Edit the reversion time

•Edit the Signal Fail/Signal Degrade thresholds

•Change PDI-P settings, perform maintenance switches on the circuit selector, and view switch

counts for the selectors

•Display a map of the UPSR circuits to better see circuit flow between nodes

6-11

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Editing UPSR Circuits

Figure 6-6 Editing UPSR selectors

Procedure: Edit a UPSR Circuit

Step 1 Log into the source or drop node of the UPSR circuit.

Step 2 Click the Circuits tab.

Step 3 Click the circuit you want to edit, then click Edit.

Step 4 On the Edit Circuit window, click the UPSR tab.

Step 5 Edit the UPSR selectors:

•Reversion Time—Controls whether traffic reverts to the working path when conditions that diverted

it to the protect path are repaired. If you select Never, traffic does not revert. Selecting a time sets

the amount of time that will elapse before traffic reverts to the working path.

•SF Ber Level—Sets the UPSR signal failure BER threshold (STS circuits only).

•SD Ber Level—Sets the UPSR signal degrade BER threshold (STS circuits only).

•PDI-P—When checked, traffic switches if an STS payload defect indication is received (STS

circuits only).

•Switch State—Switches circuit traffic between the working and protect paths. The color of the

Working Path and Protect Path fields indicates the active path. Normally, the Working Path is green

and the Protect Path is purple. If the Protect Path is green, working traffic has switched to the Protect

Path.

CLEAR—Removes a previously-set switch command.

LOCKOUT OF PROTECT—Prevents traffic from switching to the protect circuit path.

FORCE TO WORKING—Forces traffic to switch to the working circuit path, regardless of whether

the path is error free.

6-12

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating a Path Trace

FORCE TO PROTECT—Forces traffic to switch to the protect circuit path, regardless of whether

the path is error free.

MANUAL TO WORKING—Switches traffic to the working circuit path when the working path is

error free.

MANUAL TO PROTECT—Switches traffic to the protect circuit path when the protect path is error

free.

Caution The FORCE and LOCKOUT commands override normal protection switching mechanisms.

Applying these commands incorrectly can cause traffic outages.

Step 6 Click Apply, then check that the selector switches as you expect.

6.7 Creating a Path Trace

The SONET J1 Path Trace is a repeated, fixed-length string comprised of 64 consecutive J1 bytes. You

can use the string to monitor interruptions or changes to circuit traffic. Table 6-1 shows the ONS 15454

cards that support path trace. DS-1 and DS-3 cards can transmit and receive the J1 field, while the EC-1,

OC-3, OC-48AS, and OC-192 can only receive it. Cards not listed in the table do not support the J1 byte.

The J1 path trace transmits a repeated, fixed-length string. If the string received at a circuit drop port

does not match the string the port expects to receive, an alarm is raised. Two path trace modes are

available:

•Automatic—The receiving port assumes the first J1 string it receives is the baseline J1 string.

•Manual—The receiving port uses a string that you manually enter as the baseline J1 string.

Table 6-2 shows the general flow for setting up the J1 path trace. To set up a path trace on an ONS 15454

circuit, follow the steps in the “Create a J1 Path Trace” procedure on page 6-13.

Table 6-1 ONS 15454 Cards Supporting J1 Path Trace

Card Receive Transmit

DS1-14 X X

DS1N-14 X X

DS3-12E X X

DS3N-12E X X

DS3XM-6X X X

EC1-12 X

OC3 IR 4 1310 X

OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310 X

OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 X

OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550 X

6-13

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating a Path Trace

Procedure: Create a J1 Path Trace

To perform this procedure, you must have an STS circuit using a DS-1, DS3E, or DS3XM card at the

circuit source and drop ports, or an STS circuit passing through an EC-1, OC-3, OC-48AS, or OC-192

card.

Step 1 Log into the circuit source node and select the Circuits tab.

Step 2 Select the circuit you want to trace, then click Edit.

Step 3 On the Edit Circuit window, click Show Detailed Map at the bottom of the window.

Step 4 On the detailed circuit map, right-click the source port for the circuit and select Edit Path Trace from

the shortcut menu. Figure 6-7 shows an example.

Table 6-2 Path Trace Source and Drop Provisioning

Step Port Action Notes

1 Source Edit the path-trace transmit string. If not edited, an empty string is transmitted.

2 Drop Edit the path-trace transmit string. If not edited, an empty string is transmitted.

3 Source Edit the path-trace expected

string. Only if Path Trace mode is set to Manual, and only

on DS-1, DS3E, and DS3XM cards.

4 Drop Edit the path-trace expected string Only Path Trace mode is set to Manual, and only

on DS-1, DS3E, and DS3XM cards.

5 Drop Change Path Trace Mode Automatic or Manual.

6 Source Change Path Trace Mode Automatic or Manual.

6-14

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating a Path Trace

Figure 6-7 Selecting the Edit Path Trace option

Step 5 On the Circuit Path Trace window (Figure 6-8) in the New Transmit String field (this field is available

only on DS-1, DS3E, and DS3XM cards), enter the string that you want the source port to transmit. For

example, you could enter the node IP address, node name, circuit name, or another string. If the New

Transmit String field is left blank, the J1 transmits an empty string.

Figure 6-8 Setting up a path trace

Step 6 Click Apply but do not close the window.

Step 7 Return to the Edit Circuit window (Figure 6-7).

6-15

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Cross-Connect Card Capacities

Step 8 On the circuit map, right-click the drop port for the circuit and select Edit Path Trace from the shortcut

menu.

Step 9 On the Circuit Path Trace window (Figure 6-8) in the New Transmit String field (this field is available

only on DS-1, DS3E, and DS3XM cards), enter the string that you want the drop port to transmit. If the

field is left blank, the J1 transmits an empty string.

Step 10 If you will set Path Trace Mode to Manual in Step 11, enter the string that the drop port should expect

to receive in the New Expected String field. This string must match the New Transmit String entered for

the source port in Step 5. (When you click Apply in Step 12, this string becomes the Current Expected

String.)

Step 11 In the Path Trace Mode field, select one of the following options:

•Auto—Assumes the first string received from the source port is the baseline string. An alarm is

raised when a string that differs from the baseline is received.

•Manual—Uses the Current Expected String field as the baseline string. An alarm is raised when a

string that differs from the Current Expected String is received.

Step 12 Click Apply and then click Close.

Step 13 Display the Circuit Path Trace window for the source port from Step 5.

Step 14 If you will set the Path Trace Mode to Manual in Step 15, enter the string the source port should expect

to receive in the New Expected String field. This string must match the New Transmit String entered for

the source port in Step 9.

Step 15 In the Path Trace Mode field, select one of the following options:

•Auto—Assumes that the first string received from the drop port is the baseline string. An alarm is

raised when a string that differs from the baseline is received.

•Manual—Uses the Current Expected String field as the baseline string. An alarm is raised when a

string that differs from the Current Expected String is received.

Step 16 Click Apply and click Close.

After you set up the path trace, the received string is displayed in the Received box on the path trace

setup window (Figure 6-8). Click Switch Mode to toggle between ASCII and hexadecimal display.

Click the Reset button to reread values from the port. Click Default to return to the path trace default

settings (Path Trace Mode is set to Off and the New Transmit and New Expected Strings are null).

6.8 Cross-Connect Card Capacities

The ONS 15454 XC, XCVT, and XC10G cards perform port-to-port time-division multiplexing (TDM).

•XCs perform STS switching

•XCVTs and XC10Gs perform STS and VT1.5 switching

XCs and XCVTs have capacity to terminate 288 STSs, or 144 STS cross-connections (each STS

cross-connection uses two STS ports on the cross-connect card STS matrix). XC10Gs have capacity for

1152 STSs, or 576 STS cross-connections. Table 6-3 shows STS capacities for the XC, XCVT, and

XC10G cards.

Note The Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide contains detailed specifications of

the XC, XCVT, and XC10G cards.

6-16

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Cross-Connect Card Capacities

6.8.1 VT1.5 Cross-Connects

XCVTs and XC10Gs can map up to 24 STSs for VT1.5 traffic. Because one STS can carry 28 VT1.5s,

the XCVT and XC10G cards can terminate up to 672 VT1.5s, or 336 VT1.5 cross-connects. However,

to terminate 336 VT1.5 cross-connects:

•Each STS mapped for VT1.5 traffic must carry 28 VT1.5 circuits. If you assign each VT1.5 circuit

to a different STS, the XCVT and XC10G VT1.5 cross-connect capacity will be reached after you

create 12 VT1.5 circuits.

•ONS 15454s must be in a bidirectional line switched ring (BLSR). Source and drop nodes in UPSR

or 1+1 (linear) protection have capacity for only 224 VT1.5 cross-connects because an additional

STS is used for the protect path.

Table 6-4 shows the VT1.5 capacities for ONS 15454 cross-connect cards. All capacities assume each

VT1.5-mapped STS carries 28 VT1.5 circuits.

Figure 6-9 shows the logical flow of a VT1.5 circuit through the XCVT/XC10G STS and VT matrices

at a BLSR node. The circuit source is an EC-1 card using STS-1. After the circuit is created:

•Two of the 24 XCVT or XC10G STSs available for VT1.5 traffic are used (one STS for VT1.5 input

into the VT matrix; one STS for VT1.5 output).

•22 STSs are available for VT1.5 circuits.

•The STS-1 from the EC-1 card has capacity for 27 more VT1.5 circuits.

Table 6-3 XC, XCVT, and XC10G Card STS Cross-Connect Capacities

Card Total STSs STS Cross-connects

XC 288 144

XCVT 288 144

XC10G 1152 576

Table 6-4 XC, XCVT, and XC10G VT1.5 Capacities

Card Total VT1.5s

(BLSR) VT1.5 Cross-Connect

Capacity (BLSR) VT1.5 Cross-Connect Capacity

(UPSR or 1+1)

XC 0 0 0

XCVT 672 336 224

XC10G 672 336 224

6-17

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Cross-Connect Card Capacities

Figure 6-9 Example #1: A VT1.5 circuit in a BLSR

In Figure 6-10, a second VT1.5 circuit is created from the EC-1 card. In this example, the circuit is

assigned to STS-2:

•Two more of the 24 STSs available for VT1.5 traffic are used.

•20 STSs are available on the XCVT or XC10G for VT1.5 circuits.

•STS-2 can carry 27 additional VT1.5 circuits.

Figure 6-10 Example #2: Two VT1.5 circuits in a BLSR

If you create VT1.5 circuits on nodes in UPSR or 1+1 protection, an additional STS is used for the

protect path at the source and drop nodes. Figure 6-11 shows a VT1.5 circuit at a UPSR source node.

When the circuit is completed:

•Three of the 24 STSs available for VT1.5 mapping on the XCVT or XC10G are used (one input and

two outputs, one output for the working path and one output for the protect path).

61846

STS Matrix

XCVT-XC10G Matrices

VT1.5 circuit #1 on STS-1

1 VT1.5 used on STS-1

27 VT1.5s available on STS-1

EC-1

Drop

2 STSs total used

22 STSs available

STS

VT1.5

VT1.5 Matrix

OC-12

Source

61847

STS Matrix

XCVT-XC10G Matrices

VT1.5 circuit #1

VT1.5 circuit #2 on STS-2

1 VT1.5 used on STS-2

27 VT1.5s available on STS-2

EC-1 4 STSs total used

20 STSs available

STS

VT1.5

OC-12

Drop

Source

6-18

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Cross-Connect Card Capacities

•21 STSs are available for VT1.5 circuits.

Figure 6-11 Example #3: VT1.5 circuit in a UPSR or 1+1 protection scheme

Figure 6-12 shows a second VT1.5 circuit that was created using STS-2. When the second VT1.5 circuit

is created:

•Three more VT1.5-mapped STSs are used.

•18 STSs are available on the XCVT or XC10G for VT1.5 circuits.

Figure 6-12 Example #4: Two VT1.5 circuits in UPSR or 1+1 protection scheme

Unless you create VT tunnels (see the “VT Tunnels” section on page 6-19), VT1.5 circuits use STSs on

the XCVT/XC10G VT matrix at each node through which the circuit passes.

•Two STSs are used at each node in the Figure 6-9 example, and three STSs are used at each node in

the Figure 6-11 example.

61848

STS Matrix Working

Protect

XCVT-XC10G Matrices

VT1.5 circuit #1

EC-1

Drop

3 STSs total used

21 STSs available

STS

VT1.5

OC-12

VT1.5 Matrix

Source

61849

STS Matrix Circuit #1 (working)

XCVT-XC10G Matrices

EC-1

Source

6 STSs total used

18 STSs available

Circuit #2 (working)

Circuit #1 (protect)

Circuit #2 (protect)

STS

VT1.5

VT1.5 Matrix

OC-12

VT1.5 circuit #1

VT1.5 circuit #2

Drop

6-19

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Cross-Connect Card Capacities

•In the Figure 6-10 example, three STSs are used at the source and drop nodes and four STSs are used

at pass-through nodes. In Figure 6-12, six STSs are used at the source and drop nodes and four

STSs at the pass-through nodes.

6.8.2 VT Tunnels

To maximize VT matrix resources, you can tunnel VT1.5 circuits through ONS 15454 pass-through

nodes (nodes that are not a circuit source or drop). VT1.5 tunnels provide two benefits:

•They allow you to route VT1.5 circuits through ONS 15454s that have XC cards. (VT1.5 circuits

require XCVT or XC10G cards at circuit source and drop nodes.)

•When tunneled through nodes with XCVT or XC10G cards, VT1.5 tunnels do not use VT matrix

capacity, thereby freeing the VT matrix resources for other VT1.5 circuits.

Figure 6-13 shows a VT tunnel through the XCVT and XC10G matrices. No VT1.5-mapped STSs are

used by the tunnel, which can carry 28 VT1.5s. However, the tunnel does use two STS matrix ports on

each node through which it passes.

Figure 6-13 A VT1.5 tunnel

Figure 6-14 shows a six-node ONS 15454 ring with two VT tunnels. One tunnel carries VT1.5 circuits

from Node 1 to Node 3. The second tunnel carries VT1.5 circuits from Node 1 to Node 4. Table 6-5

shows the VT1.5-mapped STS usage at each node in a ring based on protection scheme and use of VT

tunnels. In the Figure 6-14 example, the circuit travels west through Nodes 2, 3, and 4. Subsequently,

VT-mapped STS usage at these nodes is greater than at Nodes 5 and 6.

61850

STS Matrix

VT Tunnel

VT1.5

VT1.5 Matrix

Trunk

6-20

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Cross-Connect Card Capacities

Figure 6-14 A six-node ring with two VT1.5 tunnels

When planning VT1.5 circuits, weigh the benefits of using tunnels with the need to maximize STS

capacity. For example, a VT1.5 tunnel between Node 1 and Node 4 passing (transparently) through

Nodes 2 and Node 3 is advantageous if a full STS is used for Node 1 – Node 4 VT1.5 traffic (that is, the

number of VT1.5 circuits between these nodes is close to 28). A VT tunnel is required if:

•Node 2 or Node 3 have XC cards, or

•All VT1.5-mappable STSs at Node 2 and Node 3 are in use.

However, if the Node 1 – Node 4 tunnel will carry few VT1.5 circuits, creating a regular VT1.5 circuit

between Nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4 might maximize STS capacity.

When you create a VT1.5 circuit, CTC determines whether a tunnel already exists between source and

drop nodes. If a tunnel exists, CTC checks the tunnel capacity. If the capacity is sufficient, CTC routes

the circuit on the existing tunnel. If a tunnel does not exist, or if an existing tunnel does not have

Table 6-5 VT1.5-Mapped STS Use in Figure 6-6

Node VT Tunnel (BLSR) VT Tunnel (UPSR, 1+1) No VT Tunnel (BLSR) No VT Tunnel (UPSR) No VT Tunnel (1+1)

14 6 4 6 6

20 0 4 3 8

32 3 4 3 6

42 3 2 3 3

50 0 0 2 0

60 0 0 2 0

61851

VT1.5 source

Node 1

Node 4

VT1.5

drop

Node 2

Node 3

VT Tunnel

Node 6 28 VT1.5

circuits

28 VT1.5

circuits

Node 5

VT1.5

drop

BLSR

6-21

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating DCC Tunnels

sufficient capacity, CTC displays a dialog box asking whether you want to create a tunnel. Before you

create the tunnel, review the existing tunnel availability, keeping in mind future bandwidth needs. In

some cases, you may want to manually route a circuit rather than create a new tunnel.

6.9 Creating DCC Tunnels

SONET provides four data communications channels (DCCs) for network element operations,

administration, maintenance, and provisioning: one on the SONET Section layer and three on the

SONET Line layer. The ONS 15454 uses the Section DCC (SDCC) for ONS 15454 management and

provisioning.

You can use the Line DCCs (LDCCs) and the SDCC (when the SDCC is not used for ONS 15454 DCC

terminations) to tunnel third-party SONET equipment across ONS 15454 networks. A DCC tunnel

end-point is defined by Slot, Port, and DCC, where DCC can be either the SDCC, Tunnel 1, Tunnel 2,

or Tunnel 3 (LDCCs). You can link an SDCC to an LDCC (Tunnel 1, Tunnel 2, or Tunnel 3), and an

LDCC to an SDCC. You can also link LDCCs to LDCCs and link SDCCs to SDCCs. To create a DCC

tunnel, you connect the tunnel end points from one ONS 15454 optical port to another.

Each ONS 15454 can support up to 32 DCC tunnel connections. Table 6-6 shows the DCC tunnels that

you can create.

Figure 6-15 shows a DCC tunnel example. Third-party equipment is connected to OC-3 cards at Node

1/Slot 3/Port 1 and Node 3/Slot 3/Port 1. Each ONS 15454 node is connected by OC-48 trunk cards. In

the example, three tunnel connections are created, one at Node 1 (OC-3 to OC-48), one at Node 2 (OC-48

to OC-48), and one at Node 3 (OC-48 to OC-3).

Table 6-6 DCC Tunnels

DCC SONET

Layer

SONET

Bytes

OC-3

(all ports) OC-12, OC-48

SDCC Section D1 - D3 Yes Yes

Tunnel 1 Line D4 - D6 No Yes

Tunnel 2 Line D7 - D9 No Yes

Tunnel 3 Line D10 - D12 No Yes

6-22

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating DCC Tunnels

Figure 6-15 A DCC tunnel

When you create DCC tunnels, keep the following guidelines in mind:

•Each ONS 15454 can have up to 32 DCC tunnel connections.

•Each ONS 15454 can have up to 10 SDCC terminations.

•An SDCC that is terminated cannot be used as a DCC tunnel end-point.

•An SDCC that is used as an DCC tunnel end-point cannot be terminated.

•All DCC tunnel connections are bidirectional.

Procedure: Provision a DCC Tunnel

Step 1 Log into an ONS 15454 that is connected to the non-ONS 15454 network.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Sonet DCC tabs.

Step 3 Beneath the DCC Tunnel Connections area (bottom right of the screen), click Create.

Step 4 In the Create DCC Tunnel Connection dialog box (Figure 6-16), select the tunnel end points from the

From (A) and To (B) lists.

Note You cannot use the SDCC listed under SDCC Terminations (left side of the window) for

tunnel connections. These are used for ONS 15454 optical connections.

Third party

equipment

Link 1

From (A)

Slot3 (OC3)

port 1, SDCC

To (B)

Slot13 (OC48)

port 1, Tunnel 1

Node 1

32134

Third party

equipment

Link 2

From (A)

Slot12 (OC48)

port 1, Tunnel 1

To (B)

Slot13 (OC48)

port 1, Tunnel 1

Node 2

Link 3

From (A)

Slot12 (OC48)

port 1, Tunnel 1

To (B)

Slot3 (OC3)

port 1, SDCC

Node 3

6-23

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating DCC Tunnels

Figure 6-16 Selecting DCC tunnel end points

Step 5 Click OK.

Step 6 Put the ports hosting the DCC tunnel in service:

a. Double-click the card hosting the DCC in the shelf graphic or right-click the card on the shelf

graphic and select Open.

b. Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.

c. Under Status, select In Service.

d. Click Apply.

DCC provisioning is now complete for one node. Repeat these steps for all slots/ports that are part of

the DCC tunnel, including any intermediate nodes that will pass traffic from third party equipment. The

procedure is confirmed when the third-party network elements successfully communicate over the

newly-established DCC tunnel.

6-24

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 6 Circuits and Tunnels

Creating DCC Tunnels

CHAPTER

7-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Card Provisioning

This chapter provides Cisco ONS 15454 procedures for:

•Changing the default transmission parameters for electrical (EC-1, DS-N) and optical (OC-N) cards,

including provisioning OC-N cards for SDH

•Setting performance monitoring (PM) thresholds, including intermediate path performance

monitoring

•Provisioning the Alarm Interface Controller card

•Converting the DS1-14 and DS3-12 cards from 1:1 to 1:N protection

Note Ethernet card provisioning is described in Chapter 9, “Ethernet Operation.”

Because much of the electrical and optical card provisioning involves PM thresholds, see Chapter 8,

“Performance Monitoring,” for definitions and general information about ONS 15454 performance

monitoring parameters. In addition, refer to the Telcordia GR-1230-CORE, GR-820-CORE, and

GR-253-CORE documents. The default thresholds delivered with ONS 15454 cards are based on

specifications contained in those documents.

Note For information about creating protection groups, see the “Creating Protection Groups” section on

page 3-9. For circuit creation procedures, see Chapter 6, “Circuits and Tunnels.”

7.1 Performance Monitoring Thresholds

ONS 15454 card default thresholds are based on GR-253-CORE and GR-820-CORE. If you change their

settings, the following rules apply:

•The minimum threshold that you can set is 1.

•If you set a threshold to 0, no threshold crossing alert (TCA) is issued.

•You can set thresholds to any DS-N or OC-N maximum. However, CTC does not perform range

checking. Setting a threshold to a value greater than what is logically possible is the same as setting

the threshold to zero. No TCA will be issued.

7-2

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

7.2 Provisioning Electrical Cards

The ONS 15454 electrical cards (DS1-14, DS1N-14, DS3-12, DS3N-12, DS3E1-12, DS3EN-12,

DS3XM-6, and EC1-12) are pre-provisioned with settings that you can modify to manage transmission

quality. When you open a card in CTC and select the Provisioning tab, the following subtabs are

commonly displayed:

•Line—Sets line setup parameters, such as line coding and line length. This is also where you put

ports in and out of service.

•Line Threshold—Sets the line-level PM thresholds.

•Elect Path Threshold—Sets the path-level PM thresholds for electrical (DS-3/DS-1) traffic.

•SONET Threshold—Sets the path-level PM thresholds for (STS/VT1.5) traffic.

•Alarming—Sets alarm profiles for individual ports and suppresses alarms. See Chapter 10, “Alarm

Monitoring and Management,” for information about alarm profiles and alarm suppression.

Table 7-1 provides an overview of DS-1, DS-3, DS3E, and DS3XM parameters (an X means the item is

available for the card). EC1-12 card parameters are shown in Table 7-6 on page 7-15.

Table 7-1 DS-N Card Provisioning Overview

Subtab Provisioning Item

DS1-14/

DS1N-14

DS3-12/

DS3N-12

DS3E1-12/

DS3EN-12 DS3XM-6

Line Port # XXXX

Port NameXXXX

Line Type X X X

Detected Line Type X

Line Coding X X X

Line LengthXXXX

Status XXXX

Line Threshold Port XXXX

CV XXXX

ES XXXX

SES XXXX

LOSS XXX

Elect Path Port X X X

CV X X

ES X X X

SES X X X

SAS X X X

AIS X X X

UAS X X X

7-3

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

7.2.1 DS-1 Card Parameters

The ONS 15454 DS-1 cards (DS1-14 and DS1N-14) provide 14 DS-1 ports. Each port operates at 1.544

Mbps. Default thresholds are based on recommendations in GR-820-CORE, Sections 4.0.

Procedure: Modify Line and Threshold Settings for the DS-1 Card

Step 1 Display the DS1-14 or DS1N-14 in CTC card view.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning tab (Figure 7-1).

Figure 7-1 Provisioning line parameters on the DS1-14 card

SONET

Threshold Port XXXX

CV XXXX

ES XXXX

FC XXXX

SES XXXX

UAS XXXX

Alarming Port XXXX

Profile XXXX

Suppress AlarmsXXXX

Table 7-1 DS-N Card Provisioning Overview (continued)

Subtab Provisioning Item

DS1-14/

DS1N-14

DS3-12/

DS3N-12

DS3E1-12/

DS3EN-12 DS3XM-6

7-4

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Step 3 Depending on the setting you need to modify, click the Line, Line Thrshld, Elect Path, or Sonet

Thrshld subtab.

Note See Chapter 10, “Alarm Monitoring and Management” for information about the Alarm

Behavior tab.

Step 4 Modify the settings shown in Table 7-2 on page 7-4. For drop-down lists, select an item from the list.

For numerics, double-click the field and type the new number.

Table 7-2 DS-1 Card Parameters

Subtab Parameter Description Options

Line Port # Port number 1 - 14

Port Port name To enter a name for the port, click the

cell and type the name. To change a

name, double-click the cell, then edit

the text.

Line Type Defines the line framing type •D4 (default)

•ESF - Extended Super Frame

•Unframed

Line

Coding Defines the DS-1 transmission

coding type

•AMI - Alternate Mark Inversion

(default)

•B8ZS - Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution

Line

Length Defines the distance (in feet)

from backplane connection to

the next termination point

•0 - 131 (default)

•132 - 262

•263 - 393

•394 - 524

•525 - 655

Status Places port in or out of service •Out of Service (default)

•In Service

Line

Thrshold CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults:

•13340 (15 min)

•133400 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•65 (15 min)

•648 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•100 (1 day)

7-5

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Elect Path

Thrshld ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•65 (15 minutes)

•648 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•100 (1 day)

SAS Severely errored frame/alarm

indication signal Numeric. Defaults:

•2 (15 minutes)

•17 (1 day)

AIS Alarm indication signal Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

SONET

Threshold CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults:

•15 (15 minutes)

•125 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•12 (15 minutes)

•100 (1 day)

FC Failure count Numeric. Defaults (VT termination):

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•3 (15 minutes)

•7 (1 day)

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

Table 7-2 DS-1 Card Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-6

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 – 5 for each subtab that has parameters you want to provision.

7.2.2 DS-3 Card Parameters

The ONS 15454 DS-3 cards (DS3-12 and DS3N-12) provide 12 DS-1 ports. Each port operates at 44.736

Mbps. Default thresholds are based on recommendations in GR-820-CORE, Section 5.0.

Procedure: Modify Line and Threshold Settings for the DS-3 Card

Step 1 Display the DS3-12 or DS3N-12 in CTC card view.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning tab.

Step 3 Depending on the setting you need to modify, click the Line, Line Thrshld, or Sonet Thrshld subtab.

Note See Chapter 10, “Alarm Monitoring and Management” for information about the Alarm

Behavior tab.

Step 4 Modify the settings shown in Table 7-3. For drop-down lists, select an item from the list. For numerics,

double-click the field and type the new number.

Alarming Port Port number 1 - 14

Profile Sets the alarm profile for the port •Default

•Inherited

•Custom profiles (if any)

Suppress

Alarms Suppresses alarm display for the

port

•Unselected (default)

•Selected

Table 7-2 DS-1 Card Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-7

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Table 7-3 DS-3 Card Parameters

Subtab Parameter Description Options

Line Port # Port number 1 - 12

Port Port name To enter a name for the port, click the

cell and type the name. To change a

name, double-click the cell, then edit

the text.

Line Length Defines the distance (in feet)

from backplane connection to

the next termination point

•0 - 225 (default)

•226 - 450

Status Places port in or out of service •Out of Service (default)

•In Service

Line Thrshold CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults:

•387 (15 minutes)

•3865 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•25 (15 minutes)

•250 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•4 (15 minutes)

•40 (1 day)

LOSS Loss of signal; number of

one-second intervals containing

one or more LOS defects

Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

7-8

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 – 5 for each subtab that has parameters you want to provision.

7.2.3 DS3E Card Parameters

The DS3E-12 and DS3EN-12 cards provide 12 DS-3 ports. Each port operates at 44.736 Mbps. The

DS3E uses B3ZS error monitoring and enhanced performance monitoring, including P-Bit and CP-Bit

monitoring. Default thresholds are based on recommendations in GR-820-CORE, Section 5.0.

SONET

Thrshold CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults (Near End, STS

termination):

•15 (15 minutes)

•125 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (Near End, STS

termination):

•12 (15 minutes)

•100 (1 day)

FC Failure count Numeric. Defaults (Near End, STS

termination:

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (Near End, STS

termination):

•3 (15 minutes)

•7 (1 day)

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Default (Near End, STS

termination):

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

Alarming Port Port number 1 - 12

Profile Sets the alarm profile for the

port.

•Default

•Inherited

•Custom profiles (if any)

Suppress

Alarms Suppresses alarm display for the

port.

•Unselected (default)

•Selected

Table 7-3 DS-3 Card Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-9

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Note If the DS3E is installed in an ONS 15454 slot that is provisioned for a DS-3 card, the DS3E enhanced

performance monitoring parameters are not available. If this occurs, remove the DS3E from the ONS

15454, delete the DS-3 card in CTC, and provision the slot for the DS3E.

Procedure: Modify Line and Threshold Settings for the DS3E Card

Step 1 Display the DS3E-12 or DS3EN-12 in CTC card view.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning tab.

Step 3 Depending on the setting you need to modify, click the Line, Line Thrshld, Elect Path, or Sonet

Thrshld subtab.

Note See Chapter 10, “Alarm Monitoring and Management” for information about the Alarm

Behavior tab.

Step 4 Modify the settings shown in Table 7-4 on page 7-9. For drop-down lists, select an item from the list.

For numerics, double-click the field and type the new number.

Table 7-4 DS3E Card Parameters

Subtab Parameter Description Options

Line Port # Port number •1 - 12

Port Port name To enter a name for the port, click the

cell and type the name. To change a

name, double-click the cell, then edit

the text.

Line Type Defines the line framing type •M23

•C Bit

•Auto Provisioned

Detected

Line Type Displays the detected line type Read-only

Line

Coding Defines the DS3E transmission

coding type

•B3ZS

Line

Length Defines the distance (in feet)

from backplane connection to

the next termination point

•0 - 225 (default)

•226 - 450

Status Places port in or out of service Out of Service (default)

In Service

7-10

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Line Thrshold CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults:

•387 (15 minutes)

•3865 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•25 (15 minutes)

•250 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•4 (15 minutes)

•40 (1 day)

LOSS Loss of signal; number of

one-second intervals containing

one or more LOS defects

Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

Elect Path

Thrshld CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults (DS3 Pbit, Near End

only; DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End):

•382 (15 minutes)

•3820 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (DS3 Pbit, Near End

only; DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End):

•25 (15 minutes)

•250 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (DS3 Pbit, Near End

only; DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End):

•4 (15 minutes)

•40 (1 day)

SAS Severely errored frame/Alarm

indication signal Numeric. Defaults (DS3 Pbit, Near End

only; DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End):

•2 (15 minutes)

•8 (1 day)

AIS Alarm indication signal Numeric. Defaults (DS3 Pbit, Near End

only; DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End):

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Defaults (DS3 Pbit, Near End

only; DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End):

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

Table 7-4 DS3E Card Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-11

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 – 5 for each subtab that has parameters you want to provision.

7.2.4 DS3XM-6 Card Parameters

The DS3XM-6 transmux card can accept up to six DS-3 signals and convert each signal to 28 VT1.5s.

Conversely, the card can take 28 T-1s and multiplex them into a channeled C-bit or M23 framed DS-3.

Unlike the DS3-12 and DS3N-12 cards, the DS3XM-6 allows circuit mapping at the VT level. Table 7-5

on page 7-12 shows parameters that you can provision for each port.

Sonet

Thrshld CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults (Near End STS

termination):

•15 (15 minutes)

•125 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (Near End STS

termination):

•12 (15 minutes)

•100 (1 day)

FC Failure count Numeric. Defaults (Near End STS

termination):

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (Near End STS

termination):

•3 (15 minutes)

•7 (1 day)

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Defaults (Near End STS

termination):

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

Alarming Port Port number 1 - 12

Profile Sets the alarm profile for the

port.

•Default

•Inherited

•Custom profiles (if any)

Suppress

Alarms Suppresses alarm display for the

port.

•Unselected (default)

•Selected

Table 7-4 DS3E Card Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-12

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Procedure: Modify Line and Threshold Settings for the DS3XM-6 Card

Step 1 Display the DS3XM-6 in CTC card view.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning tab.

Step 3 Depending on the setting you need to modify, click the Line, Line Thrshld, Elect Path, or Sonet

Thrshld subtab.

Note See Chapter 10, “Alarm Monitoring and Management” for information about the Alarm

Behavior tab.

Step 4 Modify the settings shown in Table 7-5. For drop-down lists, select an item from the list. For numerics,

double-click the field and type the new number.

Ta b l e 7- 5 D S 3 X M - 6 P a r a m e t e r s

Subtab Parameter Description Options

Line Port # Port number 1 - 6

Port Port name To enter a name for the port, click the

cell and type the name. To change a

name, double-click the cell, then edit

the text.

Line Type Defines the line framing type •M23 - default

•C BIT

Line Coding Defines the DS-1 transmission

coding type that is used

•B3ZS

Line Length Defines the distance (in feet)

from backplane connection to

the next termination point

•0 - 225 (default)

•226 - 450

Status Places port in or out of service •Out of Service (default)

•In Service

Line Thrshld CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults:

•387 (15 minutes)

•3865 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•25 (15 minutes)

•250 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•4 (15 minutes)

•40 (1 day)

Loss Loss of signal Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

7-13

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Elect Path

Thrshld CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults (DS3, Pbit Near

End only; DS3 CPbit, Near and Far

End):

•382 (15 minutes)

•3820 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

•25/250 (DS3 Pbit Near End only;

DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End)

•65/648 (DS1, Near End only)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

•4/40 (DS3 Pbit Near End only;

DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End)

•10/100 (DS1, Near End only)

SAS Severely errored frame/alarm

indication Signal Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

•2/8 (DS3 Pbit Near End only; DS3

CPbit, Near and Far End)

•2/17 (DS1, Near End only)

AIS Alarm indication signal Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

•10/10 DS1, Near End; DS3, Near

& Far End

•0/0 DS1 Far End

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

•10/10 (DS3 Pbit Near End only;

DS3 CPbit, Near and Far End)

•10/10 (DS1, Near End only)

Table 7-5 DS3XM-6 Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-14

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Step 5 Click Apply.

Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 – 5 for each subtab that has parameters you want to provision.

7.2.5 EC1-12 Card Parameters

The EC1-12 provides 12 STS-1 electrical ports. Each port operates at 51.840 Mbps. Table 7-6 shows the

parameters for the EC1-12 card.

Procedure: Modify Line and Threshold Settings for the EC-1 Card

Step 1 Display the EC1-12 in CTC card view.

Sonet Thrshld CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults (Near/Far End):

•15 (15 minutes, STS and VT

Term)

•125 (1 day, STS and VT Term)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (Near/Far End):

•12 (15 minutes, STS and VT

Term)

•100 (1 day, STS and VT Term)

FC Failure count Numeric. Defaults (Near/Far End):

•10 (15 minutes, STS Term)

•10 (1 day, STS Term)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (Near/Far End):

•3 (15 minutes, STS and VT Term)

•7 (1 day, STS and VT Term)

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Defaults (Near/Far End):

•10 (15 minutes, STS and VT

Term)

•10 (1 day, STS and VT Term)

Alarming Port Port number 1 - 6

Profile Sets the alarm profile for the

port

•Default

•Inherited

•Custom profiles (if any)

Suppress

Alarms Suppresses alarm display for

the port

•Unselected (default)

•Selected

Table 7-5 DS3XM-6 Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-15

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Step 2 Click the Provisioning tab.

Step 3 Depending on the setting you need to modify, click the Line, Thresholds, or STS subtab.

Note See Chapter 10, “Alarm Monitoring and Management” for information about the Alarm

Behavior tab.

Step 4 Modify the settings shown in Table 7-6. For drop-down lists, select an item from the list. For numerics,

double-click the field and type the new number.

Table 7-6 EC1-12 Card Parameters

Subtab Parameter Description Options

Line Port # EC-1 card port # 1 - 12

Port Name Name assigned to the port

(optional) To enter a name for the port, click

the cell and type the name. To

change a name, double-click the

cell, then edit the text.

PJStsMon# Sets the STS that will be used

for pointer justification. If set to

zero, no STS is used. See the

“Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on

page 8-12 for more information.

•0 (default)

•1

Line Buildout Defines the distance (in feet)

from backplane to next

termination point

•0 - 225 (default)

•226 - 450

Equalization For early EC1-12 card versions,

equalization can be turned off if

the line length is short or the

environment is extremely cold;

Rx Equalization should

normally be set to On

•On (checked, default)

•Off (unchecked)

Status Places the port in or out of

service

•Out of Service (default)

•In Service

7-16

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Thresholds -

Line CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults:

•1312 (15 minutes)

•13120 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•87 (15 minutes)

•864 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•1 (15 minutes)

•4 (1 day)

FC Failure count Numeric. Defaults:

•10 (15 minutes)

•0 (1 day)

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Defaults:

•3 (15 minutes)

•10 (1 day)

PPJC-Pdet Positive Pointer Justification

Count, STS Path Detected. See

the “Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on

page 8-12 for more information.

Numeric. Defaults (near end):

•60 (15 minutes)

•5760 (1 day)

NPJC-Pdet Negative Pointer Justification

Count, STS Path Detected. See

the “Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on

page 8-12 for more information.

Numeric. Defaults

•0 (15 minutes)

•0 (1 day)

PPJC-Pgen Positive Pointer Justification

Count, STS Path Generated. See

the “Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on

page 8-12 for more information.

Numeric. Defaults:

•0 (15 minutes)

•0 (1 day)

NPJC-Pgen Negative Pointer Justification

Count, STS Path Generated. See

the “Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on

page 8-12 for more information.

Numeric. Defaults:

•0 (15 minutes)

•0 (1 day)

Table 7-6 EC1-12 Card Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-17

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Electrical Cards

Step 5 Click Apply.

Thresholds -

Section CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults (Near End

only):

10000 (15 minutes)

100000 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds 500 (15 minutes)

5000 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds 500 (15 minutes)

5000 (1 day)

SEFS Severely errored framing

seconds 500 (15 minutes)

5000 (1 day)

Thresholds -

Path CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults (Near and Far

End):

15 (15 minutes)

125 (1 day)

ES Errored seconds 12 (15 minutes)

100 (1 day)

FC Failure count 10 (15 minutes)

10 (1 day)

SES Severely errored seconds 3 (15 minutes)

7 (1 day)

UAS Unavailable seconds 10 (15 minutes)

10 (1 day)

STS STS # EC-1 port (Line #) and STS #

available for Intermediate Path

Performance Monitoring.

Enable IPPM Enables IPPM for the EC-1 port

and STS # Unchecked (default); IPPM not

enabled

Checked; IPPM is enabled

Alarming Port Port number 1 - 12

Profile Sets the alarm profile for the

port. Default

Inherited

Custom profiles (if any)

Suppress

Alarms Suppresses alarm display for the

port. Unselected (default)

Selected

Table 7-6 EC1-12 Card Parameters (continued)

Subtab Parameter Description Options

7-18

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Optical Cards

Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 – 5 for each subtab that has parameters you want to provision.

7.3 Provisioning Optical Cards

This section explains how to modify transmission quality by provisioning line and threshold settings for

OC-N cards and how to provision OC-N cards for SDH.

7.3.1 Modifying Transmission Quality

The OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 cards are pre-provisioned with settings that you can modify to

manage transmission quality. Depending on the optical card, you can specify thresholds for near and far

end nodes at the Line, Section, and Path levels for 15-minute and one day intervals.

Procedure: Provision Line Transmission Settings for OC-N Cards

Step 1 Display the OC-N card in CTC card view.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.

Step 3 Modify the settings shown in Table 7-7.

Table 7-7 OC-N Card Line Settings on the Provisioning > Line Tab

Heading Description Options

# Port number •1 (OC-12, OC-48,

OC-192)

•1-4 (OC-3)

SF BER Level Sets the signal fail bit error rate •1E-3

•1E-4 (default)

•1E-5

SD BER Level Sets the signal degrade bit error rate •1E-5

•1E-6

•1E-7 (default)

•1E-8

•1E-9

Provides

Synch If checked, the card is provisioned as a network

element timing reference on the Provisioning >

Timing tabs

Read-only

•Yes (checked)

•No (unchecked)

Enable Synch

Messages Enables synchronization status messages (S1 byte),

which allow the node to choose the best timing

source

•Yes (checked, default)

•No (unchecked)

7-19

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Optical Cards

Step 4 Click Apply.

Procedure: Provision Threshold Settings for OC-N Cards

Step 1 Display the OC-N card in CTC card view (Figure 7-2 on page 7-19).

Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Thresholds tabs.

Figure 7-2 Provisioning thresholds for the OC48 IR 1310 card

Step 3 Modify the settings shown in Table 7-8 on page 7-20.

Default thresholds apply to all optical cards unless otherwise specified.

Send Do Not

Use When checked, sends a DUS (do not use) message on

the S1 byte

•Yes (checked)

•No (unchecked; default)

PJ Sts Mon # Sets the STS that will be used for pointer

justification. If set to 0, no STS is monitored. Only

one STS can be monitored on each OC-N port. See

the “Pointer Justification Count Parameters” section

on page 8-12 for more information.

•0 (default) - 3 (OC-3, per

port)

•0 (default) - 12 (OC-12)

•0 (default) - 48 (OC-48)

•0 (default) - 192 (OC-192)

Status Places port in or out of service •Out of Service (default

•In Service

Type Defines the port as SONET or SDH. See the

“Provisioning OC-N Cards for SDH” section on

page 7-23.

•Sonet

•SDH

Table 7-7 OC-N Card Line Settings on the Provisioning > Line Tab (continued)

Heading Description Options

7-20

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Optical Cards

Table 7-8 OC-N Card Threshold Settings on the Provisioning > Thresholds Tab

Heading Description Options

Port Port number •1, 2, 3, or 4 (OC-3)

•1 (OC-12, OC-48, OC-192)

CV Coding violations Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•1312/13,120 (OC-3 Near & Far End)

•5315/53150 (OC-12 Near & Far End)

•21260/212600 (OC-48 Near & Far End)

•85040/850400 (OC-192 Near & Far End)

Section

•10000/100000 (Near End) 0/0 (Far End)

•10000/500 (OC-192 Near & Far End)

Path

•15/125 (OC-12, OC-48, OC-192 Near & Far

End)

ES Errored seconds Numeric. Default (15 min/1 day):

Line

•87/864 (Near & Far End)

Section

•500/5000 (Near End); 0/0 (Far End)

Path

•12/100 (OC-48 & OC-192 Near & Far End)

SES Severely errored seconds Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•1/4 (Near and Far End)

Section

•500/5000 (Near End); 0/0 (Far End)

Path

•3/7 (OC-48 & OC-192 Near & Far End)

SEFS Severely errored framing seconds Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Section

•500/5000 (Near End); 0/0 (Far End)

7-21

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Optical Cards

FC Failure count Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•10/0 (OC-3, Near and Far End)

•10/40 (OC-12, OC-48, OC-192 Near and Far

End)

Path

•10/10 (OC-12, OC-48, OC-192 Near and Far

End)

UAS Unavailable seconds Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•3/3 (OC-3, Near & Far End

•3/10 (OC-12, OC-48, OC-192 Near and Far

End)

Path

•10/10 (Near and Far End)

PPJC-Pdet Positive Pointer Justification

Count, STS Path detected. See the

“Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on page 8-12

for more information.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•60/5760 Near End

•0/0 Far End

NPJC-Pdet Negative Pointer Justification

Count, STS Path detected. See the

“Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on page 8-12

for more information.

Numeric. Defaults (Near and Far End):

Line

•0 (15 minutes)

•0 (1 day)

PPJC-Pgen Positive Pointer Justification

Count, STS Path generated. See

the “Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on page 8-12

for more information.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•0/0 (Near and Far End)

NPJC-Pgen Negative Pointer Justification

Count, STS Path generated. See

the “Pointer Justification Count

Parameters” section on page 8-12

for more information.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•0/0 (Near and Far End)

PSC Protection Switching Count (Line) Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•1/5 (Near End)

•0/0 (Far End)

Table 7-8 OC-N Card Threshold Settings on the Provisioning > Thresholds Tab (continued)

Heading Description Options

7-22

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Optical Cards

PSD Protection Switch Duration (Line) Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•300/600 (Near End)

•0/0 (all OC-N cards, Far End)

PSC-W Protection Switching Count -

Working line

BLSR is not supported on the

OC-3 card; therefore, the PSC-W,

PSC-S, and PSC-R PMs do not

increment.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•0/0 (all OC-N cards except OC-3, Near and

Far End)

PSD-W Protection Switching Duration -

Working line

BLSR is not supported on the

OC-3 card; therefore, the PSD-W,

PSD-S, and PSD-R PMs do not

increment.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•0/0 (all OC-N cards except OC-3, Near and

Far End)

PSC-S Protection Switching Duration -

Span

BLSR is not supported on the

OC-3 card; therefore, the PSC-W,

PSC-S, and PSC-R PMs do not

increment.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•0/0 (all OC-N cards except OC-3, Near and

Far End)

PSD-S Protection Switching Duration -

Span

BLSR is not supported on the

OC-3 card; therefore, the PSD-W,

PSD-S, and PSD-R PMs do not

increment.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•0/0 (all OC-N cards except OC-3, Near and

Far End)

PSC-R Protection Switching Duration -

Ring

BLSR is not supported on the

OC-3 card; therefore, the PSC-W,

PSC-S, and PSC-R PMs do not

increment.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•0/0 (all OC-N cards except OC-3, Near and

Far End)

PSD-R Protection Switching Duration -

Ring

BLSR is not supported on the

OC-3 card; therefore, the PSD-W,

PSD-S, and PSD-R PMs do not

increment.

Numeric. Defaults (15 min/1 day):

Line

•0/0 (all OC-N cards except OC-3, Near and

Far End)

Table 7-8 OC-N Card Threshold Settings on the Provisioning > Thresholds Tab (continued)

Heading Description Options

7-23

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning Optical Cards

Click Apply.

7.3.2 Provisioning OC-N Cards for SDH

You can provision the ONS 15454 OC-3, OC-12, and OC-48 cards to support either SONET or SDH over

SONET signals. When provisioned for SDH, each OC-N port drops and inserts STM traffic in

unprotected or 1+1 protection mode. Each STM-1 signal is mapped as a 155 Mbps concatenated signal

(STS-3c) for transparent transport over a SONET network. The original STM-1 traffic may be handed

off as an STM-1 or OC-3.

Because SDH and SONET frame format and size are nearly identical, their line speeds meet, starting at

155 Mbps. For example, at the STM-1/OC-3 level, the ONS 15454 performs section and line overhead

conversions and maps the 261x9 byte VC-4 into an STS-3c for transparent transport across the SONET

domain. At the far end, the STS-3c carrying the original VC-4 is remapped into an STM-1 for handoff

to an SDH network element (node). Table 7-9 shows the SDH over SONET mapping for the ONS 15454

OC-N cards.

The ONS 15454 performs section, line overhead, and pointer conversions between SDH and SONET.

However, to ensure operability, the following requirements must be met:

•The embedded payload must be compatible on both sides and require no conversion of any kind.

Examples of such payloads include concatenated ATM or Packet over SONET/SDH signals.

•The path overhead (POH) must be compatible on both sides and require no conversion of any kind.

Each overhead byte must be processed identically or simultaneously ignored. Key POH bytes to

consider are the J1 (path indicator) and C2 (payload format).

•You cannot enable intermediate path protection monitoring (IPPM) on OC-12 and OC-48 ports that

are enabled for SDH.

Most SONET and SDH routers and ATM switches can be configured to meet these requirements.

Procedure: Provision an OC-N Card for SDH

Step 1 Log into the node and double-click the OC-N card.

Step 2 Click the Provisioning > Line tabs.

Step 3 Under Type, choose SDH.

Step 4 Click Apply.

Ta b l e 7 - 9 O C - N – SDH Over SONET Mapping

Card SDH SDH over SONET

OC-3 STM-1 STS-3c

OC-12 STM-4 STS-12c

OC-48 STM-16 STS-48c

OC-192 STM-64 STS-192c

7-24

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning IPPM

7.4 Provisioning IPPM

Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring (IPPM) allows you to transparently monitor traffic

originating on DS-1, DS-3, DS3E and DS3XM cards (Path Terminating Equipment) as it passes through

EC-1, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 cards (Line Terminating Equipment). To use IPPM, you create

the STS circuit on the DS-N cards, then enable IPPM on the EC-1 or OC-N cards that carry the circuit.

Note For Release 3.0 and later, IPPM is enabled for near-end (originating) traffic only. Far-end

(terminating) IPPM will be enabled in a future release.

For example, suppose you have an STS circuit that originates and terminates on DS-N cards at Nodes 1

and 4. You want to monitor the circuit as it passes through OC-N cards at Nodes 2 and 3. To do this, you

enable IPPM on the OC-N card by selecting the appropriate STS, in this example, STS 1 (Figure 7-3).

Figure 7-3 IPPM provisioned for STS 1 on an OC-12 card

After enabling IPPM, performance is displayed on the Performance tab for the OC-48 card. IPPM

enables per-path statistics for STS CV-P (coding violations), STS ES-P (errored seconds), STS FC-P

(failure count), STS SES-P (severely errored seconds), and STS UAS-P (unavailable seconds). Only one

STS per port can be monitored at one time. See Chapter 8, “Performance Monitoring” for a definition of

every parameter.

7-25

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning the Alarm Interface Controller

Procedure: Enable Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring

Step 1 If the STS circuit does not exist, create the circuit. (The circuit must pass through the EC-1 or OC-N card

before you can enable IPPM on the circuit.)

Step 2 In CTC, open the card view of an EC-1 or OC-N card that carries the circuit.

Step 3 Select the Provisioning > STS tabs.

Step 4 Click Enable IPPM for the STS you want to monitor.

Step 5 Click Apply.

7.5 Provisioning the Alarm Interface Controller

The Alarm Interface Controller (AIC) card can be provisioned to receive input from, or send output to,

external devices wired to the ONS 15454 backplane. (For detailed specifications about the AIC, refer to

the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide.) You can provision the AIC to:

•Generate CTC alarms based on events such as heating or cooling equipment failure, fire alarms,

smoke detection, and other environmental changes that can damage ONS 15454 equipment. These

are called external alarms.

•Turn external devices on or off based on a CTC alarm. For example, you can provision the AIC to

turn on an audio or visual device, such as a bell or light, when a critical ONS 15454 alarm occurs.

These triggers are called external controls.

Figure 7-4 shows the flow to and from external devices provisioned through the AIC.

7-26

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning the Alarm Interface Controller

Figure 7-4 AIC alarm input and output

7.5.1 Using Virtual Wires

Provisioning the AIC card provides a “virtual wires” option used to route external alarms and controls

from different nodes to one or more alarm collection centers. In Figure 7-5, smoke detectors at Nodes 1,

2, 3, and 4 are assigned to Virtual Wire #1, and Virtual Wire #1 is provisioned as the trigger for an

external bell at Node 1.

RelayRelay

CTC alarm turns on

an external device External device

generates CTC alarm

External control External alarms

Heat

sensor

Smoke

detector

Light

Bell

38566

= External alarm

= External control

7-27

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning the Alarm Interface Controller

Figure 7-5 External alarms and controls using a virtual wire

When using AIC virtual wires, you can:

•Assign different external devices to the same virtual wire.

•Assign virtual wires as the trigger type for different external controls.

Procedure: Provision External Alarms

Step 1 Wire the external-device relays to the ENVIR ALARMS IN backplane pins. See the “Alarm, Timing,

LAN, and Craft Pin Connections” section on page 1-32 for more information.

Step 2 Log into the node in CTC and display the AIC in card view.

Step 3 Click the Provisioning > External Alarms tabs (Figure 7-6 on page 7-28).

Step 4 Complete the following fields for each external device wired to the ONS 15454 backplane:

•Enabled—Click to activate the fields for the alarm input number.

•Alarm Type—Select an alarm type from the provided list.

ONS 15454

Node 1

Virtual Wire #1 is

external control

trigger

Virtual Wire #1

Smoke

detector

Bell

Smoke

detector

ONS 15454

Node 2

ONS 15454

Node 3

ONS 15454

Node 4

Virtual Wire #1

Virtual Wire #1 Virtual Wire #1

= External alarm

= External control

Smoke

detector

Smoke

detector

44743

7-28

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning the Alarm Interface Controller

•Severity—Select a severity. The severity determines how the alarm is displayed in the CTC Alarms

and History tabs and whether the LEDs are activated. Critical, Major, and Minor activate the

appropriate LEDs. Not Alarmed and Not Reported do not activate LEDs, but do report the

information in CTC.

•Virtual Wire—To assign the external device to a virtual wire, select the virtual wire. Otherwise, do

not change the None default.

•Raised When—Select the contact condition (open or closed) that will trigger the alarm in CTC.

•Description—Default descriptions are provided for each alarm type; change the description as

necessary.

Figure 7-6 Provisioning external alarms on the AIC card

Step 5 To provision additional devices, complete Step 4 for each additional device.

Step 6 Click Apply.

Procedure: Provision External Controls

Step 1 Wire the external control relays to the ENVIR ALARMS OUT backplane pins. See the “Alarm, Timing,

LAN, and Craft Pin Connections” section on page 1-32 for more information.

Step 2 In CTC, log into the node and display the AIC in card view.

Step 3 On the External Controls subtab, complete the following fields for each external control wired to the

ONS 15454 backplane:

•Enabled—Click to activate the fields for the alarm input number.

•Trigger Type—Select a trigger type: a local minor, major, or critical alarm; a remote minor, major,

or critical alarm; or a virtual wire activation.

7-29

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Provisioning the Alarm Interface Controller

•Description—Enter a description.

Step 4 To provision additional controls, complete Step 3 for each additional device.

Step 5 Click Apply.

7.5.2 Provisioning AIC Orderwire

The AIC provides RJ-11 jacks to allow onsite personnel to communicate with one another using standard

phone sets. The AIC Local and Express orderwire channels are carried on the SONET Orderwire

overhead:

•Local orderwire is carried on the SONET Section layer E1 byte. Regenerators between ONS 15454

nodes terminate the channel.

•Express orderwire is carried on the E2 byte of the SONET Line layer.

If regenerators are not used between ONS 15454 nodes, local or express AIC orderwire channels can be

used. If regenerators exist, use the Express orderwire channel. You can provision up to four ONS 15454

OC-N ports for each orderwire path.

Caution When provisioning orderwire for ONS 15454s residing in a ring, do not provision a complete

orderwire loop. For example, a four-node ring typically has east and west ports provisioned at all four

nodes. However, to prevent orderwire loops, provision two orderwire ports (east and west) at all but

one of the ring nodes.

Procedure: Provision AIC Orderwire

Tip Before you begin, make a list of the ONS 15454 slots and ports that require orderwire

communication.

Step 1 In CTC, open the AIC card view.

Step 2 Select the orderwire subtab, Local Orderwire or Express Orderwire, appropriate to the orderwire path

that you want to create.

The Local Orderwire subtab is shown in Figure 7-7 on page 7-30. Provisioning procedures are the same

for both types of orderwire.

7-30

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Converting DS-1 and DS-3 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N Protection

Figure 7-7 Provisioning local orderwire

Step 3 In the Available Ports list, select each port that you want to use for the orderwire channel and click Add

to move them to the Selected Ports column.

Step 4 If needed, adjust the Tx and Rx dBm by moving the slider to the right or left for the headset type

(four-wire or two-wire) that you will use. In general, you should not need to adjust the dBm.

Step 5 Click Apply.

7.5.3 Using the AIC Orderwire

The AIC orderwire channels function as a party line. Anyone plugging a phone set into an AIC orderwire

channel can communicate with all participants on the connected orderwire. The AIC does not provide

private, point-to-point connections. To alert participants, press the AIC Call button to activate a buzzer

and illuminate the RING LED on AICs at all connected nodes.

7.6 Converting DS-1 and DS-3 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N Protection

The ONS 15454 provides three protection options for DS1-14 and DS3-12 cards: unprotected, 1:1, and

1:N (N=5 or less). Changing protection from 1:1 to 1:N increases the available bandwidth because two

of the three cards used for protection in the 1:1 protection group become working cards in the 1:N group.

When setting up 1:N protection, install the DS1N-14 or DS3N-12 card in Slot 3 or 15 on the same side

of the ONS 15454 as the cards it protects. Slot 3 protects cards in Slots 1 - 2 and 4 - 6. Slot 15 protects

Slots 12 - 14 and 16 - 17. A DS1N-14 or DS3N-12 card installed in Slot 3 or 15 can protect up to five

DS1-14 or DS3-12 cards. If you install a DS3N-12 or DS1N-14 card in another slot, it behaves like a

normal DS-1 or DS-3 card.

7-31

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Converting DS-1 and DS-3 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N Protection

To create 1:1 protection for DS-1 and DS-3 cards, see the “Creating Protection Groups” section on

page 3-9.

Procedure: Convert DS1-14 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N Protection

Note This procedure assumes DS1-14 cards are installed in Slots 1 through 6 and/or Slots 12 through 17.

The DS1-14 cards in Slots 3 and 15, which are the protection slots, will be replaced with DS1N-14

cards. The ONS 15454 must run CTC Release 2.0 or later. The procedure also requires at least one

DS1N-14 card and a protection group with DS1-14 cards.

Step 1 In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.

Step 2 Click the protection group that contains Slot 3 or Slot 15 (where you will install the DS1N-14 card).

Step 3 Make sure the slot you are upgrading is not carrying working traffic. In the Selected Group list, the

protect slot must say Protect/Standby (shown in Figure 7-8 on page 7-32) and not Protect/Active. If the

protect slot status is Protect/Active, use the following steps to switch traffic to the working card:

a. Under Selected Group, click the protect card.

b. Next to Switch Commands, click Switch.

The working slot should change to Working/Active and the protect slot should change to

Protect/Standby. If they do not change, do not continue. Troubleshoot the working card and slot to

determine why the card cannot carry working traffic.

c. Next to Switch Commands, select Clear.

7-32

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Converting DS-1 and DS-3 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N Protection

Figure 7-8 Viewing slot protection status

Step 4 Repeat Steps 1 – 3 for each protection group that you need to convert.

Step 5 Verify that no standing alarms exist for any of the DS1-14 cards that you are converting. If alarms exist

and you have difficulty clearing them, contact your next level of support.

Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.

Step 7 Click the 1:1 protection group that contains the cards that you will move into the new protection group.

Step 8 Click Delete.

Step 9 When the confirmation dialog displays, click Yes.

Note Deleting the 1:1 protection groups does not disrupt service. However, no protection

bandwidth exists for the working circuits until you complete the 1:N protection procedure.

Therefore, complete this procedure as quickly as possible.

Step 10 If needed, repeat Steps 7– 9 for other protection groups.

Step 11 On the node view, right-click the DS1-14 card in Slot 3 or Slot 15 and select Delete from the shortcut

menu.

Step 12 Physically remove the DS1-14 card from Slot 3 or Slot 15. This raises an improper removal alarm.

Step 13 In node view, right-click the slot that held the removed card and select delete from the pull-down menu.

Wait for the card to disappear from the node view.

7-33

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Converting DS-1 and DS-3 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N Protection

Step 14 Physically insert a DS1N-14 card into the same slot.

Step 15 Verify that the card boots up properly.

Step 16 Click the Inventory tab and verify that the new card appears as a DS1N-14.

Step 17 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.

Step 18 Click Create. The Create Protection Group dialog opens with the protect card in the Protect Card field

and the available cards in the Available Cards field.

Step 19 Type a name for the protection group in the Name field (optional).

Step 20 Click Type and choose 1:N (card) from the pull-down menu.

Step 21 Verify that the DS1N-14 card appears in the Protect Card field.

Step 22 Under Available Cards, highlight the cards that you want in the protection group. Click the arrow (>>)

tab to move the cards to the Working Cards list.

Step 23 Click OK. The protection group appears in the Protection Groups list on the Protection subtab.

Procedure: Convert DS3-12 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N Protection

Note This procedure assumes that DS3-12 cards are installed in Slots 1 - 6 and/or Slots 12 - 17. The

DS3-12 cards in Slots 3 and 15, which are the protection slots, will be replaced with DS3N-12 cards.

The ONS 15454 must run CTC Release 2.0 or later. The procedure also requires at least one DS3N-12

card and a protection group with DS3-12 cards.

Step 1 In node view, click the Maintenance > Protection tabs.

Step 2 Click the protection group containing Slot 13 or Slot 15 (where you will install the DS3N-12 card).

Step 3 Make sure the slot you are upgrading is not carrying working traffic. In the Selected Group list, the

protect slot must say Protect/Standby as shown in Figure 7-8 on page 7-32, and not Protect/Active. If the

protect slot status is Protect/Active, use the following steps to switch traffic to the working card:

a. Under Selected Group, click the protect card.

b. Next to Switch Commands, click Switch.

The working slot should change to Working/Active and the protect slot should change to

Protect/Standby. If they fail to change, do not continue. Troubleshoot the working card and slot to

determine why the card cannot carry working traffic.

c. Next to Switch Commands, click Clear.

Step 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for each protection group that you need to convert.

Step 5 Verify that no standing alarms exist for any of the DS3-12 cards you are converting. If alarms exist and

you have difficulty clearing them, contact your next level of support.

Step 6 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.

Step 7 Click the 1:1 protection group that contains the cards that you will move into the new protection group.

Step 8 Click Delete.

Step 9 When the confirmation dialog displays, click Yes.

7-34

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 7 Card Provisioning

Converting DS-1 and DS-3 Cards From 1:1 to 1:N Protection

Note Deleting the 1:1 protection groups will not disrupt service. However, no protection

bandwidth exists for the working circuits until the 1:N protection procedure is completed. Do

not delay when completing this procedure.

Step 10 If you are deleting more than one protection group, repeat Steps 7–9 for each group.

Step 11 On the node view, right-click the DS3-12 card in Slot 3 or Slot 15 and choose Delete from the shortcut

menu.

Step 12 Physically remove the DS3-12 card from Slot 3 or Slot 15. This raises an improper removal alarm.

Step 13 In node view, right-click the slot that held the removed card and choose Delete from the pull-down menu.

Wait for the card to disappear from the node view.

Step 14 Physically insert a DS3N-12 card into the same slot.

Step 15 Verify that the card boots up properly.

Step 16 Click the Inventory tab and verify that the new card appears as a DS3N-12.

Step 17 Click the Provisioning > Protection tabs.

Step 18 Click Create.

The Create Protection Group dialog shows the protect card in the Protect Card field and the available

cards in the Available Cards field.

Step 19 Type a name for the protection group in the Name field (optional).

Step 20 Click Type and choose 1:N (card) from the pull-down menu.

Step 21 Verify that the DS3N-12 card appears in the Protect Card field.

Step 22 In the Available Cards list, highlight the cards that you want in the protection group. Click the arrow

(>>) tab to move the cards to the Working Cards list.

Step 23 Click OK.

The protection group should appear in the Protection Groups list on the Protection subtab.

CHAPTER

8-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Performance Monitoring

Performance monitoring parameters (PMs) are used by service providers to gather, store, threshold, and

report performance data for early detection of problems. PM terms are defined for both electrical cards

and optical cards.

This chapter provides the:

•“Using the Performance Monitoring Screen” section on page 8-1

•“Changing Thresholds” section on page 8-9

•“Enabling Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring” section on page 8-10

•“Pointer Justification Count Parameters” section on page 8-12

•“Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards” section on page 8-14

•“Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards” section on page 8-33

For information about:

•Ethernet PMs, see Chapter 9, “Ethernet Operation”

•Troubleshooting UPSR switch counts, see the alarm troubleshooting information in the Cisco ONS

15454 Troubleshooting and Reference Guide, Release 3.1

•Editing UPSR circuits, see Chapter 6, “Circuits and Tunnels.”

•Digital transmission surveillance, see Telcordia’s GR-1230-CORE, GR-820-CORE, and

GR-253-CORE documents and the ANSI document entitled Digital Hierarchy - Layer 1 In-Service

Digital Transmission Performance Monitoring

8.1 Using the Performance Monitoring Screen

The following sections describe how to use basic screen elements such as tabs, menus, and informational

columns. Figure 8-1 shows the Performance tab of Cisco Transport Controller (CTC) card-level view.

8-2

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Using the Performance Monitoring Screen

Figure 8-1 Viewing performance monitoring information

8.1.1 Viewing PMs

Before you view PMs, be sure you have created the appropriate circuits and provisioned the card

according to your specifications. For information about circuit creation and card provisioning, see the

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide.

Procedure: View PMs

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. Double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node) view or

right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Performance tab.

Step 3 View the PM parameter names that appear on the left portion of the screen in the Param column. The

parameter numbers appear on the right portion of the screen in the Curr (current), and Prev (previous)

columns.

8.1.2 Changing the Screen Intervals

Changing the screen view allows you to view PMs in 15-minute intervals or 24-hour periods. Figure 8-2

shows the time interval buttons on the Performance Monitoring screen.

55379

Performance tab

Card view

8-3

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Using the Performance Monitoring Screen

Figure 8-2 Time interval buttons on the card view Performance tab

Procedure: Select Fifteen-Minute PM Intervals on the Performance Monitoring Screen

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. Double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node) view or

right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Performance tab.

Step 3 Click the 15 min button.

Step 4 Click the Refresh button. Performance monitoring parameters display in 15-minute intervals

synchronized with the time of day.

Step 5 View the Current column to find PM counts for the current 15-minute interval.

Each monitored performance parameter has corresponding threshold values for the current time period.

If the value of the counter exceeds the threshold value for a particular 15-minute interval, a threshold

crossing alert (TCA) will be raised. The value represents the counter for each specific performance

monitoring parameter.

Step 6 View the Prev-N columns to find PM counts for the preceding 15-minute intervals.

5378

Fifteen-minute and twenty-four hour intervals

8-4

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Using the Performance Monitoring Screen

Note If a complete 15-minute interval count is not possible, the value displays with a yellow background.

An incomplete or incorrect count can be caused by changing node timing settings, changing the time

zone settings on CTC, replacing a card, resetting a card, changing port states, or by using the Baseline

button. When a complete count occurs, the subsequent 15-minute interval appears with a white

background.

Procedure: Select Twenty-Four Hour PM Intervals on the Performance Monitoring Screen

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. Double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node) view or

right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Performance tab.

Step 3 Click the 1 day button.

Step 4 Click the Refresh button. Performance monitoring displays in 24-hour periods synchronized with the

time of day.

Step 5 View the Current column to find PM counts for the current 24-hour period.

Each monitored performance parameter has corresponding threshold values for the current time period.

If the value of the counter exceeds the threshold value for a particular 24-hour period, a threshold

crossing alert (TCA) will be raised. The value represents the counter for each specific performance

monitoring parameter.

Step 6 View the Prev columns to find PM counts for the preceding 24-hour period.

Note If a complete count over a 24-hour period is not possible, the value displays with a yellow

background. An incomplete or incorrect count can be caused by changing node timing settings,

changing the time zone settings on CTC, replacing a card, resetting a card, changing port states, or

by using the Baseline button. When a complete count occurs, the subsequent 24-hour period appears

with a white background.

8.1.3 Viewing Near End and Far End PMs

Select the Near End or Far End button depending on the PMs you wish to view. Only cards that allow

both near-end and far-end monitoring have these buttons as an option. Figure 8-3 on page 8-5 shows the

Near End and Far End buttons on the Performance Monitoring screen.

8-5

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Using the Performance Monitoring Screen

Figure 8-3 Near End and Far End buttons on the card view Performance tab

Procedure: Select Near End PMs on the Performance Monitoring Screen

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. Double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node) view or

right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Performance tab.

Step 3 Click the Near End button.

Step 4 Click the Refresh button. All PMs occurring for the selected card on the incoming signal are displayed.

Procedure: Select Far End PMs on the Performance Monitoring Screen

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. To do so, double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node)

view or right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Performance tab.

Step 3 Click the Far End button.

Step 4 Click the Refresh button. All PMs recorded by the far-end node for the selected card on the outgoing

signal are displayed.

55377

Near End and Far End buttons

8-6

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Using the Performance Monitoring Screen

8.1.4 Using the Signal-Type Menu

Use the signal-type menus to monitor PMs for near-end or far-end signals on a selected port. Different

signal-type menus appear depending on the card type and the circuit type. The appropriate types (DS1,

DS3, VT path, STS path, OCn section, line) appear based on the card. For example, the DS3XM has DS3,

DS1, VT path, and STS path PMs. Figure 8-4 shows the signal-type menus on the Performance

Monitoring screen for a DS3XM-6 card.

Figure 8-4 Signal-type menus for a DS3XM-6 card

Procedure: Select Signal-Type Menus on the Performance Monitoring Screen

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. Double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node) view or

right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Performance tab.

Step 3 Click the signal-type menu. (For example, the DS3XM card has menus labeled DS3, DS1, VT, and STS.)

Step 4 Select a port using the signal-type menu.

55376

Signal-type menus

8-7

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Using the Performance Monitoring Screen

8.1.5 Using the Baseline Button

In Software R3.0 and higher, the Baseline button located on the far right of the screen clears the PM

count displayed in the Current column, but does not clear the PM count on the card. When the current

15-minute or 24-hour time interval expires or the screen view changes, the total number of PM counts

on the card and on the screen appear in the appropriate column.

The baseline values are discarded if you change views to a different screen and then return to the

Performance Monitoring screen. The Baseline button enables you to easily see how quickly PM counts

are rising without having to perform calculations. Figure 8-5 shows the Baseline button on the

Performance Monitoring screen.

Figure 8-5 Baseline button for clearing displayed PM counts

Procedure: Use the Baseline Button on the Performance Monitoring Screen

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. Double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node) view or

right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Performance tab.

Step 3 Click the Baseline button.

55375

Baseline button

8-8

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Using the Performance Monitoring Screen

8.1.6 Using the Clear Button

The Clear button located on the far right of the Performance Monitoring screen clears certain PM counts

depending on the option selected. Figure 8-6 shows the Clear button on the Performance Monitoring

screen.

Caution Pressing the Clear button can potentially mask problems if used incorrectly. This button is commonly

used for testing purposes.

Figure 8-6 Clear button for clearing PM counts

Procedure: Use the Clear Button on the Performance Monitoring Screen

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. Double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node) view or

right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Performance tab.

Step 3 Click the Clear button.

Step 4 From the Clear Statistics menu, choose one of three options:

•Selected Interfaces: Clearing selected interfaces erases all PM counts associated with the selected

radio buttons. For example, if the 15 min and the Near End buttons are selected and you click the

Clear button, all near-end PM counts in the current 15-minute interval are erased from the card and

the screen display.

61380

Clear button

8-9

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Changing Thresholds

•All interfaces on port x: Clearing all interfaces on port x erases from the card and the screen display

all PM counts associated with all combinations of the radio buttons on the selected port. This means

the 15-minute near-end and far-end counts are cleared, and 24-hour near-end and far-end counts are

cleared from the card and the screen display.

•All interfaces on card: Clearing all interfaces on the card erases from the card and the screen

display all PM counts for data and ports on all interfaces.

Step 5 From the Zero Data menu, click Yes to clear the selected statistics.

Note The Ethernet cards are the only cards without the Clear button option.

8.2 Changing Thresholds

Thresholds are used to set error levels for each PM. You can program PM threshold ranges from the

Provisioning > Threshold tabs on the card view. For procedures on provisioning card thresholds, such as

line, path, and SONET thresholds, see Chapter 7, “Card Provisioning.”

During the accumulation cycle, if the current value of a performance monitoring parameter reaches or

exceeds its corresponding threshold value, a threshold crossing alert (TCA) is generated by the node and

sent to CTC. TCAs provide early detection of performance degradation. When a threshold is crossed,

the node continues to count the errors during a given accumulation period. If 0 is entered as the threshold

value, the performance monitoring parameter is disabled. Figure 8-7 shows the Provisioning >

Threshold tabs for an OC-48 card.

8-10

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Enabling Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring

Figure 8-7 Threshold tab for setting threshold values

Change the threshold if the default value does not satisfy your error monitoring needs. For example,

customers with a critical DS1 installed for 911 calls must guarantee the best quality of service on the

line; therefore, they lower all thresholds so that the slightest error raises a TCA.

8.3 Enabling Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring

Intermediate-path performance monitoring (IPPM) allows transparent monitoring of a constituent

channel of an incoming transmission signal by a node that does not terminate that channel. Many large

ONS 15454 networks only use line terminating equipment (LTE) not path terminating equipment (PTE).

Table 8-1 shows ONS 15454 cards that are considered LTEs. Figure 8-8 shows the Provisioning > STS

tabs for an OC-3 card.

61945

Threshold tab Provisioning tab Card view

Table 8-1 Traffic Cards That Terminate the Line, Called LTEs

Line Terminating Equipment

EC1-12 OC3 IR 4/STM1 SH 1310

OC12 IR/STM4 SH 1310 OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1310

OC12 LR/STM4 LH 1550 OC48 IR 1310

OC48 LR 1550 OC48 IR/STM16 SH AS 1310

OC48 LR/STM16 LH AS 1550 OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 100 GHz

OC48 ELR/STM16 EH 200 GHz OC192 LR/STM64 LH 1550

8-11

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Enabling Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring

Figure 8-8 STS tab for enabling IPPM

Software R3.0 and higher allows LTE cards to monitor near-end PM data on individual STS payloads by

enabling IPPM. After enabling IPPM provisioning on the line card, service providers can monitor large

amounts of STS traffic through intermediate nodes, thus making troubleshooting and maintenance

activities more efficient.

IPPM occurs only on STS paths which have IPPM enabled, and TCAs are raised only for PM parameters

on the selected IPPM paths. The monitored IPPMs are STS CV-P, STS ES-P, STS SES-P, STS UAS-P,

and STS FC-P. For detailed information about provisioning cards and the procedure for enabling IPPM,

see Chapter 7, “Card Provisioning.”

Note The far-end IPPM feature is not supported in Software R3.1. However, SONET path PMs can be

monitored by logging into the far-end node directly.

The ONS 15454 performs IPPM by examining the overhead in the monitored path and by reading all of

the near-end path PMs in the incoming direction of transmission. The IPPM process allows the path

signal to pass bidirectionally through the node completely unaltered.

For detailed information about specific PMs, locate the card name in the following sections and review

the appropriate definition.

61946

STS tab Provisioning tab Card view

8-12

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Pointer Justification Count Parameters

8.4 Pointer Justification Count Parameters

Pointers are used to compensate for frequency and phase variations. Pointer justification counts indicate

timing errors on SONET networks. There are positive (PPJC) and negative (NPJC) pointer justification

count parameters. PPJC is a count of path-detected (PPJC-Pdet) or path-generated (PPJC-Pgen) positive

pointer justifications. NPJC is a count of path-detected (NPJC-Pdet) or path-generated (NPJC-Pgen)

negative pointer justifications depending on the specific PM name.

Figure 8-9 shows pointer justification count parameters on the Performance Monitoring screen. You can

enable PPJC and NPJC performance monitoring parameters for LTE cards. See Table 8-1 on page 8-10

for a list of Cisco ONS 15454 LTE cards.

For pointer justification count definitions, see the “EC1 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters”

section on page 8-14, the “OC-3 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters” section on page 8-33, or the

“OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters” section on page 8-37

depending on the cards in use.

Figure 8-9 Viewing pointer justification count parameters

Pointers provide a way to align the phase variations in STS and VT payloads. The STS payload pointer is

located in the H1 and H2 bytes of the line overhead. Clocking differences are measured by the offset in

bytes from the pointer to the first byte of the STS synchronous payload envelope (SPE) called the J1

byte. Clocking differences that exceed the normal range of 0 to 782 can cause data loss.

A consistent pointer justification count indicates clock synchronization problems between nodes.

Detected and generated counts should be equal. A difference between the counts means the node

transmitting the original pointer justification has timing variations with the node detecting and

transmitting this count. Positive pointer adjustments occur when the frame rate of the SPE is too slow in

relation to the rate of the STS 1.

61947

Performance tab Card viewPointer justification counts

8-13

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Pointer Justification Count Parameters

On CTC, the count fields for PPJC and NPJC PMs appear white and blank unless they are enabled on

the Provisioning > Line tabs. Figure 8-10 shows the PJStsMon# menu on the Provisioning screen.

Figure 8-10 Line tab for enabling pointer justification count parameters

Procedure: Enable Pointer Justification Count Performance Monitoring

Step 1 Open the electrical or optical card of choice. Double-click the card’s graphic in the main (node) view or

right-click the card and select Open Card. (Clicking a card once highlights the card only.)

Step 2 From the card view, click the Provisioning > Line tabs.

Step 3 Click the PJStsMon# menu and select a number.

•The value of 0 means pointer justification monitoring is disabled.

•The values 1-N are the STS numbers on one port. One STS per port can be enabled from the

PJStsMon# menu.

EC1 PJStsMon# card menu: 0 or 1 can be selected on a total of 12 ports.

OC-3 PJStsMon# card menu: 1, 2, or 3 can be selected on a total of 4 ports.

OC-12 PJStsMon# card menu: 1 or any number through 12 can be selected on 1 port.

OC-48 PJStsMon# card menu: 1 or any number through 48 can be selected on 1 port.

OC-192 PJStsMon# card menu: 1 or any number through 192 can be selected on 1 port.

Step 4 Click Apply and return to the Performance tab to view PM parameters.

61948

Provisioning tabLine tab Card view

8-14

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

8.5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

The following sections define performance monitoring parameters for the EC1, DS1, DS1N, DS3,

DS3N, DS3-12E, DS3N-12E, and DS3XM electrical cards.

8.5.1 EC1 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters

Figure 8-11 shows signal types that support far-end PMs. Far-end performance monitoring is not

reported for EC1. Figure 8-12 shows where overhead bytes detected on the application specific

integrated circuits (ASICs) produce performance monitoring parameters for the EC1 card.

Figure 8-11 Monitored signal types for the EC1 card

Note The XX in the illustration above represents all PMs listed below with the given prefix and/or suffix.

Figure 8-12 PM read points on the EC1 card

55310

ONS 15454

EC1 OC48

Fiber

Near End

EC1 Signal

EC1 Path (EC1 XX) Far End PMs Not Supported

ONS 15454

EC1OC48

Far End

EC1 Signal

STS Path (STS XX-P) Far End PMs Not Supported

55304

ONS 15454

EC1 Card

LIU

Framer

BTC

Tx/Rx

XC10G Card OC-N

Line Side

Path

Level

SONET Side

STS CV-P

STS ES-P

STS FC-P

STS SES-P

STS UAS-P

CV-S

ES-S

SES-S

SEFS-S

CV-L

SES-L

ES-L

UAS-L

FC-L

PPJC-Pdet

NPJC-Pdet

PPJC-Pgen

NPJC-Pgen

PMs read on Framer

8-15

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Note SONET path PMs will not count unless IPPM is enabled. For additional information, see the “Enable

Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring” procedure on page 7-25. The far-end IPPM feature is

not supported in Software R3.1. However, SONET path PMs can be monitored by logging into the

far-end node directly.

Table 8-2 Near-End Section PMs for the EC1 Card

Parameter Definition

CV-S Section Coding Violation (CV-S) is a count of BIP errors detected at the

section-layer (i.e. using the B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal). Up

to eight section BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame; each error

increments the current CV-S second register.

ES-S Section Errored Seconds (ES-S) is a count of the number of seconds when

at least one section-layer BIP error was detected or an SEF or loss of

signal (LOS) defect was present.

SES-S Section Severely Errored Seconds (SES-S) is a count of the seconds when

K (see GR-253-CORE for value) or more section-layer BIP errors were

detected or a severely errored frame (SEF) or LOS defect was present.

SEFS-S Section Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS-S) is a count of the

seconds when an SEF defect was present. An SEF defect is expected

during most seconds where an LOS or loss of frame (LOF) defect is

present. However, there may be situations when that is not the case, and

the SEFS-S parameter is only incremented based on the presence of the

SEF defect.

Table 8-3 Near-End Line Layer PMs for the EC1 Card

Parameter Definition

CV-L Near-End Line Code Violation (CV-L) is a count of BIP errors detected at

the line-layer (i.e. using the B2 bytes in the incoming SONET signal). Up

to 8 x N BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame, with each error

incrementing the current CV-L second register.

ES-L Near-End Line Errored Seconds (ES-L) is a count of the seconds when at

least one line-layer BIP error was detected or an alarm indication

signal-line (AIS-L) defect was present.

SES-L Near-End Line Severely Errored Seconds (SES-L) is a count of the

seconds when K (see GR-253 for values) or more line-layer BIP errors

were detected or an AIS-L defect was present.

8-16

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

UAS-L Near-End Line Unavailable Seconds (UAS-L) is a count of the seconds

when the line is unavailable. A line becomes unavailable when ten

consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ls, and the line continues

to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify

as SES-Ls.

FC-L Near-End Line Failure Count (FC-L) is a count of the number of near-end

line failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-L failure or a

lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end failure is declared. This failure event

ends when the failure is cleared. A failure event that begins in one period

and ends in another period is counted only in the period where it begins.

Table 8-4 Near-End SONET Path PMs for the EC1 Card

Parameter Definition

Note SONET path PMs will not count unless IPPM is enabled. For additional information, see the

“Enable Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring” procedure on page 7-25. The far-end

IPPM feature is not supported in Software R3.1. However, SONET path PMs can be monitored

by logging into the far-end node directly.

STS CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors

detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP

errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P

second register.

STS ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds

when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. STS ES-P can also be

caused by an AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end

defect) or an LOP-P defect.

STS FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of

near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P

failure, an LOP-P failure, a unequipped path (UNEQ-P) or a trace

identifier mismatch (TIM-P) failure is declared. A failure event also

begins if the STS PTE monitoring the path supports ERDI-P for that path.

The failure event ends when these failures are cleared.

STS SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the

seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. STS

SES-P can also be caused by an AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer,

traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P defect.

STS UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the

seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps,

and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that

do not qualify as SES-Ps.

Table 8-3 Near-End Line Layer PMs for the EC1 Card (continued)

Parameter Definition

8-17

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Table 8-5 Near-End SONET Path BIP PMs for the EC1 Card

Parameter Definition

PPJC-Pdet Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (PPJC-Pdet) is a

count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path in

an incoming SONET signal.

NPJC-Pdet Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (NPJC-Pdet) is a

count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path in

an incoming SONET signal.

PPJC-Pgen Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (PPJC-Pgen) is

a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path

to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock.

NPJC-Pgen Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (NPJC-Pgen) is

a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular

path to reconcile the frequency of the synchronous payload envelope

(SPE) with the local clock.

Table 8-6 Far-End Line Layer PMs for the EC-1 Card

Parameter Definition

CV-L Far-End Line Code Violation (CV-L) is a count of BIP errors detected by

the far-end line terminating equipment (LTE) and reported back to the

near-end LTE using the REI-L indication in the line overhead. For SONET

signals at rates below OC-48, up to 8 x N BIP errors per STS-N frame can

be indicated using the REI-L. For OC-48 signals, up to 255 BIP errors per

STS-N frame can be indicated. The current CV-L second register is

incremented for each BIP error indicated by the incoming REI-L.

ES-L Far-End Line Errored Seconds (ES-L) is a count of the seconds when at

least one line-layer BIP error was reported by the far-end LTE or an RDI-L

defect was present.

SES-L Far-End Line Severely Errored Seconds (SES-L) is a count of the seconds

when K (see GR-253-CORE for values) or more line-layer BIP errors

were reported by the far-end LTE or an RDI-L defect was present.

UAS-L Far-End Line Unavailable Seconds (UAS-L) is a count of the seconds

when the line is unavailable at the far end. A line becomes unavailable at

the far end when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-LFEs

and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that

do not qualify as SES-LFEs.

FC-L Far-End Line Failure Count (FC-L) is a count of the number of far-end

line failure events. A failure event begins when RFI-L failure is declared,

and it ends when the RFI-L failure clears. A failure event that begins in

one period and ends in another period is counted only in the period where

it began.

8-18

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

8.5.2 DS1 and DS1N Card Performance Monitoring Parameters

Figure 8-13 shows the signal types that support far-end PMs. Far-end VT and STS path performance

monitoring is supported for the DS1 card. Far-end DS1 path performance monitoring is not supported

for the DS1 card. Figure 8-14 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance

monitoring parameters for the DS1 and DS1N cards.

Figure 8-13 Monitored signal types for the DS1 and DS1N cards

Note The XX in the illustration above represents all PMs listed below with the given prefix and/or suffix.

Figure 8-14 PM read points on the DS1 and DS1N cards

55234

ONS 15454

DS1 OC48

Fiber

Near End

DS1 Signal

DS1 Path (DS1 XX) Far End PMs Not Supported

ONS 15454

DS1OC48

Far End

DS1 Signal

VT Path (XX-V) Far End PMs Supported

STS Path (STS XX-P) Far End PMs Not Supported

55233

ONS 15454

DS1 and DS1N Cards

LIU

Framer

BTC

Tx/Rx

XC10G Card OC-N

DS1 CV-L

DS1 ES-L

DS1 SES-L

DS1 LOSS-L

DS1 Rx AISS-P

DS1 Rx CV-P

DS1 Rx ES-P

DS1 Rx SAS-P

DS1 Rx SES-P

DS1 Rx UAS-P

DS1 Tx AISS-P

DS1 Tx CV-P

DS1 Tx ES-P

DS1 Tx SAS-P

DS1 Tx SES-P

DS1 Tx UAS-P

DS1 Side

Level

Path

Level

SONET Side

STS CV-P

STS ES-P

STS FC-P

STS SES-P

STS UAS-P

CV-V

ES-V

SES-V

UAS-V

PMs read on Framer

PMs read on LIU

8-19

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Table 8-7 DS1 Line PMs for the DS1 and DS1N Cards

Parameter Definition

DS1 CV-L Code Violation Line (CV-L) indicates the number of coding violations

occurring on the line. This parameter is a count of bipolar violations

(BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the accumulation

period.

DS1 ES-L Errored Seconds Line (ES-L) is a count of the seconds containing one or

more anomalies (BPV + EXZ) and/or defects (loss of signal) on the line.

DS1 SES-L Severely Errored Seconds Line (SES-L) is a count of the seconds

containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies (BPV + EXZ >

1544) and/or defects on the line.

DS1 LOSS-L Loss of Signal Seconds Line (LOSS-L) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more LOS defects.

Table 8-8 DS1 Receive Path PMs for the DS1 and DS1N Cards

Parameter Definition

DS1 Rx AISS-P Receive Path Alarm Indication Signal (Rx AIS-P) means an alarm

indication signal occurred on the receive end of the path. This parameter

is a count of seconds containing one or more AIS defects.

DS1 Rx CV-P Receive Path Code Violation (Rx CV-P) means a coding violation

occurred on the receive end of the path. For DS1-ESF paths, this

parameter is a count of detected CRC-6 errors. For the DS1-SF paths, the

Rx CV-P parameter is a count of detected frame bit errors (FE).

DS1 Rx ES-P Receive Path Errored Seconds (Rx ES-P) is a count of the seconds

containing one or more anomalies and/or defects for paths on the receive

end of the signal. For DS1-ESF paths, this parameter is a count of

one-second intervals containing one or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more

CS events, or one or more SEF or AIS defects. For DS1-SF paths, the Rx

ES-P parameter is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more

FE events, or one or more CS events, or one or more SEF or AIS defects.

DS1 Rx SAS-P Receive Path Severely Errored Seconds Frame/Alarm Indication Signal

(Rx SAS-P) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more

SEFs or one or more AIS defects on the receive end of the signal.

DS1 Rx SES-P Receive Path Severely Errored Seconds (Rx SES-P) is a count of the

seconds containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies and/or

defects for paths on the receive end of the signal. For the DS1-ESF paths,

this parameter is a count of seconds when 320 or more CRC-6 errors or

one or more SEF or AIS defects occurred. For DS1-SF paths, an SES is a

second containing either the occurrence of four FEs or one or more SEF

or AIS defects.

DS1 Rx UAS-P Receive Path Unavailable Seconds (Rx UAS-P) is a count of one-second

intervals when the DS1 path is unavailable on the receive end of the

signal. The DS1 path is unavailable when ten consecutive SESs occur. The

ten SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS1 path

becomes available when ten consecutive seconds occur with no SESs. The

ten seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time.

8-20

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Table 8-9 DS1 Transmit Path PMs for the DS1 and DS1N Cards

Parameter Definition

DS1 Tx AISS-P Transmit Path Alarm Indication Signal (Tx AIS-P) means an alarm

indication signal occurred on the transmit end of the path. This parameter

is a count of seconds containing one or more AIS defects.

DS1 Tx CV-P Transmit Path Code Violation (Tx CV-P) means a coding violation

occurred on the transmit end of the path. For DS1-ESF paths, this

parameter is a count of detected CRC-6 errors. For the DS1-SF paths, the

Tx CV-P parameter is a count of detected FEs.

DS1 Tx ES-P Transmit Path Errored Seconds (Tx ES-P) is a count of the seconds

containing one or more anomalies and/or defects for paths on the transmit

end of the signal. For DS1-ESF paths, this parameter is a count of

one-second intervals containing one or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more

CS events, or one or more SEF or AIS defects. For DS1-SF paths, the Tx

ES-P parameter is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more

FE events, or one or more CS events, or one or more SEF or AIS defects.

DS1 Tx SAS-P Transmit Path Severely Errored Seconds Frame/Alarm Indication Signal

(Tx SAS-P) is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more

SEFs or one or more AIS defects on the receive end of the signal.

DS1 Tx SES-P Transmit Path Severely Errored Seconds (Tx SES-P) is a count of the

seconds containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies and/or

defects for paths on the transmit end of the signal. For the DS1-ESF paths,

this parameter is a count of seconds when 320 or more CRC-6 errors or

one or more SEF or AIS defects occurred. For DS1-SF paths, an SES is a

second containing either the occurrence of four FEs or one or more SEF

or AIS defects.

DS1 Tx UAS-P Transmit Path Unavailable Seconds (Tx UAS-P) is a count of one-second

intervals when the DS1 path is unavailable on the transmit end of the

signal. The DS1 path is unavailable when ten consecutive SESs occur. The

ten SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS1 path

becomes available when ten consecutive seconds occur with no SESs. The

ten seconds with no SESs are excluded from unavailable time.

Table 8-10 VT Path PMs for the DS1 and DS1N Cards

Parameter Definition

CV-V Code Violation VT Layer (CV-V) is a count of the BIP errors detected at

the VT path layer. Up to two BIP errors can be detected per VT

superframe, with each error incrementing the current CV-V second

ES-V Errored Seconds VT Layer (ES-V) is a count of the seconds when at least

one VT Path BIP error was detected. An AIS-V defect (or a lower-layer,

traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-V defect can also cause an

ES-V.

8-21

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

SES-V Severely Errored Seconds VT Layer (SES-V) is a count of seconds when

K (600) or more VT Path BIP errors were detected. SES-V can also be

caused by an AIS-V defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end

defect) or an LOP-V defect.

UAS-V Unavailable Second VT Layer (UAS-V) is a count of the seconds when

the VT path was unavailable. A VT path becomes unavailable when ten

consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Vs, and it continues to be

unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as

SES-Vs.

Table 8-11 SONET Path PMs for the DS1 and DS1N Cards

Parameter Definition

STS CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors

detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP

errors can be detected per frame, with each error incrementing the current

CV-P second register.

STS ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds

when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS-P defect (or a

lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can also

cause an STS ES-P.

STS FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of

near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P

failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P, or a TIM-P failure is declared. A

failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path

supports ERDI-P for that path. The failure event ends when these failures

are cleared.

STS SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the

seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An

AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an

LOP-P defect can also cause an STS SES-P.

STS UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the

seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps,

and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that

do not qualify as SES-Ps.

Table 8-10 VT Path PMs for the DS1 and DS1N Cards (continued)

Parameter Definition

8-22

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

8.5.3 DS3 and DS3N Card Performance Monitoring Parameters

Figure 8-15 shows the signal types that support far-end PMs. Figure 8-16 shows where overhead bytes

detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3 and DS3N cards.

Figure 8-15 Monitored signal types for the DS3 and DS3N cards

Note The XX in the illustration above represents all PMs listed below with the given prefix and/or suffix.

Table 8-12 Far-End VT Path PMs for the DS1 Card

Parameter Definition

CV-V Far-End VT Path Coding Violations (CV-VFE) is a count of the number

of BIP errors detected by the far-end VT path terminating equipment

(PTE) and reported back to the near-end VT PTE using the REI-V

indication in the VT path overhead. Only one BIP error can be indicated

per VT superframe using the REI-V bit. The current CV-VFE second

REI-V.

ES-V Far-End VT Path Errored Seconds (ES-VFE) is a count of the seconds

when at least one VT path BIP error was reported by the far-end VT PTE,

or a one-bit RDI-V defect was present.

SES-V Far-End VT Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-VFE) is a count of the

seconds when K (600) or more VT path BIP errors were reported by the

far-end VT PTE or a one-bit RDI-V defect was present.

UAS-V Far-End VT Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-VFE) is a count of the

seconds when the VT path is unavailable at the far-end. A VT path is

unavailable at the far-end when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify

as SES-VFEs.

55311

ONS 15454

DS3 OC48

Fiber

Near End

DS3 Signal

DS3 Path (DS3 XX) Far End PMs Not Supported

ONS 15454

DS3OC48

Far End

DS3 Signal

STS Path (STS XX-P) Far End PMs Not Supported

8-23

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Figure 8-16 PM read points on the DS3 and DS3N cards

Table 8-13 Near-End DS3 Line PMs for the DS3 and DS3N Cards

Parameter Definition

DS3 CV-L Code Violation Line (CV-L) indicates the number of coding violations

occurring on the line. This parameter is a count of bipolar violations

(BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the accumulation

period.

DS3 ES-L Errored Seconds Line (ES-L) is a count of the seconds containing one or

more anomalies (BPV + EXZ) and/or defects (loss of signal) on the line.

DS3 SES-L Severely Errored Seconds Line (SES-L) is a count of the seconds

containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies (BPV + EXZ >

44) and/or defects on the line.

DS3 LOSS-L Line Loss of Signal (LOSS-L) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more LOS defects.

Table 8-14 Near-End DS3 Path PMs for the DS3 and DS3N Cards

Parameter Definition

DS3 ES-P Errored Seconds-Path (ES-P) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more CS events, or one

or more SEF or AIS defects.

DS3 SES-P Severely Errored Seconds-Path (SES-P) is a count of seconds where 320

or more CRC-6 errors occur or one or more SEF or AIS defects occur.

DS3 SAS-P Severely Errored Frame/Alarm Indication Signal-Path (SAS-P) is a count

of seconds containing one or more SEFs or one or more AIS defects.

55305

ONS 15454

DS3 & DS3N Cards

LIU

Mux/Demux ASIC

BTC

ASIC

XC10G Card OC-N

DS3 Side

Path

Level

SONET Side

STS CV-P

STS ES-P

STS FC-P

STS SES-P

STS UAS-P

DS3 CV-L

DS3 ES-L

DS3 SES-L

DS3 LOSS-L

DS3 ES-P

DS3 SES-P

DS3 SAS-P

DS3 AISS-P

DS3 UAS-P PMs read on Mux/Demux ASIC

PMs read on LIU

8-24

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

8.5.4 DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Card Performance Monitoring Parameters

Figure 8-17 shows the signal types that support far-end PMs. Figure 8-18 shows where overhead bytes

detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E

cards.

DS3 AISS-P Alarm Indication Signal Seconds-Path (AISS-P) is a count of seconds

containing one or more AIS defects.

DS3 UAS-P Unavailable Seconds-Path (UAS-P) is a count of one-second intervals

during which the DS3 path is unavailable.

Table 8-15 Near-End SONET Path PMs for the DS3 and DS3N Cards

Parameter Definition

STS CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors

detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP

errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P

second register.

STS ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds

when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS-P defect (or a

lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can also

cause an STS ES-P.

STS FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of

near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P

failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P, or a TIM-P failure is declared. A

failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path

supports ERDI-P for that path. The failure event ends when these failures

are cleared.

STS SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the

seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An

AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an

LOP-P defect can also cause an STS SES-P.

STS UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the

seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps,

and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that

do not qualify as SES-Ps.

Table 8-14 Near-End DS3 Path PMs for the DS3 and DS3N Cards (continued)

Parameter Definition

8-25

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Figure 8-17 Monitored signal types for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E cards

Note The XX in the illustration above represents all PMs listed below with the given prefix and/or suffix.

Figure 8-18 PM read points on the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E cards

61156

ONS 15454

DS3E OC48

Fiber

Near End

DS3 Signal

DS3E Path Far End PMs Are Supported

ONS 15454

DS3EOC48

Far End

DS3 Signal

STS Path (STS XX-P) Far End PMs Not Supported

55306

ONS 15454

DS3-12E & DS3N-12E Cards

LIU

Mux/Demux ASIC

BTC

ASIC

XC10G Card OC-N

DS3 Side

Path

Level

SONET Side

STS CV-P

STS ES-P

STS FC-P

STS SES-P

STS UAS-P

DS3 CV-L

DS3 ES-L

DS3 SES-L

DS3 LOSS-L

DS3 AISS-P

DS3 CVP-P

DS3 ESP-P

DS3 SASP-P

DS3 SESP-P

DS3 UASP-P

DS3 CVCP-P

DS3 ESCP-P

DS3 SESCP-P

DS3 UASCP-P

DS3 CVCP-PFE

DS3 ESCP-PFE

DS3 SASCP-PFE

DS3 SESCP-PFE

DS3 UASCP-PFE

PMs read on Mux/Demux ASIC

PMs read on LIU

8-26

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Table 8-16 Near-End DS3 Line PMs for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards

Parameter Definition

DS3 CV-L Code Violation Line (CV-L) indicates the number of coding violations

occurring on the line. This parameter is a count of bipolar violations

(BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the accumulation

period.

DS3 ES-L Errored Seconds Line (ES-L) is a count of the seconds containing one or

more anomalies (BPV + EXZ) and/or defects (i.e. loss of signal) on the

line.

DS3 SES-L Severely Errored Seconds Line (SES-L) is a count of the seconds

containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies (BPV + EXZ >

44) and/or defects on the line.

DS3 LOSS-L Line Loss of Signal (LOSS-L) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more LOS defects.

Table 8-17 Near-End DS3 Path PMs for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards

Parameter Definition

DS3 AISS-P AIS Seconds Path (AISS-P) is a count of one-second intervals containing

one or more AIS defects.

DS3 CVP-P Code Violation Path (CVP-P) is a code violation parameter for M23

applications. CVP-P is a count of P-bit parity errors occurring in the

accumulation period.

DS3 ESP-P Errored Second Path (ESP-P) is a count of seconds containing one or more

P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects.

DS3 SASP-P SEF/AIS Seconds Path (SASP-P) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more SEFs or one or more AIS defects on the path.

DS3 SESP-P Severely Errored Seconds Path (DS3 SESP-P) is a count of seconds

containing more than 44 P-bit parity violations, one or more SEF defects,

or one or more AIS defects.

DS3 UASP-P Unavailable Second Path (DS3 UASP-P) is a count of one-second

intervals when the DS3 path is unavailable. A DS3 path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive SESP-Ps occur. The ten SESP-Ps are

included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS3 path becomes

available when ten consecutive seconds with no SESP-Ps occur. The ten

seconds with no SESP-Ps are excluded from unavailable time.

Table 8-18 Near-End CP-bit Path PMs for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards

Parameter Definition

DS3 CVCP-P Code Violation Path (CVCP-P) is a count of CP-bit parity errors occurring

in the accumulation period.

DS3 ESCP-P Errored Second Path (ESCP-P) is a count of seconds containing one or

more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS

defects. ESCP-P is defined for the C-bit parity application.

8-27

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

DS3 SESCP-P Severely Errored Seconds Path (SESCP-P) is a count of seconds

containing more than 44 CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or

one or more AIS defects.

DS3 UASCP-P Unavailable Second Path (UASCP-P) is a count of one-second intervals

when the DS3 path is unavailable. A DS3 path becomes unavailable when

ten consecutive SESCP-Ps occur. The ten SESCP-Ps are included in

unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS3 path becomes available when

ten consecutive seconds with no SESCP-Ps occur. The ten seconds with

no SESCP-Ps are excluded from unavailable time.

Table 8-19 Near-End SONET Path PMs for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards

Parameter Definition

STS CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors

detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP

errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P

second register.

STS ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds

when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS-P defect (or a

lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can also

cause an STS ES-P.

STS FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of

near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P

failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P, or a TIM-P failure is declared. A

failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path

supports ERDI-P for that path. The failure event ends when these failures

are cleared.

STS SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the

seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An

AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an

LOP-P defect can also cause an STS SES-P.

STS UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the

seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps,

and continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that

do not qualify as SES-Ps.

Table 8-18 Near-End CP-bit Path PMs for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards (continued)

Parameter Definition

8-28

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

8.5.5 DS3XM-6 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters

Figure 8-19 shows the signal types that support far-end PMs. Figure 8-20 shows where overhead bytes

detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the DS3XM-6 card.

Figure 8-19 Monitored signal types for the DS3XM-6 card

Table 8-20 Far-End CP-bit Path PMs for the DS3-12E and DS3N-12E Cards

Parameter Definition

DS3 CVCP-P Code Violation (CVCP-PFE) is a parameter that is counted when the three

far-end block error (FEBE) bits in a M-frame are not all collectively set to

DS3 ESCP-P Errored Second (ESCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals containing

one or more M-frames with the three FEBE bits not all collectively set to

1 or one or more far-end SEF/AIS defects.

DS3 SASCP-P SEF/AIS Second (SASCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more far-end SEF/AIS defects.

DS3 SESCP-P Severely Errored Second (SESCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more 44 M-frames with the three FEBE bits not all

collectively set to 1 or one or more far-end SEF/AIS defects.

DS3 UASCP-P Unavailable Second (UASCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals

when the DS3 path becomes unavailable. A DS3 path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive far-end CP-bit SESs occur. The ten

CP-bit SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS3

path becomes available when ten consecutive seconds occur with no

CP-bit SESs. The ten seconds with no CP-bit SESs are excluded from

unavailable time.

55312

ONS 15454

DS3XM OC48

Fiber

Near End

Muxed DS3 Signal

DS1 Path (DS1 XX) Far End PMs Not Supported

ONS 15454

DS3XMOC48

Far End

Muxed DS3 Signal

DS3 Path (DS3 XX) Far End PMs Supported

VT Path (XX-V) Far End PMs Supported

STS Path (STS XX-P) Far End PMs Not Supported

8-29

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Note The XX in the illustration above represents all PMs listed below with the given prefix and/or suffix.

Figure 8-20 PM read points on the DS3XM-6 card

Table 8-21 Near-End DS3 Line PMs for the DS3XM-6 Card

Parameter Definition

DS3 CV-L Code Violation Line (CV-L) indicates the number of coding violations

occurring on the line. This parameter is a count of bipolar violations

(BPVs) and excessive zeros (EXZs) occurring over the accumulation

period.

DS3 ES-L Errored Seconds Line (ES-L) is a count of the seconds containing one or

more anomalies (BPV + EXZ) and/or defects (i.e. LOS) on the line.

DS3 SES-L Severely Errored Seconds Line (SES-L) is a count of the seconds

containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies (BPV + EXZ >

44) and/or defects on the line.

DS3 LOSS-L Line Loss of Signal (LOSS-L) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more LOS defects.

55307

ONS 15454

DS3XM-6 Card

LIU

Mapper Unit

BTC

ASIC

XC10G Card OC-N

DS1 Side

Level

SONET Side

CV-V

ES-V

SES-V

UAS-V

DS1 AISS-P

DS1 ES-P

DS1 SAS-P

DS1 SES-P

DS1 UAS-P

DS3 CV-L

DS3 ES-L

DS3 SES-L

DS3 LOSS-L

DS3 AISS-P

DS3 CVP-P

DS3 ESP-P

DS3 SASP-P

DS3 SESP-P

DS3 UASP-P

DS3 CVCP-P

DS3 ESCP-P

DS3 SASCP-P

DS3 SESCP-P

DS3 UASCP-P

STS CV-P

STS ES-P

STS FC-P

STS SES-P

STS UAS-P

PMs read on Mapper Unit ASIC

The DS3 path is terminated on the

transmux and regenerated.

PMs read on LIU

Path

Level

8-30

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Table 8-22 Near-End DS3 Path PMs for the DS3XM-6 Card

Parameter Definition

DS3 AISS-P AIS Seconds Path (AISS-P) is a count of one-second intervals containing

one or more AIS defects.

DS3 CVP-P Code Violation Path (CVP-P) is a code violation parameter for M23

applications. CVP-P is a count of P-bit parity errors occurring in the

accumulation period.

DS3 ESP-P Errored Second Path (ESP-P) is a count of seconds containing one or more

P-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS defects.

DS3 SASP-P SEF/AIS Seconds Path (SASP-P) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more SEFs or one or more AIS defects on the path.

DS3 SESP-P Severely Errored Seconds Path (SESP-P) is a count of seconds containing

more than 44 P-bit parity violations, one or more SEF defects, or one or

more AIS defects.

DS3 UASP-P Unavailable Second Path (UASP-P) is a count of one-second intervals

when the DS3 path is unavailable. A DS3 path becomes unavailable when

ten consecutive SESP-Ps occur. The ten SESP-Ps are included in

unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS3 path becomes available when

ten consecutive seconds with no SESP-Ps occur. The ten seconds with no

SESP-Ps are excluded from unavailable time.

Table 8-23 Near-End CP-bit Path PMs for the DS3XM-6 Card

Parameter Definition

DS3 CVCP-P Code Violation Path (CVCP-P) is a count of CP-bit parity errors occurring

in the accumulation period.

DS3 ESCP-P Errored Second Path (ESCP-P) is a count of seconds containing one or

more CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or one or more AIS

defects.

DS3 SESCP-P Severely Errored Seconds Path (SESCP-P) is a count of seconds

containing more than 44 CP-bit parity errors, one or more SEF defects, or

one or more AIS defects.

DS3 UASCP-P Unavailable Seconds Path (DS3 UASCP-P) is a count of one-second

intervals when the DS3 path is unavailable. A DS3 path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive SESCP-Ps occur. The ten SESCP-Ps are

included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS3 path becomes

available when ten consecutive seconds with no SESCP-Ps occur. The ten

seconds with no SESCP-Ps are excluded from unavailable time.

8-31

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Table 8-24 Near-End DS1 Path PMs for the DS3XM-6 Card

Parameter Definition

DS1 AISS-P Alarm Indication Signal Path (AIS-P) means an AIS occurred on the path.

This parameter is a count of seconds containing one or more AIS defects.

DS1 ES-P Errored Seconds Path (ES-P) is a count of the seconds containing one or

more anomalies and/or defects for paths. For DS1-ESF paths, this

parameter is a count of one-second intervals containing one or more

CRC-6 errors, or one or more CS events, or one or more SEF or AIS

defects. For DS1-SF paths, the ES-P parameter is a count of one-second

intervals containing one or more FE events, or one or more CS events, or

one or more SEF or AIS defects.

DS1 SAS-P Severely Errored Seconds Path Frame/Alarm Indication Signal (SAS-P) is

a count of one-second intervals containing one or more SEFs or one or

more AIS defects.

DS1 SES-P Severely Errored Seconds Path (SES-P) is a count of the seconds

containing more than a particular quantity of anomalies and/or defects for

paths. For the DS1-ESF paths, this parameter is a count of seconds when

320 or more CRC-6 errors or one or more SEF or AIS defects occurs. For

DS1-SF paths, an SES is a second containing either the occurrence of

eight FEs, four FEs, or one or more SEF or AIS defects.

DS1 UAS-P Unavailable Seconds Path (UAS-P) is a count of one-second intervals

when the DS1 path is unavailable. The DS1 path is unavailable when ten

consecutive SESs occur. The ten SESs are included in unavailable time.

Once unavailable, the DS1 path becomes available when ten consecutive

seconds occur with no SESs. The ten seconds with no SESs are excluded

from unavailable time.

Table 8-25 Near-End VT PMs for the DS3XM-6 Card

Parameter Definition

CV-V Code Violation VT Layer (CV-V) is a count of the BIP errors detected at

the VT path layer. Up to two BIP errors can be detected per VT

superframe; each error increments the current CV-V second register.

ES-V Errored Seconds VT Layer (ES-V) is a count of the seconds when at least

one VT Path BIP error was detected. An AIS-V defect (or a lower-layer,

traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-V defect can also cause ES-V.

SES-V Severely Errored Seconds VT Layer (SES-V) is a count of seconds when

K (600) or more VT Path BIP errors were detected. An AIS-V defect (or

a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-V defect can

also cause SES-V.

UAS-V Unavailable Seconds VT Layer (UAS-V) is a count of the seconds when

the VT path was unavailable. A VT path becomes unavailable when ten

consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Vs and continues to be

unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as

SES-Vs.

8-32

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards

Table 8-26 Near-End SONET Path PMs for the DS3XM-6 Card

Parameter Definition

STS CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors

detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP

errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P

second register.

STS ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds

when at least one STS path BIP error was detected. An AIS-P defect (or a

lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can also

cause an STS ES-P.

STS FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of

near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-P

failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P, or a TIM-P failure is declared. A

failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path

supports ERDI-P for that path. The failure event ends when these failures

are cleared.

STS SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the

seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An

AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an

LOP-P defect can also cause an STS SES-P.

STS UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the

seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps,

and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that

do not qualify as SES-Ps.

Table 8-27 Far-End CP-bit Path PMs for the DS3XM-6 Card

Parameter Definition

DS3 CVCP-P Code Violation (CVCP-PFE) is a parameter that is counted when the three

FEBE bits in a M-frame are not all collectively set to 1.

DS3 ESCP-P Errored Second (ESCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals containing

one or more M-frames with the three FEBE bits not all collectively set to

1 or one or more far-end SEF/AIS defects.

DS3 SASCP-P SEF/AIS Second (SASCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more far-end SEF/AIS defects.

DS3 SESCP-P Severely Errored Second (SESCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals

containing one or more 44 M-frames with the three FEBE bits not all

collectively set to 1 or one or more far-end SEF/AIS defects.

DS3 UASCP-P Unavailable Second (UASCP-PFE) is a count of one-second intervals

when the DS3 path becomes unavailable. A DS3 path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive far-end CP-bit SESs occur. The ten

CP-bit SESs are included in unavailable time. Once unavailable, the DS3

path becomes available when ten consecutive seconds with no CP-bit

SESs occur. The ten seconds with no CP-bit SESs are excluded from

unavailable time.

8-33

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards

8.6 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards

The following sections define performance monitoring parameters and definitions for the OC-3, OC-12,

OC-48, and OC-192.

8.6.1 OC-3 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters

Figure 8-21 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring

parameters for the OC-3 card.

Table 8-28 Far-End VT PMs for the DS3XM-6 Card

Parameter Definition

CV-V Code Violation VT Layer (CV-V) is a count of the BIP errors detected at

the VT path layer. Up to two BIP errors can be detected per VT

superframe; each error increments the current CV-V second register.

ES-V Errored Seconds VT Layer (ES-V) is a count of the seconds when at least

one VT Path BIP error was detected. An AIS-V defect (or a lower-layer,

traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-V defect can also cause an

ES-V.

SES-V Severely Errored Seconds VT Layer (SES-V) is a count of seconds when

K (600) or more VT Path BIP errors were detected. An AIS-V defect (or

a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-V defect can

also cause an SES-V.

UAS-V Unavailable Second VT Layer (UAS-V) is a count of the seconds when

the VT path was unavailable. A VT path becomes unavailable when ten

consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Vs and continues to be

unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as

SES-Vs.

8-34

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards

Figure 8-21 PM read points on the OC-3 card

Note For PM locations relating to protection switch counts, see the GR-253-CORE document.

Table 8-29 Near-End Section PMs for the OC-3 Card

Parameter Definition

CV-S Section Coding Violation (CV-S) is a count of BIP errors detected at the

section-layer (i.e. using the B1 byte in the incoming SONET signal). Up

to eight section BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame, with each

error incrementing the current CV-S second register.

ES-S Section Errored Seconds (ES-S) is a count of the number of seconds when

at least one section-layer BIP error was detected or an SEF or LOS defect

was present.

SES-S Section Severely Errored Seconds (SES-S) is a count of the seconds when

K (see GR-253 for value) or more section-layer BIP errors were detected

or an SEF or LOS defect was present.

SEFS-S Section Severely Errored Framing Seconds (SEFS-S) is a count of the

seconds when an SEF defect was present. An SEF defect is expected to be

present during most seconds when an LOS or LOF defect is present.

However, there can be situations when the SEFS-S parameter is only

incremented based on the presence of the SEF defect.

55308

ONS 15454

OC-3 Card

Pointer Processors

BTC

ASIC

XC10G Card DS1

CV-S

ES-S

SES-S

SEFS-S

CV-L

ES-L

SES-L

UAS-L

FC-L

PPJC-Pdet

NPJC-Pdet

PPJC-Pgen

NPJC-Pgen

Path

Level

STS CV-P

STS ES-P

STS FC-P

STS SES-P

STS UAS-P

PMs read on BTC ASIC

PMs read on PMC

8-35

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards

Table 8-30 Near-End Line Layer PMs for the OC-3 Card

Parameter Definition

CV-L Near-End Line Code Violation (CV-L) is a count of BIP errors detected at

the line-layer (i.e. using the B2 bytes in the incoming SONET signal). Up

to 8 x N BIP errors can be detected per STS-N frame; each error

increments the current CV-L second register.

ES-L Near-End Line Errored Seconds (ES-L) is a count of the seconds when at

least one line-layer BIP error was detected or an AIS-L defect was

present.

SES-L Near-End Line Severely Errored Seconds (SES-L) is a count of the

seconds when K (see GR-253-CORE for values) or more line-layer BIP

errors were detected or an AIS-L defect was present.

UAS-L Near-End Line Unavailable Seconds (UAS-L) is a count of the seconds

when the line is unavailable. A line becomes unavailable when ten

consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ls, and it continues to be

unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that do not qualify as

SES-Ls.

FC-L Near-End Line Failure Count (FC-L) is a count of the number of near-end

line failure events. A failure event begins when an AIS-L failure is

declared or when a lower-layer traffic-related, near-end failure is

declared. This failure event ends when the failure is cleared. A failure

event that begins in one period and ends in another period is counted only

in the period where it begins.

Table 8-31 Near-End Line Layer PMs for the OC-3 Cards

Parameter Definition

PSC (1+1 protection) In a 1 + 1 protection scheme for a working card, Protection Switching

Count (PSC) is a count of the number of times service switches from a

working card to a protection card plus the number of times service

switches back to the working card.

For a protection card, PSC is a count of the number of times service

switches to a working card from a protection card plus the number of

times service switches back to the protection card. The PSC PM is only

applicable if revertive line-level protection switching is used.

Note BLSR is not supported on the OC-3 card; therefore, the PSC-W,

PSC-S, and PSC-R PMs do not increment.

PSD Protection Switching Duration (PSD) applies to the length of time, in

seconds, that service is carried on another line. For a working line, PSD

is a count of the number of seconds that service was carried on the

protection line.

For the protection line, PSD is a count of the seconds that the line was

used to carry service. The PSD PM is only applicable if revertive

line-level protection switching is used.

Note BLSR is not supported on the OC-3 card; therefore, the PSD-W,

PSD-S, and PSD-R PMs do not increment.

8-36

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards

Table 8-32 Near-End SONET Path H-byte PMs for the OC-3 Card

Parameter Definition

PPJC-Pdet Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (PPJC-Pdet) is a

count of the positive pointer justifications detected on a particular path on

an incoming SONET signal.

NPJC-Pdet Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Detected (NPJC-Pdet) is a

count of the negative pointer justifications detected on a particular path on

an incoming SONET signal.

PPJC-Pgen Positive Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (PPJC-Pgen) is

a count of the positive pointer justifications generated for a particular path

to reconcile the frequency of the SPE with the local clock.

NPJC-Pgen Negative Pointer Justification Count, STS Path Generated (NPJC-Pgen) is

a count of the negative pointer justifications generated for a particular

path to reconcile the frequency of the synchronous payload envelope

(SPE) with the local clock.

Table 8-33 Near-End SONET Path PMs for the OC-3 Card

Parameter Definition

Note SONET path PMs will not count unless IPPM is enabled. For additional information, see the

“Enable Intermediate-Path Performance Monitoring” procedure on page 7-25. The far-end

IPPM feature is not supported in Software R3.1. However, SONET path PMs can be monitored

by logging into the far-end node directly.

STS CV-P Near-End STS Path Coding Violations (CV-P) is a count of BIP errors

detected at the STS path layer (i.e., using the B3 byte). Up to eight BIP

errors can be detected per frame; each error increments the current CV-P

second register.

STS ES-P Near-End STS Path Errored Seconds (ES-P) is a count of the seconds

when one or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An AIS-P defect

(or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an LOP-P defect can

also cause an STS ES-P.

STS FC-P Near-End STS Path Failure Counts (FC-P) is a count of the number of

near-end STS path failure events. A failure event begins with an AIS-P

failure, an LOP-P failure, a UNEQ-P failure, or a TIM-P failure is

declared, or if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path supports ERDI-P

for that path. The failure event ends when these failures are cleared.

STS SES-P Near-End STS Path Severely Errored Seconds (SES-P) is a count of the

seconds when K (2400) or more STS path BIP errors were detected. An

AIS-P defect (or a lower-layer, traffic-related, near-end defect) or an

LOP-P defect can also cause an STS SES-P.

STS UAS-P Near-End STS Path Unavailable Seconds (UAS-P) is a count of the

seconds when the STS path was unavailable. An STS path becomes

unavailable when ten consecutive seconds occur that qualify as SES-Ps,

and it continues to be unavailable until ten consecutive seconds occur that

do not qualify as SES-Ps.

8-37

Cisco ONS 15454 Installation and Operations Guide

November 2001

Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring

Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards

8.6.2 OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters

Figure 8-22 shows the signal types that support far-end PMs. Figure 8-23 shows where overhead bytes

detected on the ASICs produce performance monitoring parameters for the OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192

cards.

Figure 8-22 Monitored signal types for the OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 cards

Table 8-34 Far-End Line Layer PMs for the OC-3 Card